Home

Service Manual / ENGLISH CD 1230-40-50 // DC 2230-40-50

1.
2. ls z E o lo 2 3 A S B w 250 tt Im 500 Wi Le ul gt ul z z hi na a ele z Lu z xr QNS v 6 a z ou A DIS 13S sts SI E 2 255 QN9 els e z rn 58 gt 86 le DIS 13S TI o RE gt gt E T GAvZ ae gt aa eyo ANNOS A ST 6 eia era Bg ON CIC DIE pee DIS 13S o oF TIE DE sra ora x o sia sia D biz 2 via ria E z EE O 9 9 PENSI ig era 3 s e zralzra 9 5 a vlr soaz vajra ELE tle E ejej e anse orajora Ta TTI Gaver LE z z NOTH 68 ea 9 PENSO mu NO a 89 ea 18 48 Wau TW 98 98 4 satan ONS TMS TT vi v va va Ga E QNS et e calea e ACE o ZMSTWI 7 z z D N P Tr MS
3. Figure 2 1 7 Optical section 1 Mirror 1 frame 2 Mirror 2 frame 3 Exposure lamp EL 4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 3 7 Lens 8 CCD PWB CCDPWB 9 Image scanning unit 10 Laser scanner unit LSU 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Original scanning The original image is illuminated by the exposure lamp EL and scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB in the image scan ning unit via the three mirrors the reflected light being converted to an electrical signal The scanner and mirror frames travel to scan on the optical rails on the front and rear of the machine to scan from side to side The speed of the mirror frames is half the speed of the scanner When the DP is used the scanner and mirror frames stop at the DP original scanning position to start scanning Original CCDPWB Image data SHDPWB Image data communication Figure 2 1 8 Optional section block diagram 2 1 6 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Image printing The image data scanned by the CCD PWB CCDPWB is processed on the main PWB MPWB and transmitted as image printing data to the laser scanner unit LSU By repeatedly turning the laser on and off the laser scanner unit forms a latent image o
4. Figure 2 1 25 Duplex section EPWB DUPPCSW O YC10 B4 DUPFCL L YC10 B2 Figure 2 1 26 Duplex section block diagram 2 1 17 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex copying Paper of which copying onto the reverse side is complete is conveyed to the switchback section the eject motor switches from normal rotation to reverse rotation to switch the eject roller to reverse rotation and the paper conveying direction is reversed Paper that has been switched back is conveyed to the duplex section via the eject roller and the switchback roller Paper that has been conveyed to the duplex section is conveyed to the paper feed section again by rotation of the upper duplex feed roller and the lower duplex feed roller and copying onto the front side is performed Eject roller Switchback roller Eject roller Eject roller U gt Upper duplex feed rolle
5. Item Image Description Original Page Remarks order i p Item No Mode x 3 Adjusting the lateral squareness Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner U993 PG2 P 1 5 23 printing adjustment unit printing adjustment Test chart O Adjusting the magnification in the Polygon motor speed adjustment U053 POLYGON MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 21 main scanning direction printing adjustment Adjusting the magnification in the Drive motor speed adjustment U053 MAIN MOTOR U053 test pattern P 1 3 21 auxiliary scanning direction print ing adjustment Adjusting the center line printing Adjusting the LSU print start timing U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern P 1 3 19 adjustment O lt gt Adjusting the center line of the cas Adjusting the position of the rack adjuster U034 LSU OUT LEFT U034 test pattern Adjusts the position of each paper source settes and paper feeder printing 5 adjustment LL Adjusting the leading edge registra Registration clutch turning on timing U034 LSU OUT TOP U034 test pattern P 1 3 18 tion printing adjustment secondary paper feed start timing dd Adjusting the leading edge margin LSU illumination start timing U402 LESD U402 test pattern P 1 3 64 up ji printing adjustment Adjusting the trailing edge margin LSU illumination end timing U402 TRAIL U402 test pattern P 1 3 64 To make an adjustment fo
6. Attach the job separator tray C to the rail 17 of the job separator A by sliding it from the front side Insert the fitting section 18 on the right side of the job separator tray C into the recessed portion 19 of the MFP Putthe hook 20 on the right side onto the pin 21 located inside the MFP Fixer le plateau du s parateur de travaux C au rail 17 du s parateur de travaux A en le faisant glisser depuis l avant Ins rer la section de la garniture 18 sur le c t droit du s parateur de travaux C dans la partie en retrait 19 du MFP Mettre le crochet 20 sur le c t droit sur la goupille 21 situ e dans le MFP Instale la bandeja del separador de trabajos C en el carril 17 del separador de trabajos A desliz ndolo por el lado delantero Inserte la secci n de fijaci n 18 en el lado derecho de la bandeja del separador de trabajos C en la parte entrada 19 del MFP Ponga el gancho 20 en el lado derecho del pasador 21 ubicado dentro del MFP Die J obtrennerablage C von der Vorderseite auf die Schiene 17 des J obtrenners A schieben Die Passkante 18 auf der rechten Seite der J obtrennerablage C in die Aussparung 19 des MFP einf hren Den Haken 20 auf der rechten Seite auf den Stift 21 im Inneren des MFP setzen Montate il vassoio del separatore C sulla rotaia 17 del separatore stesso facendolo scorrere dal lato frontale In
7. 24 DELI UT FR vu B DI NH IC va vilitate Se IC BO PULL 7 AV K Bh fT 5 Operation check 1 Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and turn the main switch on 2 Select the staple mode and make a stapled copy to check that stapling is performed properly V rification du fonctionnement 1 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation du MFP dans une prise murale et mettre l interrupteur principal sous tension 2 S lectionner le mode d agrafeuse et effectuer une copie agraf e pour v rifier le bon fonctionnement de l agrafeuse Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Enchufe el cable el ctrico del MFP en un tomacorriente y conecte el interruptor principal 2 Seleccione el modo de grapas y haga una copia grapada para comprobar que el grapado se hace correctamente Betriebspr fung 1 Den Netzstecker des MFP in eine Netzsteckdose einstecken und den Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Den Heftmodus w hlen und eine geheftete Kopie anfertigen um zu pr fen ob die Heftung korrekt durchgef hrt wird Verifica di funzionamento 1 Inserite il cavo di alimentazione dell MFP nella presa di rete e quindi accendetela 2 Selezionate il modo graffatrice e quindi eseguite una copia graffata in modo da vericare che la graffatrice funzioni correttamente EEN 1 AF MEP EPL LUE AREE pol d AS 2 MERO METIO MEA TUT EFRR 1 MP RRO RAZIZ
8. 1 5 1 SB TOMO Maes senate Ete t D t iii rea ai 1 5 1 1 5 2 Paper feed Section di 1 5 2 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys 1 5 2 2 Detaching and refitting the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys 1 5 4 3 Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner i 1 5 9 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 3 Optical section AA ee ee i ed i i ep ee ae 1 5 11 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp ii 1 5 11 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires em emen 1 5 13 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU referencCe emen 1 5 18 4 Adjusting the position of the ISU referenCe emen 1 5 20 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit eene 1 5 21 6 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference ii 1 5 23 1 524 Dr m sectlOn s iih lee e e e ebd ir TER ila 1 5 24 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit nennen nnns 1 5 24 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit 1 5 25 125 5 Developing Secta 1 5 26 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit eme 1 5 26 15 60 Transfer SOCOM T aid cs 1 5 27 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit 1 5 27 1 5 7 F ser Sectloriz benino eni ie tete ie aia re e i enit ee ctia 1 5 28 1
9. 2 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting 1 Select an item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting ORIGINAL R Original threshold value R 0 to 255 105 ORIGINAL G Original threshold value G 0 to 255 105 ORIGINAL B Original threshold value B 0 to 255 105 LIGHT SOURCE R Light source threshold value R 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE G Light source threshold value G 0 to 255 60 LIGHT SOURCE B Light source threshold value B 0 to 255 60 WAIT TIME Time from activation of the original detection switch 0 to 255 ODSW to original size judgment A4R AREA Original size detection position display mm 220 240 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 37 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U100 Setting the main high voltage Description Performs main charging Purpose To check main charging Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated The selected operation starts Display Description MC ON Turning the main charger on LASER ON OFF Turning the main charger on and the laser scanner unit on and off 3 To stop operation press the stop key Complet
10. To increase the angle for slanted stapling sample 1 decrease the preset value To decrease the angle for slanted stapling sample 2 increase the preset value js X Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 21 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting centerfold unit 1 Select the item to be set Display Description WIDTH U HP ADJ Adjustment of upper side registration home position WIDTH L HP ADJ Adjustment of lower side registration home position STAPLE POS ADJ1 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 letter size STAPLE POS ADJ2 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 legal size STAPLE POS ADJ3 Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3 ledger size BOOKLET POS ADJ1 Adjustment of center folding position for A4 letter size BOOKLET POS ADJ2 Adjustment of center folding position for B4 legal size BOOKLET POS ADJ3 Adjustment of center folding position for A3 ledger size Setting adjustment of upper lower side registration home position 1 Select WIDTH U HP ADJ or WIDTH L HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys i Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of upper side registration home position 20 to 20 0 0 1 mm Adjustment of lower side registration home position 46 to 46 0 0 1 mm 3 Press the start key The value is set
11. wid D Herraje de control de ngulo PS E Pas ador inne meno ene 3 Gelieferte Teile A DP ep io raa aet 1 B Originalmatte a1 C Befestigungshalterung wad D Winkeleinstellbefestigung 1 EStdt e oe s 3 B eif RN 2 D 3 BERS Bee eee 1 aov EP 3 F G om om om M4 x 14TP screw 4 Label Operation procedure except for 100 V models 1 for metric specification for inch specification Caution label Remove original except for 100 V models 1 Caution label Original face up except for 100 V models 1 Etiquette relative la proc dure d utilisation sauf pour les mod les 100 V 1 pour des sp cifications m triques pour des sp cifications anglo saxonnes Etiquette d avertissement relative au retrait de l original sauf pour les mod les 100 V 1 Etiquette d avertissement relative l orien tation vers le haut de la face de l original sauf pour les mod les 100 V m Etiqueta Procedimiento operativo excepto para modelos de 100 V 1 para especificaciones en el sistema m trico para especificaciones en el sistema de pulgadas Etiqueta de precauci n Retire original excepto para los modelos de 100 V 1 Etiqueta de precauci n Original cara arriba excepto para los modelos
12. Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier s instruction handbook a ia Q 2 Precautions for Maintenance AA WARNING Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures AA A E Llano N Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and protective CIRCUITS usi ni tet ORE Oe a BOs cea dea ER SU An N Always use parts having the correct specifications em N Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related bro chure when replacing them Using a piece of wire for example could lead to fire or other serious o accidenti sala iatale E IE When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part always use the correct scale and measure carefully sssssse Q Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection e Check that the power cable covering is free of damage Check that the power plug is dust free If it is dirty clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock nono Q Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers Leaking
13. Lift plate stopper m CARA J 3l LT TT Figure 1 2 6 Load paper 1 Pull the cassette out Paper width guides 2 Holding the paper width adjusting tab both ends move the paper width guides to fit the di adjusting tab paper Figure 1 2 7 3 Adjust the length adjustment plate to fit the paper size Length adjustment plate Figure 1 2 8 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the cassette Figure 1 2 9 Install the toner container 1 Open the front cover 2 Tap the top of the toner container five to six times Toner container Figure 1 2 10 3 Shake the toner container approximately 10 Toner container times in the horizontal direction to stir toner Figure 1 2 11 1 2 7 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Gently push the toner container into the machine along the rails Push the container all the way into the machine until it locks in place Install the waste toner box 1 2 Close the front cover Install the waste toner box in the machine Install the optional original cover or the DP 1 Install the optional original cover or DP Install other optional devices 1 Install the optional devices job separator built in finisher document finisher and or fax kit etc as necessary Conn
14. Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 3 Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle 2GN 2GP 2GR Points and cautions Page Optical section Section Laser scanner unit Platen Slit glass Mirror 1 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 Reflector Exposure lamp Optical rail Original size detection sensor Maintenance part location Check or clean Clean Clean Clean Check or replace Grease Check or clean Method User call 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call User call User call User call User call User call User call Maintenance cycle Clean the shield glass with a dry cloth Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth Clean with a dry cloth or alco hol Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Clean with alcohol and then a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Clean with a dry cloth only if vertical black lines appear on the copy image Replace if an image problem occurs Check noise and shifting and then apply scanner rail grease EM 50L Clean the sensor emitter and sensor receiver with alcohol or a dry cloth only if there is a problem Points and cautions P 1 5 21 T
15. Paper path Figure 1 1 3 Machine cross section Oogcguoouboma Paper feed section Main charging section Optical section Developing section Transfer and separation section Cleaning and charge erasing section Fuser section Eject and switchback section Duplex section 1 2 1 1 2GN 2GP 2GR Installation environment Temperature 10 to 32 5 C 50 to 90 5 F Humidity 15 to 80 RH Power supply 120 V AC 12A orless 220 to 240 V AC 6 5 A or less Power source frequency 50 Hz 0 3 60 Hz 0 3 Installation location Avoid direct sunlight or bright lighting Ensure that the photoconductor will not be exposed to direct sunlight or other strong light when removing paper jams Avoid extremes of temperature and humidity abrupt ambient temperature changes and hot or cold air directed onto the machine Avoid dust and vibration Choose a surface capable of supporting the weight of the machine Place the machine on a level surface maximum allowance inclination 1 Avoid air borne substances that may adversely affect the machine or degrade the photoconductor such as mer cury acidic of alkaline vapors inorganic gasses NOx SOx gases and chlorine based organic solvents Select a room with good ventilation Allow sufficient access for proper operation and maintenance of the machine Machine front 1000 mm 39 3 8 Machine rear 100 mm 3 15 16 Machine right 300 mm 11 13 16 Machine left 300 mm 11 13 16 100 mm 3 15 16
16. 4 Nach dem Abschluss der Oberfl cheneinstellung F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach unten zeigen und das Original einstellen indem die mit F und R markierte Seite zuerst in den DP eingef hrt wird 5 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einstellen Die Tasten DP FACE DOWN SCHRIFTSEITE NACH UNTEN NORMAL TARGET NORMALZIEL START INPUT EINGABE und START der Reihe nach dr cken um die hintere Oberfl che einzustellen 6 Bei richtigem Ergebnis wird RESULT OK 00 ERGEBNIS OK 00 auf der Anzeige angezeigt und die Einstellung ist abgeschlossen Wenn ERROR XX FEHLER XX angezeigt wird ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen Die eingestellte Originalposition pr fen und die Schritte 4 und 5 wiederholen bis RESULT OK 00 ERGEBNIS OK 00 angezeigt wird Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung 4 Una volta conclusa la regolazione della superficie orientare F e R dell autoregolazione originale DP verso il basso e disporre l originale inserendo nel DP prima il lato su cui sono contrassegnati F e R 5 Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U411 Premere il tasto DP FACE DOWN FACCIATA GI il tasto NORMAL TARGET DESTINAZIONE NORMALE il tasto START INPUT AVVIA INPUT e START AVVIA per regolare la superficie posteriore 6 Quando sul display appare RESULT OK 00 RISULTATO OK 00 la regolazione completata Se compare ERROR XX ERRORE XX la regolazione non riuscita Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell or
17. Maintenance Description item No U073 Checking scanner operation Description Simulates the scanner operation under arbitrary conditions Purpose To check scanner operation Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated Display Description SCANNER MOTOR HOME POSITION DP READING DUST CHECK Scanner operation Home position operation DP scanning position operation Dust adhesion check operation with lamp on Setting SCANNER MOTOR 1 Select SCANNER MOTORI 2 Select the item 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Operating conditions Setting range ZOOM Magnification 25 to 40096 SIZE Original size See below LAMP On and off of the exposure lamp 0 off or 1 on Original sizes for each setting in SIZE Setting Paper size Setting Paper size 5000 A4 5000 A5R 4300 B5 7800 Folio 5100 11 x 8 1 2 10200 11 x 17 10000 A3 9000 11 x 15 8600 B4 8400 8 1 2 x 14 7100 AAR 6600 8 1 2 x 11 6100 B5R 5100 5 1 2 x 8 1 2 4 Press the start key Scanning starts under the selected conditions 5 To stop operation press the stop key Method HOME POSITION 1 Select HOME POSITION 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the home position Method DP READING 1 Select DP READING 2 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner moves to the reading position Method DUST CHECK 1
18. Adjusting the scanner center line 0 0 Adjusting the scanning position for originals from the DP 0 0 Adjusting the DP magnification 0 0 0 Adjusting the DP scanning timing 0 0 0 0 0 Adjusting the DP center line 0 0 0 1 Checking scanner operation Adjusting the DP input light luminosity 0 0 0 1 Setting the economy mode 67 Setting DP reading position modification operation 175 170 160 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Setting the exposure density gradient Text and photo text photo 0 0 0 1 Adjusting original size detection Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 2 105 105 105 60 60 60 150 240 Section Content of maintenance item 2GN 2GP 2GR Initial setting High voltage Setting the main high voltage Setting the other high voltages Developing bias AC component frequency at image formation Developing shift bias potential at image formation Developing bias AC component duty at image formation Transfer control voltage Separation control voltage Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger Displaying the drum type Checking the drum count Setting toner refresh operation Time of toner refreshment Developing bias on time 120 700 30 ppm 540 40 50 ppm Setting separation charger mode MODE
19. Display Description CCD Exposure lamp CIS CIS optional DP exposure lamp 3 Press the start key The selected lamp lights 4 Toturn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 22 Adjusting the shading position Description Changes the shading position of the scanner Purpose Used when white lines continue to appear longitudinally on the image after the shading plate is cleaned This is due to flaws or stains inside the shading plate To prevent this problem the shading position should be changed so that shading is possible without being affected by the flaws or stains Method 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Change in value per step Shading position 12 to 18 0 0 11 mm Increasing the setting moves the shading position toward the machine right and decreasing it moves the position toward the machine left 3 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U065 Adjusting the scanner magnification Description Adjusts the magnifica
20. Margin setting System top System left Panel lock information USB information Panel lock 0 OFF 1 Partial lock 2 Full lock USB 0 Not installed 1 Full speed 2 Hi speed Engine information RFID information Maintenance information Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Exiting the maintenance mode Description Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode Purpose To exit the maintenance mode Method Press the start key The normal copy mode is entered Setting the factory default data Description Restores the machine conditions to the factory default settings Purpose To move the mirror frame of the scanner to the position for transport position in which the frame can be fixed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press MODE1 ALL on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The mirror frame of the scanner returns to the position for transport 4 Turn the main power switch off and on If initialization error occurs an error code is displayed See Error Codes on P 1 3 14 If ERROR 09 occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk And then and run maintenance item U002 for initialization again If other error occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U002 for initialization 1 3 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item
21. 302FZ56990 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 Setting CCD 1 Select the item to be set Display Description N850 N500 N200 CYAN MAGENTA YELLOW RED GREEN Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the N200 patch for the original for adjustment Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment Setting the red patch for the original for adjustment Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment ADJUST ORIGINAL 2 Selectthe item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Setting the main and auxiliary scanning directions Display Description Setting range 0 0 to 100 0 200 0 to 200 0 200 0 to 200 0 L Setting the L value a Setting the a value b Setting the b value 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting ADJUST ORIGINAL MAIN 1 Measure distance from the left edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distances A 50 mm B 105 mm and C 190 mm along the auxiliary scanning direc tion 2 Apply the following formula for the values
22. Remarks coge Contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures C6050 Abnormally low fuser thermistor 3 Defective fuser Replace the fuser heater M or S temperature heater M or S Fuser thermistor s detected 100 ni Installation defec Check the mounting state of the fuser ther 212 F less than 1 s continuously during M tiveness on fuser mistor 1 If any problem is found repair it copying thermistor 1 Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation C6400 Zero cross signal error Defective PWB Replace the engine PWB or power source While fuser heater ON OFF control is PWB and check for correct operation performed the zero cross signal is not input within 3 s C6410 Fuser unit connector insertion prob Fuser unit connec Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces lem tor inserted incor sary Absence of the fuser unit is detected rectly Defective fuserunit Replace the fuser unit connector C6420 Fuser unit fuse cut problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC10 on The fuse in the fuser unit did not blow connector termi the engine PWB and the continuity across within three seconds nals the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Fuser unit connec Reinsert the fuser unit connector if neces tor inserted incor sary rectly C7300 Toner container problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector Y
23. Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 9 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 23 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U066 1 3 24 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration Description Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 11 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner leading edge registration 45 to 45 0 0 10 mm rotate copying Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner leading edge registration Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 10 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U071 U404 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 28 P 1 3 66 Comp
24. Il seguente passo viene aggiunto dopo il passo 24 a pagina 10 RAI AAA NTE IR TEAS 10 IDE 24 Je IER FELL BRR Im TAI VO BE OEIIBIJI 10 EB 24 DZ KO MEZ IBM O Sottovassoio eerren MHE ante DAREI ili iii aa fem QS PEA iii ann due fessure 1 della sezione di espulsione dell MFP per montare il sottovassoio ABATE RE 0 EIFE 24b HEE MFP AS fs HEART 2 AbD 1 Eo 7 KIA 0 D7 y 71M 2 fr MFP A amp B HOA Y y h 02 ATIC S BENT TRO ff TS 2006 2 303 356760 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR JOB SEPARATOR Supplied part A Job separator iiir B LED P CUBisonisoiiia cis C Job separator copy tray is D Left front cover SS PReRR Pi ce fournie A S parateur de travaux 1 B LED PCB ES C Plateau de copies du s parateur de travaux 1 D Couvercle avant gauche JS _ 1 Parte provista A Separador de trabajoS 1 B PCBenLED s C Bandeja de copias del separador de trabajos 1 D Cubierta delantera izquierda J S 1 Gelieferte Teile A obtrentier iia aan eiectus B LED Leiterplatte C Jobtrenner Kopienablage D Linke Frontabdeckung J S Parte fornita A Sepalatore psoriasi 1 B Scheda LED E C Vassoio copie del separatore D Coperchio frontale sinistro del separatore 1 MEER ATEI B LEDE HiK C PENI ear EAE RE D AAT uius BET
25. In duplex copying paper is turned over by reverse rotation of the eject motor When paper is transferred to the job separa tor or the internal finisher the feedshift solenoid FSSOL is turned on to activate the feedshift guide to switch the paper transfer path Feedshift guide Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley Eject switch ESW Feedshift switch FSSW Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Figure 2 1 23 Eject and switchback sections FSSW FSSOL O a lt lt SI OO gt gt YC14 B11 YC14 B14 YC14 A11 m U D Figure 2 1 24 Eject and switchback sections block diagram 2 1 16 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 9 Duplex section The duplex section consists of the components shown in figure In duplex mode after copying on to the reverse face of the paper the paper is reversed in the switchback section and conveyed to the duplex section The paper is then conveyed to the paper feed section by the upper and lower duplex feed rollers Noa 1 Feedshift guide 2 Upper duplex feed roller 3 Lower duplex feed roller 4 Duplex feed pulley 5 Duplex feed pulley 6 Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW
26. Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U144 Setting toner loading operation Description Sets toner loading operation after completion of copying Purpose To set whether or not toner is loaded on the drum after low density copying Normally no change is necessary from the initial setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description MODEO Toner not loaded MODE1 Toner loaded after simplex or duplex copying MODE2 Toner loaded after simplex copying Initial setting MODE2 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking sensors for toner Description Displays the on off status of each sensor or switch related to toner Purpose To check if the sensors and switches operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status When the on status of a switch is detected that switch is displayed in reverse Display Switches DEVELOPER SENSOR Toner sensor TNS CONTAINER SET Toner container detection switch TCDSW CONTAINER SNSR Toner container sensor TCS WASTE BOX SET Waste toner detection switch WTDSW WASTE BOX SENSOR Overflow sensor OFS MOTOR ON The toner feed solenoid TNFSOL and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion
27. fur das Faxsystem M Supplied parts A FAX circuit board idc cds B Modular connecter cable 120 V model only Y C Terminal seal i D Ferrite core 120 V miod l 2 e erem 230 V model E Alphabet label Pi ces fournies A Carte circuits FAX cnn cn nncnnnno 1 B Cable du connecteur modulaire mod le 120 V 1 C Joiht de Dorme rrt rrr aio 1 D Noyau de ferrite Modele 120 V trit re a E 1 Modele 230 V cien n i iere ri 2 E Etiquette de l alphabet 1 Piezas suministradas A Tarjeta de circuitos de fax 1 B Cable conector modular s lo para modelo de 120 V 1 C Sello del terminal 1 D Nucleo de ferrita Modelo para 120 V Modelo para 230 V E Etiqueta de alfabeto Gelieferte Teile F Clamp not for use 1 Installation Procedure Be sure to turn the MFP switch OFF and unplug the MFP from the power supply before installing the fax system F Collier non utilis 1 M thode d installation Veiller mettre l interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et d brancher le MFP de la prise secteur avant d installer le sys t me fax F Abrazadera no utilizar 1 Procedimiento de instalaci n Aseg rese de apagar el MFP colocando el interruptor principal a OFF y desenchufe el MFP del suministro de r
28. guador 1 Quite la cinta adhesiva de la cubierta de la uni dad de alimentaci n de originales del DP A 2 Abra la cubierta de la unidad de alimentaci n de originales 3 y la unidad del carro 4 3 Retire la pel cula 5 y el material amortigua dor 6 Entfernen des Films und des Polster materials 1 Das Befestigungsband von der Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit des DP A abneh men 2 Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit 3 und der Tr gereinheit 4 ffnen 3 Film 5 und Polstermaterial 6 abnehmen Rimozione della pellicola e del mate riale antiurto 1 Rimuovere il nastro di fissaggio dal coper chio dell unit di alimentazione originali del DP A 2 Aprire il coperchio dell unit di alimentazione originali 3 e il trasportatore 4 3 Rimuovere la pellicola 5 e il materiale anti urto 6 HR TIRAR EL 1 M DP CAO ffo Jets oS RA AAE it EIE F Hi 2 ARAU 3 Ren 42 3 E FOU 5 RUPES RE 6 oH ERE Z2 4 IVA SRI OO RR U AL 1 DP APR A PERI RE ELI 23 00 ET FREEBT 2 O EIA ZB lt o 3 74v 5 LEMA 6 YBR 3 e a gt b 4 Attach the fixing fitting 4 Align MFP projection 7 with hole 8 of fix ing fitting C and insert fixing fitting C into the MFP 5 Secure fixing fitting C with two pins E Mettre en place la fixation 4 Aligner la saillie du MFP 7 sur le trou 8 de la fixation C
29. l aide de la fonction de r glage automatique d original du DP 1 Diriger F avant et R arri re de la fonction de r glage automatique d original du DP vers le haut puis placer l original partir de l emplacement des rep res F et R 2 Ex cuter le mode d entretien U411 Appuyer sur les touches DP FACE UP DP face vers le haut INPUT entrer et START d marrer pour r gler la surface 3 Lorsque le message RESULT OK 00 r sultat OK 00 s affiche sur l cran le r glage est termin Si le message ERROR XX erreur XX s affiche le r glage a chou V rifier la position de r glage de l original et r p ter les tapes 1 et 2 jusqu ce que le message RESULT OK 00 r sultat OK 00 s affiche Pour plus de details se reporter au manuel d entretien Ajuste usando el original de ajuste autom tico del DP 1 Dirija F y R del original de ajuste autom tico del DP hacia arriba y coloque el original a partir del sitio en que est n marcados F y R 2 Active el modo de mantenimiento U411 Pulse la tecla DP FACE UP cara arriba la tecla INPUT entrada y la tecla START inicio para ajustar el anverso 3 Cuando aparece en la pantalla RESULT OK 00 resultado correcto 00 el ajuste ha finalizado Si aparece ERROR XX el ajuste ha fallado Com pruebe la posici n del original colocado y repita los pasos 1 a 2 hasta que aparezca RESULT OK 00 resultado correcto 00 Para mas detalles lea el manual de servicio Ein
30. 5 V DC power output MPPLSW On Off Ground Connected to the high voltage PWB BVSEL1 24VDR GND MHVDR HVCLK RHVDR RISEL TICTL BVSEL2 THVDR NC NC NC NC O O OO0O000 0 0to5 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0to5V DC 0to05V DC 0to5 V DC 0 5 V DC Developing bias control voltage 24 V DC power output Ground Main charging On Off Developing bias CLOCK signal Separation charging On Off Separation charging control voltage Transfer charging control voltage Developing bias control voltage Transfer charging On Off Not used Not used Not used Not used Connected to the laser scanner unit Oo ON DAF ON IX E cma te A OU N gt O NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 24VDR GND SCAN SCRDYN SCCLK 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 24 V DC power output Ground PM On Off PM READY signal PM CLOCK signal 2 3 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC9 Connected to the MP feed switch toner con tainer sen sor developing unit toner feed sole noid toner container detection switch and drum unit GND MPFSW 5VD 5VD TCS GND DEVPO 5VD TNS GND DVUNITN FUSE CUT EEDATA EESCLK 24VDR TNFSOL TCDSW GND DRUMPO GND CL EEDATA EESCLK GND DRUNITN 5VD MCCM FWD
31. CF installed incor rectly Install CF correctly Defective CF Install normal CF Image processing problem JAMOS is detected twice Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM program area checksum error optional fax A checksum error occurred with the pro gram in the Flash ROM on the fax con trol PWB Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation Fax control PWB to main PWB high capacity data transfer problem optional fax High capacity data transfer between the fax control PWB and the main PWB was not normally performed even if the data transfer was retried the specified times Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC1 on the fax control PWB and YC4 on the inter face PWB connection of connector YC30 on the main PWB and YC6 on the interface PWB and the continuity across the connec tor terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective fax con trol PWB or main PWB Replace the fax control PWB or main PWB and check for correct operation Fax control PWB program archive problem optional fax When power is turned on the com pressed program in the Flash ROM on the fax control PWB was not success fully decompressed Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and check for correct operation Fax file system error o
32. Check if the MP paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select MP paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the MP paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 51 7 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 15 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen Sor 3 With 5 V DC present at CN6 12 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 11 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 3 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 3 Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 8 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 16 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace
33. Checking the operation of the finisher Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting Operation panel and support equipment Checking the operation of the DP motors Checking the DP switches Checking messages Setting the finisher 3000 sheet document finisher Centerfold unit built in finisher 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Setting the paper feed device Mode setting Setting the maintenance cycle 400000 30 ppm 500000 40 50 ppm Checking clearing the maintenance count Setting the destination Japan Switching between double and single counts Double count Selecting the timing for copy counting After ejection 1 2 Setting OEM purchaser code 0 Setting service status page ON Setting the black line cleaning indication ON 8 1 2 Side ejection setting OFF Setting the size conversion factor 1 0712 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Setting the ejection restriction ON Switching between duplex simplex copy mode OFF Setting the value for maintenance due indication Image processing Adjusting margins of image printing 74 70 68 85 140
34. Cooling fan motor 8 CFMB Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 9 CFM9 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 10 CFM10 Cools the machine interior and supports paper transfer for duplex copying Cooling fan motor 11 CFM11 Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying M Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying prcdisitoinz Cools the machine interior around the paper conveying 2 2 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Other electrical components OPADARUON Cassette heater CH L Machine front YZ Machine inside L Machine rear Figure 2 2 4 Other electrical components Upper paper feed clutch 1 PFCL U Primary paper feed from the cassette 1 Lower paper feed clutch 2 PFCL L Primary paper feed from the cassette 2 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 sesessssss Controls the drive of feed roller Feed clutch 2 FCL2 Controls the drive of feed roller Feed clutch 3 FCL3 n Controls the drive of feed roller MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL Primary paper feed from the MP tray MP feed clutch MPFCL Controls the drive of MP feed roller Registration clutch RCL Secondary paper feed
35. Defective paper path sen Sor 2 With 5 V DC present at CN6 9 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 8 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 2 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 2 Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 1 4 13 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 9 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in 3000 sheet paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section Jam code 17 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper side guides are deformed Check visually and replace Defective paper path sen Sor 1 With 5 V DC present at CN6 6 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN6 5 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when paper path sensor 1 is turned on and off If it does replace paper path sensor 1 Check if paper feeder paper conveying clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper con veying clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical prob
36. Initial setting Letter Inch specifications A4 Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 45 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U220 Setting the trial functions Description Enables the trial of USB functions by period limitation Purpose To try USB activation functions Method Press the start key Display Description FUNCTION Selecting trial functions TRIAL STATUS Displays the current setting 1 Under trial 0 Not trial COUPON COUNT Displays remaining times TIME LIMIT Displays the end term of the function under present trial TRIAL START Starts the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION TRIAL STOP Stops the trial of the function selected with FUNCTION Setting FUNCTION 1 Select FUNCTION 2 Select the function using the keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set COUPON COUNT TIME LIMIT TRIAL START and TRIAL STOP are displayed Method TRIAL START 1 Select TRIAL STRAT 2 Press the start key Trial of the function selected with FUNCTION is started The display of COUPON COUNT decreases one The display of TIME LIMIT will be the date of the present date plus 30 days Method TRIAL STOP 1 Select TRIAL STOP 2 Press the start key Trial of the function selected with FUNCTION is stopped Completion Press the stop key The s
37. Service Manual Copy CD 1230 CD 1240 CD 1250 Version 1 0 Date 04 07 2006 2GNSM060 TALES ph Adler Service Manual Copy DC 2230 DC 2240 DC 2250 Version 1 0 Date 04 07 2006 2GNSMO060 CAUTION DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE MANUFACTURER S INSTRUCTIONS ATTENTION IL Y A DANGER D EXPLOSION S IL Y A REMPLACEMENT INCORRECT DE LA BATTERIE REMPLACER UNIQUEMENT AVEC UNE BATTERIE DU M ME TYPE OU D UN TYPE REC OMMAND PAR LE CONSTRUCTEUR METTRE AU R BUT LES BATTERIES USAG ES CON FORM MENT AUX INSTRUCTIONS DU FABRICANT Revision history This page is intentionally left blank Safety precautions This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their customers their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities Service personnel are advised to read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before engaging in maintenance activities Safety warnings and precautions Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent damage to their property These symbols are described below AXDANGER High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or in
38. The pulse count lowered to 10000 at lift connector remedy or replace the cable ing down however the DP bottom limit E z switch could not bedt rtied on ec alse of the a zs DP lift motor and check for cor After one time retry the DP bottom limit Mi ois rect operatorn switch could not be turned on Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift lower limit switch and DP lift lower limit check for correct operation switch Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti of the DP lift lower nuity within the connector cable If none limit switch con remedy or replace the cable nector Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for PWB correct operation C9060 DP EEPROM error optional DP Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for Read and write data does not match PWB correct operation Dali the specified area ofthe Backup Device damage of Contact the Service Administrative Division memory does not match the specified EEPROM values C9070 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti and SHD optional DP of the SHD PWB nuity within the connector cable If none A communication error is detected remedy or replace the cable Defective SHD Replace the SHD PWB and check for cor PWB rect operation C9080 Communication problem between DP Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti 1 4 42 and CIS opti
39. The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning off 1511 ms 30 ppm 1170 ms 40 50 ppm The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1652 ms 30 ppm 1278 ms 40 50 ppm Fuser section 40 Misfeed in fuser section MP tray 41 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 1 42 Misfeed in fuser section cassette 2 43 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 3 44 Misfeed in fuser section optional cassette 4 45 Misfeed in fuser section optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 46 Misfeed in fuser section duplex section The eject switch ESW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm Eject section 50 Misfeed in eject section The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm The eject switch ESW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm 51 Misfeed in job separa tor eject section The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn on within
40. When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FEED1 FEED2 FEED3 MP TRAY REGIST EJECT BRANCH DUPLEX JOB SEPARATOR Feed switch 1 FSW1 Feed switch 2 FSW2 Feed switch 3 FSW3 MP feed switch MPFSW Registration switch RSW Eject switch ESW Feedshift switch FSSW Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW Job separator eject switch JBESW Optional Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U032 Checking clutch operation Description Turns each clutch on Purpose To check the operation of each clutch Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the clutch to be operated 3 Press the start key The clutch turns on for 1 s Display Clutches PF1 Upper paper feed clutch PFCL U PF2 Lower paper feed clutch PFCL L PF MP TRAY MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL FEED1 Feed clutch 1 FCL1 FEED2 Feed clutch 2 FCL2 FEED3 Feed clutch 3 FCL3 FEED MP TRAY MP feed clutch MPFCL REGIST Registration clutch RCL DUPLEX Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL MOTOR ON The drive motor DM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned ON To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking solenoid
41. Y 1 2300 mm 11 13 16 gt 300 mm 11 13 16 2 1000 mm 39 3 8 Figure 1 2 1 Installation dimensions 1 2 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation 1 Installation procedure 1 2 2 C Start Y Y Unpack Connect the power cord Y Remove the tapes spacers and pad Y Install the fixing bracket Y Install the optional paper feeder Y Y Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames Y Y Output an own status report maintenance item U000 Release of cassette lift plate Y Y Exit maintenance mode Load paper Y Y Print out the user setting list Install the toner container Y Y Make test copies Install the waste toner box Y Y Attaching the language label 230 V specifications only Install the optional original cover or the DP Y Install other optional devices Y Completion of the machine installation 2GN 2GP 2GR ving the machine Mo the right and left sides and hold them rrying handles on When moving the machine pull out the four ca Figure 1 2 2 1 2 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Unpacking Figure 1
42. de d E de 3 ld un cha o B KA bi lo fot foo few je e n lo o e gt ote nu Tel gt Oo Or Gu to foo e Je E lola le A FTMSMd 913 S Le T o o TE OTMSMA LL g Q RR CINI alalalalalalalalsisizisizIziz la e E FE YONpz ale a alele else e o s ee ERE n 5 ete ao 2 2 o ololajolajala ZN MSMd az 2 2 O n ra Y Ala gt gt 3 zlal Iz 8 a alala alas Q a LI x lt 8 L 2 33 SREE aea aoo se SS 5 o a o eje penuena ep lu Y O lt e LAE o E a gt E ormsma EP i ul ofo E nj Jo es afolefo s e s z elo o ln o o e m au r 2 VOR jg 18 En LA 8 a 9 els ele sl l olele lelle elle mamn o Tanay KEKE wane E lt ONS 8 ea TU O la oo e msodana gt 21 8 sa sa E o CNS o 9 O UAE 29198 ES gt 9 O ELZLLINIO 81 er gt E zt at mn z ot 9r ONS u 2 Lit Y Y a ii i NONVEF 3 ni o zie vns z 5 s A zou 8 ejz as S a a T E u gt rr SS y L z INS 5 zi zt 2 2 or or amp o s s o e lt TE za Sz anos lt e ul vz anos 2 5 a z vz z D ei etr F BEE i a S 12 Ave LL L E ES y 8 oz nee e ZZ gt BL s causa gt Lv s s z er lasda E ov Sv ele i Zr asda ov v HLJ m or anada z Thaw NOAVEH 2 Sy aNod O ino A av av amp 6 yt auod E UNS 6v ev o oO gt EH aves a GIS CHL ovo 2 5 zi anos o Hi nv uv sales ES LL anos sia sia or vt a naria c 6 Ave a m erajera E 8 ace TT di calcia it L s O O a E wafia
43. 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of center folding position for A4 letter size 10 to 10 O 0 55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for B4R legal size 10 to 10 O 0 55 mm Adjustment of center folding position for A3R ledger size 10 to 10 O 0 55 mm When the centerfold position too far right sample 1 increase the preset value When the centerfold position too far left sample 2 decrease the setting value Reference value within 3 mm Center line Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 23 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246 Setting the side registration cursor stop position 1 Select the desired cursor position 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting FRONT Front side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 REAR Rear side registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 END Trailing edge registration cursor stop position 4 to 4 0 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the paper feed device De
44. 3000 sheet document finisher only The mail paper entry switch MPESW is not turned on within specified time 1315 ms 30 ppmy 1017 ms 40 50 ppm The mail paper entry switch MPESW is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm The tray eject sensor TEJS does not turn on within specified time of mail paper entry switch MPESW turn ing on Tray 1 to 4 2618 ms 30 ppm 2026 ms 40 50 ppm Tray 5 to 7 1483 ms 30 ppm 1148 ms 40 50 ppm The tray eject sensor TEJS is not turned off within spec ified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 91 Finisher cover open 3000 sheet document finisher The front cover top cover or right sub tray is opened when starting the finisher operation The centerfold unit top cover is opened when starting the centerfold operation The mail box cover is opened when starting the opera tion Document finisher The finisher cover becomes open during paper is run ning Paper is remaining in paths at power on 92 Exit sensor non arrival jam document finisher only In the straight mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the paper entry sensor PES was turned on 1770 ms 1 4 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional finisher 1 4 10 93 Reverse sensor jam
45. 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional paper feeder 3382ms 30 ppmy 2617ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper length 1595ms 30 ppm Paper length 1234ms 40 50 ppm The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on 3382ms 30 ppm 2617ms 40 50 ppm The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length 3357ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on 1489 ms 30 ppm 1152 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of the lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn off within speci fied time of the paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on 3416 ms 30 ppm 2643 ms 40 50 ppm The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn off within specified time of the paper feed
46. 97 0 39 F00 U00 40 0A001300 F0A8EF98 000000000000 000000000000 020A1Bt 41 1234 1234 0001234abcd567800001234abcd5678 01234567890123456789012345678901 08 00 07 42 0000000000 F80C001A37 302A183C00 000100013D 8791BFC305 0000003100 000F5D0000 01FD000000 0000000FB7 0000000000 0000260000 0000000000 0000000000 0000008400 0000000000 011F000F51 8FOF Figure 1 3 3 1 3 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 10 Detail of Service status page Description Supplement Engine ROM version Operation panel ROM version NV RAM version _ Bb 04B29 _ Bb 04B29 a D c d e f a Consistency of the present software version and the database underscore OK Asterisk NG b Database version c The oldest time stamp of database version d Consistency of the present software version and the ME firmware version underscore OK Asterisk NG e ME firmware version f The oldest time stamp of the ME database version Normal if a and d are underscored and b and e are identical with c and f Scanner version Fax firmware version This item is printed only when the optional fax kit is installed Serial No 10 digits Mac address Cleared date and output date Page of relation to the A4 Letter Average coverage Total Copy Printer Fax Coverage on the final output page Presence
47. All instances including those are not occurred are displayed Indicates the log counter of self diagnos tics errors depending on cause See P 1 4 22 Example C6000 4 Self diagnostics error 6000 has happened four times Indicates the log counter depending on the maintenance item for maintenance T Toner container 00 Black M Maintenance kit 00 fixed Example TOO 1 The toner container has been replaced once 1 3 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 Service status page 1 Service Status Page MFP Firmware version 2GN 2000 XLG 368 2006 04 17 1 2 Controller Information Memory Status 3 Option Slot1 524288KB 4 Option Slot2 524288KB 5 Total 1048576KB Time Auto Continue Mode YO 6 Local Time Zone 01 00 Amsterdam Auto Continue Timer Y4 7 Data and Time 10 27 2005 09 06 8 Time Server 10 183 53 13 9 FRPO Status User Top Margin A1 A2 100 0 00 User Left Margin A3 A4 100 0 00 User Page Length A5 A6 100 17 30 Figure 1 3 2 Detail of Service status page Description Supplement System version System date Slot 1 RAM size Slot 2 RAM size Total RAM size Local time zone Report output date Day Month Year hour minutes NTP server name FRPO setting 1 3 8 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U000 Service status page 2 Service Status Page MFP Firm
48. Check and remedy Check if the reverse guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 44 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper entry sensor stay jam Jam code 94 Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper entry sen Sor With 5 V DC present at CN14 1and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the main PCB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Check if the paper entry guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 45 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper conveying sensor jam Jam code 95 Defective paper conveying sensor With 5 V DC present at CN4 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN4 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying sensor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the paper convey ing roller and paper convey ing pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the paper convey ing guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main
49. Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Check procedures corrective measures Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Paper creased Change the paper Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty or flawed drum 16 Fusing is poor Copy example Causes Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Check procedures corrective measures if Wrong types of paper Check if the paper meets specifications Replace paper Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Flawed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 30 Flawed fuser heater 17 Image is out of focus Copy example Causes Replace the fuser heater see page 1 5 31 Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective image scanning unit Replace the image scanning unit see page 1 5 18 Drum condensation Perform the drum refresh operation 1 4 49 2GN 2GP 2GR 18 Image center does not align with the original center Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Misadjusted image center line Run maintenance item U034 to readjust the center line of image printing see page 1 3 19 Misadjusted scanner center line Run maintenance item U067 to readjust the scanner leading edg
50. Checking the operation of the switches of the finisher Description Displays the status of each switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To check the operation of each switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be checked Display Description FINISHER MAIL BOX BOOKLET Checking the switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Checking the switch of the mail box Checking the switch of the centerfold unit Method Checking the switch of the 3000 sheet document finisher Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted 1 Display Switches FRONT COVER SW TOP COVER SW RIGHT COVER SW SET SW BOOKLET SW PUNCH TANK SW TRAY L LIMIT SW TRAY U LIMIT SW TRAY MIDDLE SW PAP HOLD DOWN SW LOAD DET SW FEED IN SW EJECT SW 1 EJECT SW2 EJECT SW 3 STAPLE HP SW 1 STAPLE HP SW 2 MIDDLE FEED SW1 MIDDLE FEED SW2 BUNDLE DET SW 1 BUNDLE DET SW 2 BUNDLE UP HP SW BNDL DOWN HP SW WIDTH HP SW 1 WIDTH HP SW 2 BUNDLE INTERF SW VCARRY SW Front cover switch FCSW Top cover switch TCSW Sub tray right switch STRSW Joint switch JSW Centerfold set switch CSSW Punch waste box sensor PWBS Main tray lower limit detection sensor MTLLDS Main tray upper limit detection sensor MTULDS Main tray middle positi
51. E zi zr En pm PIU vv vv or ox il repr gl lets UNOS sts Jo wo o foo as Sl 88 sa ev ev z lede o8 ste 3 0 Za va zy ev p ran L 8 HA a 9a c8 by py a sto al 5 e sa za z NOS m ze oos o v8 18 o s s sls 2 3 3 Z legal alala 2 5 y vv az ped fon ToS FS ld be a i Oral Za rp Es amas sasss 9 cu efe a Els oe ayaeleysis s 2m RE HG a PSI e e ee ez zz s amp QNO e auos o9 u uu x ID 1 XR anos LL or for TE os 2 foso fio co e too o s a PY az i q a sts OL 6 we T amp T HE d cL Pr HH 33 KY as E 8 spa a HO EES monos sa sal 22 nouos gt a C s s OH oz 1HOlH O QUEXA vlt Lv o a 1 N aMdo erv erv ele A NOS O ELVIELvI aNd Ox FIVIFIV z z rz siv siv Cha NS i HAV Lt Lessa 1 General wiring diagram 2 4 9 DRUM UNIT DEVELOPING UNIT INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR THE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR Supplied parts ADP C daga 1 B Original mat sd C Fixing fitting 2 D Angle control fitting E Pilosio neat 3 Vis TEMA 14 ccoo cadiz 4 Pi ces fournies Tornillo TP M4 x 14 00 eee eee eeeeee 4 ADRIAN 1 B Plaque d original bof C Fixation m D Fixation d angle ud E Goupill amp rct ene Rete 3 Piezas suministradas Wb taa 1 B Alfombrilla para originales ul C Herraje de fijaci n
52. PWB ON Oo c sa WN LIVE NEUTRAL 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 12 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 3 3 V DC power output 3 3 V DC power output AC power output AC power output 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground 12 V DC power output Ground Ground 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground Not used 2 3 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Voltage Description YC10 Connected to the main PWB 0 5 V DC SLEEP signal 5V DC 5 V DC power output 5V DC 5 V DC power output 5V DC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5 VDC 5 V DC power output 5V DC 5 V DC power output 5V DC 5 V DC power output Ground 0 XAO c pa WY Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground 2 3 4 2 3 2 Engine PWB MPWB Engine PWB Driver U12 Driver U13 EEPROM U3 Data bus Address bus 2GN 2GP 2GR Optional finisher Optional paper feeder Switches Sensors Clutches Motors Engine G A HVTPWB U8 Reset IC U9 LSU Figure 2 3 3 Engine PWB diagram YC22 1 Je Yes YC1
53. Select DUST CHECK 2 Press the start key The exposure lamp lights 3 To turn the exposure lamp off press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when scanning stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 31 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U074 Adjusting the DP input light luminosity Description Adjusts the luminosity of the exposure lamp for scanning originals from the DP Purpose Used if the exposure amount differs significantly between when scanning an original on the contact glass and when scanning an original from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description Setting Initial range setting R DP input light luminosity of R image 12 to 12 0 G DP input light luminosity of G image 12 to 12 0 B DP input light luminosity of B image 12 to 12 0 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the luminosity higher and decreasing it makes the luminosity lower 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 32 Setting the economy mode Description Sets the level in the economy mode Purpose To increase or decrease the image density in the eco
54. Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Duplex copy OFF Simplex copy Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the value for maintenance due indication Description Sets when to display a message notifying that the time for maintenance is about to be reached by setting the number of copies that can be made before the current maintenance cycle ends When the difference between the number of copies of the maintenance cycle and that of the maintenance count reaches the set value the message is displayed This maintenance mode is effective for only Japanese specification 1 3 63 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U402 1 3 64 Adjusting margins of image printing Description Adjusts margins for image printing Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step LEAD Printer leading edge margin 0 to 236 74 0 1 mm A Printer left margin 80 to 236 70 0 1 mm C Printer right margin 118 to 236 68 0 1 mm TRAIL Printer trailing edge margin 118 to 236 85 0 1 mm TRAIL DUP Printer trailing edge margin in duplex 118 to 236 0 1 mm mode second side TRIAL MP Printer trailing
55. WES var P LU ds beet RNC 1 BED ra carente 1 C Da Tev AHH RET 1 D ZEBX23 JS e esee 1 Procedure Caution When installing a job separator be sure to turn the MFP main switch off and disconnectthe MFP power plug from the wall outlet Proc dure Pr caution Lors de l installation d un s parateur de travaux veiller mettre l interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et d brancher la fiche d alimentation du MFP de la prise murale Procedimiento Precauci n Cuando se instala un separador de trabajos aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del tomacorriente de la pared Vorgang Vorsicht Schalten Sie vor der Installation des J obtrenners unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab Procedura Attenzione Al momento dell installazione del Separatore assicuratevi innanzitutto di spegnere I MFP e scollegarne il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa di rete SERE MEAE RIN VE IT MFP GELS ETA HT MFPEM Ef HE Did Sc fi FEAR AL RIFA VaTeNL RY TIU SER YT MFP AMO AM VAA oF OFFL ERTZA ZIL CHEB AIF IIE Va 7t SLt_ 4 A ic LED 4 EMOS DIT 7 APO CHER 2N Insert the LED PCB B into the job separator A Connect the 2 pin connecto
56. charged when it passes through the magnetic toner blade The toner that has passed through the magnetic toner blade forms a uniform layer on the developing sleeve When the toner layer comes to the location where the developing sleeve is the nearest to the drum toner moves between the drum and the developing sleeve by an electric field of the magnetic pole Then when the developing sleeve rotates and passes through the nearest location to the drum on the portion of the drum that has been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the drum by potential difference between the developing bias and the drum surface and development is performed On the other hand on the portion of the drum that has not been exposed to light toner is attracted toward the sleeve and development is not performed When toner comes to an area where the gap between the drum and the developing sleeve is large an electric field disappears and toner does not leave the developing sleeve Development is complete Magnetic toner blade South pole North pole Drum Developing sleeve Figure 2 1 16 Single component developing system 2 1 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 5 Transfer and separation sections The transfer and separation section consists mainly of the transfer roller separation electrode and drum separation claws A high voltage generated by the high voltage transformer PWB HVTPWB is applied to the transfer roller for transfer charging Paper after trans
57. document finisher only The reverse sensor REVS does not turn on within spec ified time of paper entry sensor PES turning on 1071 ms The reverse sensor REVS is not turned on within speci fied time 435 ms The reverse sensor REVS does not turn off within spec ified time of paper entry sensor PES turning off 622 ms The reverse sensor REVS is not turned off within speci fied time its turning on Depends on paper size 94 Paper entry sensor stay remaining jam document finisher only The paper entry sensor PES is not turned off within specified time its turning on Depends on paper size 95 Paper conveying sen sor jam document fin isher only The paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn on within specified time of reverse sensor REVS turning on The paper conveying sensor PCS does not turn off within specified time of reverse sensor REVS turning off 1004 ms 96 Jam between the built in finisher and machine built in finisher only Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the doc ument finisher within specified time of the intermediate tray sensor ITS turning on 1573 ms 30 ppm 1217 ms 40 50 ppm 3 Paper misfeeds Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 1 A paper jam in the paper feed convey ing or eject section is indicated as soon as the main power switch is turned
58. optional key counter O AN Da A OO N o 24VDR T_COUNT GND SET SIG GND SET SIG 24VDR K_COUNT GND SET SIG 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC power output Total counter signal Ground Connection signal Ground Key counter connection signal 24 V DC power output Key counter signal Ground Connection signal 2 3 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC16 Connected to the optional built in fin isher o NO 1a WN 24VDR 24VDR GND GND 5VD GND SELECT READY SDI SDO SCLK NC 24 V DC 24 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Ground Ground 5 V DC power output Ground Built in finisher SELECT signal Built in finisher READY signal Built in finisher serial communication data signal Built in finisher serial communication data signal Built in finisher CLOCK signal Not used Connected to the optional job separator JBESW 5VD GND GND SET SIG GND EPDSW 5VD LED REM 5VD LED FSSOL2 FSSOL1 24VDR 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC JBESW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground Ground Job separator connection signal Ground EPDSW On Off 5 V DC power output LED On Off 5 V DC power output FSSOL On Off retur
59. 0 to 999999 current number of punching times 3 Change the setting using the numeric keys or clear key 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U903 Checking clearing the paper jam counts Description Displays or clears the jam counts by jam locations Purpose To check the paper jam status Also to clear the jam counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description COUNT Displays clears the jam counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total jam counts Method Displays clears the jam counts 1 Select COUNT The count for jam detection by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the counts for all jam codes and press the clear key 4 Press the start key The count is cleared The individual counter cannot be cleared 5 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method Displays the total jam counts 1 Select TOTAL COUNT The total number of jam counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of jam count cannot be cleared 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for se
60. 2 que se retiraron en el paso 3 y un tornillo TP M3 x 05 L 18 Die Hefterabdeckung C zur Sicherung mit den zwei Schrauben 3 auf der linken Seite sowie mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben 2 und einer TP Schraube M3 x 05 L befestigen 18 Montate il coperchio della graffatrice C usando le due viti 3 sul lato sinistro per fissare e le due viti 2 che sono state rimosse nel passo 3 e una vite TP M3 x05 L 18 FA Ac A A 27S 2 3 Al EE HET CO JF FAZER SYR FNRA 22 M3 x OSTP L iE 47 ll RE 18 RFF C EMDOEA 3 2 4 CBE LU PANES CHLEEA 2 2 5k E A M3 X O5TP L 1 KTR V HITS 19 Refit the staple holder that has been removed in step 3 to its original position and close the transfer left cover and the front cover 20 Attach the front ejection cover E and the rear ejection cover F using a TP screw M3 x 05 L each 19 R emettre le support d agrafes retir auparavant lors de l tape 3 sa position d origine et refermer le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant 20 F ixer le couvercle d jection avant E et le couvercle d jection arri re F l aide d une vis TP M3 x05 L 19 Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posici n original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera 20 Instale la cubierta de expulsi n frontal E y la c
61. 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select BOOKLET then WIDTH TEST A3 The width guides of the centerfold unit will move to A3 size position 6 Pull the centerfold unit insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides 7 Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position 1 3 55 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246 1 3 56 Setting adjustment of booklet stapling position 1 Select the STAPLE POS ADJ 1 STAPLE POS ADJ 2 or STAPLE POS ADJ 3 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A4 letter size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for B4 legal size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm Adjustment of booklet stapling position for A3 ledger size 10 to 10 0 0 55 mm When staples are placed too far right sample 1 decrease the preset value When staples are placed too far left sample 2 increase the preset value Reference value within 2 mm Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 22 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting adjustment of center folding position 1 Select the BOOKLET POS ADJ1 BOOKLET POS ADJ2 or BOOKLET POS ADJ3
62. 5 55 1 5 26 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 6 Transfer section 1 Detaching and refitting the transfer roller unit Follow the procedure below to replace the transfer roller unit Procedure 1 Open the left cover 1 2 While holding down the projection slide the transfer roller unit toward the front to remove it 3 Replace the transfer roller unit and install the unit Projection Figure 1 5 56 1 5 27 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 7 Fuser section 1 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit Follow the procedure below to check or replace the fuser unit Procedure 1 Remove the clip holder 2 Open the front cover and left cover 1 W Clip holder 3 Remove four screws and remove front left cover Front left cover Figure 1 5 57 4 Remove the screw and remove the fuser unit 5 Check or replace the fuser unit and install the unit 6 Perform maintenance mode U167 to clear the counter value see page 1 3 42 Fuser unit Figure 1 5 58 1 5 28 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation claws Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller separation claws Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 Pin 2 Remove the two screws and remove the Upper fuser cover upper fuser cover while holding the four i claws 3 Remove the heat roller separation claws from the upper fuser cover 4 Replace the heat roller separation claws and install the claws to upper fuser cove
63. 55 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 3 0 2 5 3 0 4 0 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing 47 Adjusting the scanner automatically Setting the target Network scanner Setting the enterprise mode Inch specifications ON Metric specifications OFF Others Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Checking clearing the punch hole scrap counter 35000 0 1 2 Checking clearing the paper jam counts Checking clearing the service call counts Checking clearing counts by optional devices Resetting partial operation control Checking the total counter value Clearing the black ratio data Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Checking the copy counts Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Checking machine life counts Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 4 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting Setting the backup kit Relay board maintenance Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Checking the developing unit number Displaying the developing unit history HDD scandisk Checking clearing th
64. B Bandeja intermediaria well C Cubierta de grapas sal D Cubierta de expulsi n grande 1 Gelieferte Teile A Transfereinheit sse 1 B Zwischenablage em C Hefterabdeckung eal D Gro e Auswurfabdeckung 1 Parti fornite A Unit di trasferimento sees 1 B Vassoio intermedio n C Coperchio della graffatrice well D Coperchio grande di espulsione carta 1 BEAR I ON EE RR nia D HIER A B Pp Lirica ria 1 OAT ZII a pine 1 Di PEA ot CEP 1 ZE TA IOmNM ZE TA IioOomnm ZrA _ TIONM ZrA IOnMm zZrA _ IQONnNM CxRc ITQOnm Front ejection cover Rear ejection cover Copy tray Staple cartridge Flat spring ejection Ground plate Pulaha l a sanera data ica 1 TP screw M3 Xx 05 Operation section securing pin 1 Couvercle d jection avant 1 Couvercle d jection arri re Plateau copies Cartouche d agrafes Dispositif d jection ressort plat Plaque de masse Etiquette Tirer Vis TP M3 x05 Broche de fixation de la section de commande niis 1 Cubierta de expulsi n frontal 1 Cubierta de expulsi n trase
65. B MARGIN Leading edge margin first page 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 1 mm C MARGIN Right margin first page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm D MARGIN Trailing edge margin first page 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm A MARGIN BACK Left margin second page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm B MARGIN BACK Leading edge margin second 0 to 10 0 2 5 0 1 mm page C MARGIN BACK Right margin second page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm D MARGIN BACK Trailing edge margin second 0 to 10 0 4 0 0 1 mm page Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Leading edge margin 3 1 5mm Ejection direction 4 reference Left margin Right margin lc 2 1 0mm 2 1 0mm i t Trailing edge margin 2 1 0mm Figure 1 3 26 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 66 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U407 Adjusting the leading edge registration for memory image printing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration during memory copying Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original dur
66. Description Displays a list of messages on the touch panel of the operation panel Purpose To check the messages to be displayed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be displayed 3 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys to display each message one at a time When a message number is entered with the numeric keys and then the start key is pressed the mes sage corresponding the specified number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U246 Setting the finisher Description Provides various settings for the optional finisher if furnished Purpose Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode Adjust if skewed paper conveying occurs or if the copy paper is Z folded in punch mode Adjustment of paper stop timing in the punch mode To adjust this item when the position of a punch hole is different from the specified one Adjustment of front rear side registration home position of internal tray Provides optimization when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the internal tray adjuster guides to paper Adjusting of front and back slanted stapling home position Adjusts the stapling position in the staple mode if the position is not proper Provides adjustment of slanted stapling Adjustment of upper lower side registration home position of centerfold unit Provides optimizatio
67. Detaching and refitting the fuser UNIt i 1 5 28 2 Detaching and refitting the heat roller separation ClaWS narran 1 5 29 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller em nee 1 5 30 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater ssssssen emen 1 5 31 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller nemen 1 5 32 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 1 5 33 7 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness eeseeess 1 5 34 ER eee cle et ee Ve eee ee ee E 1 5 35 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2 i 1 5 35 2 Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2 1 5 36 1 6 Requirements on PWB Replacement 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware orion ta pertinente rtm aie ceases rx annu pe nn oannes e reo RE Ra Noait 1 6 1 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR sess nennen nennen nere 1 6 2 1 6 3 Remarks on main PWB replacement ie 1 6 2 1 6 4 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement i 1 6 2 2 1 Mechanical construction 2 1 1 Paper teedisecii ira ira lla Gee teu onn oe 2 1 1 2 12 Main charging sectioni Lai iia tenet 2 1 4 221 3 Optical section eer eret t RE ERE E RR er A MR e here t RR en 2 1 5 RES IDIEuIie 2 1 6 2 Mage Printing tica lola che ela nh 2 1 7 2 14 Developing Sectioni cii aeree 2 1 10 1 Single
68. Duplex feed clutch DUPFCL Controls the drive of the duplex feed roller Feedshift solenoid FSSOL Operates the feedshift guide Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL Replenishes toner Exposure lamp EL Exposes originals Cleaning lamp CL Removes residual charge from the drum surface Fuser heater M FH M Heats the heat roller Fuser heater S FH S Heats the heat roller Fuser unit thermostat 1 FTS1 Prevents overheating in the fuser section Fuser unit thermostat 2 FTS2 Prevents overheating in the fuser section Hard disk unit HDD Storages the image data and information of job accounting mode Dehumidifies the cassette section 2 2 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 2 6 2 3 1 2GN 2GP 2GR Power source PWB Power source PWB 24VD 24VDF 12VD 5V 5VD 5VDF 3R3VD Zero cross SLEEP signal output ZCROSS circuit Heater Bu CFM4 control circuit GEM Fuser heater FH LIVE Cassette heater Figure 2 3 1 Power source PWB diagram 1 612 L L1 3 i YC2 YC4 YC5 1 YC1 7 1 Y 1 14 9 7 TB4 YC6 E 1 EU TB1 YC3 C 6 1 YC7 YC8 YC10 1 0 Figure 2 3 2 Power source PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 1 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description TB Connected to the AC inlet LIVE COM LIVE
69. Instale el DP 6 Alinee el orificio de bisagra 9 del DP A con el pasador 10 del herraje de fijaci n C y coloque el DP A en el MFP 7 Deslice el DP A hacia el lado delantero Installieren des DP 6 Scharnierloch 9 des DP A mit Stift 10 der Befestigungshalterung C ausrichten und DP A auf den MFP stellen 7 DP A nach vorne schieben Montaggio del DP 6 Allineare il foro della cerniera 9 del DP A con il perno 10 dell accessorio di fissaggio C quindi posizionare il DP A sull MFP 7 Fare scorrere il DP A verso la parte ante riore Zu DP 6 DP CA MERLO ox te ps x MHE CC HA C100 JE DP CA JE MFP Lo 7 t DP CAO TR IEM DP AAO ERY fit UT 6 DP AK A DESIROR 9 ESA C DEY 10 EHE MFP REZ DP A Wk A EEE S 7 DP ATA A ERRATA FAS 8 Install DP A onto the MFP securely with pin E and two M4 x 14TP screws F 8 Installer le DP A sur le MFP en le fixant l aide de la goupille E et des deux vis TP M4 x 14 F 8 Instale el DP A firmemente en el MFP con el pasador E y dos tornillos TP M4 x 14 F 8 DP A sicher mit einem Stift E und zwei M4 x 14TP Schrauben F am MFP befestigen 8 Montare il DP A sull MFP assicurandolo con il perno E e due viti M4 x 14TP F 8 14 E FI MA X 14TP IRE CF 14 DP A RESI MFP Eo 8 EX E AE CA MA X 14TP F 2 AC DP AE A MEP RRETA Install the angle contro
70. Kopierbeispiels f h Den Wert erh hen F r die l ngere L nge des Kopierbeispiels g i Den Wert verringern Anderung pro Schritt 0 42 mm 3 Eine Testkopie erstellen 2 Regolare i valori Per l esempio di copia di lunghezza inferiore f h aumenta il valore Per l esempio di copia di lunghezza superiore g i riduce il valore Entit modifica per passo 0 42 mm 3 Eseguire una copia di prova 2 Wise FIR EAS SERRA CO Ch EACH WFHKKEWREUREA Cg CO RANA HORNO EE UE 0 42mm 3 BEAZ 2 REA HET o REPAIR AE TW h RENE EU ERSDRVGA ALOU TW g i REIL FITS LAF vy 7470 D 0 42mm 3 FAR TD 14 Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line 2 3 of copy exam ple shows the reference value lt Reference value gt For the sub scan direction vertical gap of line 2 within 1 5 For the main scan direction horizontal gap of line 3 within 1 5 R p ter les tapes 1 3 jusqu ce que l cart de la ligne 2 3 de l exemple de copie indique la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Pour la direction du balayage secondaire l cart vertical de la ligne 2 est de 11 5 Pour la direction du balayage principal l cart horizontal de la ligne 3 est de 11 5 Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separaci n de la l nea 2 3 del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia lt V
71. Left cover 2 switch LC2SW Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 2 Duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW iiinis Detects a paper jam in the duplex section 2 2 3 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Motors oo uoomrom c Cooling fan motor 4 CFM4 Cooling fan motor 5 CFM5 Cooling fan motor 6 CFM6 Cooling fan motor 7 CFM7 Cooling fan motor 12 CFM12 Cooling fan motor 13 CFM13 Polygon motor PM n Drives the polygon mirror Main charger cleaning motor MCCM Drives the main charger auto cleaning Machine front ZA Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 3 Motors Drive motor DM i Drives the machine Paper feed motor PFM Drives paper feed section Upper lift motor LM U eese Drives cassette 1 lift Lower lift motor LM L Drives cassette 2 lift Scanner motor SM esses Drives the optical system Eject motor EM Drives the eject section Cooling fan motor 1 CFM1 Cools the machine interior Cooling fan motor 2 CFM2 Cooling fan motor 3 CFM3 Cools the machine interior Cools the machine interior Cools the machine interior around the power supply unit Cools the machine interior around the LSU Cools the machine interior controller box Cools the machine interior operation panel
72. MCCM REV 0 5 V DC 5V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 5V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC Ground MPFSW On Off 5 V DC power output 5 V DC power output TCS On Off Ground Developing unit distinction signal 5 V DC power output TNS On Off Ground Developing unit detection signal Developing unit FUSE CUT signal Developing unit EEPROM DATA signal Developing unit EEPROM CLOCK signal 24 V DC power output TNFSOL On Off TCDSW On Off Ground Drum unit distinction signal Ground CL On Off Drum unit EEPROM DATA signal Drum unit EEPROM CLOCK signal Ground Drum unit detection signal 5 V DC power output MCCM On Off MCCM On Off Connected to the regis tration Switch fuser unit duplex feed clutch duplex paper con veying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 2 3 8 GND RSW 5VD FUSER PO 3VD FTH1 FUSE CUT GND GND FTH2 STD FTH2 24VDR DUPFCL GND DUPPCSW 5VD GND 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 3 3 V DC 0 to 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 to 5 V DC 0 to 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC Ground RSW On Off 5 V DC power output Fuser unit distinction signal 3 3 V DC power output FTH1 detection voltage signal FTH1 FUSE CUT signal Ground Ground FTH2 detection voltage signal FTH2 detection voltage signal 24 V DC power
73. Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting DRIVE START TEMP Driving start temperature when 0 to 255 C 175 30 ppm warm up starts 185 40 50 ppm READY CONTROL T Control temperature for displaying 0 to 255 C 190 30 ppm Ready for copying 200 40 50 ppm PRINT CONTROL T Control temperature during printing 0 to 255 C 190 30 ppm 200 40 50 ppm 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Resetting the fuser problem data Description Resets the detection of a service call code indicating a problem in the fuser section Purpose To prevent accidents due to an abnormally high fuser temperature Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The fuser problem data is initialized 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Checking fuser counts Description Displays fuser counts for checking Purpose To check fuser counts after replacing the fuser unit Method Press the start key The fuser counts are displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 42 Maintenance
74. No Description U003 Setting the service telephone number Description Sets the telephone number to be displayed when a service call code is detected Purpose To set the telephone number to call service when installing the machine Method Press the start key The currently set telephone number is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key The keys to enter the number are displayed on the touch panel 2 Press TEL NO on the touch panel 3 Enter a telephone number up to 15 digits 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the machine number Description Displays the machine number Purpose To check the machine number Method Press the start key The currently machine number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 12 Copying without paper Description Simulates the copy operation without paper feed Purpose To check the overall operation of the machine Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated Display Operation MFP Only the machine operates MFP DP Both the machine and DP operate continuous operation 3 Press the system menu key The copy mode screen is displayed 4 Setthe operation conditions required on the copy mode screen Changes in the following settings can be
75. Original to be used for adjustment P N ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 303JX57010 for original size magnification leading edge timing 303JX57020 center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 for original size magnification leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57010 for tolerance of input gamma MTF MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57020 for tolerance of MTF filter and matrix ALL 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 executing maintenance item U425 2 Set specified originals P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 in the DP Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241 303JX57010 and 303JX57020 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts INPUT 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 2AC68241 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 2AC24681 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts GAMMA 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 303JX57010 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 303JX57010 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts MTF MATRIX 1 En
76. Refermer le couvercle d agrafes C 22 Abra la cubierta de grapas C e inserte el cartucho de grapas H en el grapador 23 Cierre la cubierta de grapas C 22 Die Hefterabdeckung C ffnen und die Heftklammerpatrone H in den Hefter einsetzen 23 Die Hefterabdeckung C schlieBen 22 Aprire il coperchio della graffatrice C e inserire la cartuccia della graffatrice H 23 Chiudere il coperchio della graffatrice C 22 H JP BT ROM RV ET DA AT B 23 K LPI LC 22 AF TFVAN C Ha AT IN AY YD MD EAT MAT 23 ATI MAIS C EADS 24 After cleaning with alcohol attach the Pull label K written in the adequate language onto the label on the intermediate tray B as required 24 Apr s avoir nettoy avec de l alcool fixer l tiquette Tirer K crite dans la langue ad quate sur l tiquette sur le plateau interm diaire B comme n cessaire 24 Despu s de limpiar con alcohol pegue la etiqueta de tiro K escrito en el idioma adecuado en la etiqueta en la bandeja intermediaria B seg n sea necesario 24 e nach Bedarf den Abziehaufkleber K der entsprechenden Sprache nach der Reinigung mit Alkohol auf den Aufkleber an der Zwischenablage B anbringen 24 Dopo che avete pulito con alcol fissate l etichetta staccabile K scritta nella lingua appropriata sull etichetta del vassoio intermedio B come richiesto 24 RE FAAS FTA AE RU br Ab fuU Wh ERES PULL
77. The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 29 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U072 1 3 30 Adjusting the DP center line Description Adjusts the scanning start position for the DP original Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the centers of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA1 Center line for the simplex copy mode 39 to 39 0 0 17 mm ADJUST DATA2 Center line for the duplex copy mode 39 to 39 0 0 17 mm ADJUST DATA3 Center line for rotate copying 7 to 7 0 0 17 mm Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Reference Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 16 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U072 U404 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR
78. VES NICE LIA BARIAI YF RH ONICT SA 2 AT ZME RBBESHRUC AT ZMa EZIO RTS ZN ANDERT De 11 Adding procedure to the finisher installation The following step is added after step 24 on page 10 Supplied parts O Sub Tay sicilia Insert the two hooks of the sub tray O into the two slits 1 of the MFP eject section to attach the sub tray Ajout d une proc dure l installation du finisseur L tape suivante est ajout e apr s l tape 24 de la page 10 Pi ces fournies O Plateau secondaire Ins rer les deux crochets du plateau secondaire O dans les deux fentes 1 de la section d jection du MFP pour fixer le plateau secondaire Agregando un procedimiento a la instalaci n del finalizador Se agrega el siguiente paso despu s del paso 24 en la p gina 10 Hinzuf gung eines Verfahrens zur Partes suministradas O Bandeja secundaria i Gelieferte Teile Inserte los dos ganchos en la bandeja secundaria 0 en las dos ranuras 1 en la secci n de expulsi n de MFP para instalar la bandeja secundaria Die zwei Haken der Hilfsablage O in die zwei Fixierer Installation A tes Schlitze 1 des MFP Auswerfabschnitts Der folgende Schritt wird nach Schritt 24 auf einf hren um die Milsablage anzubringen Seite 10 hinzugef gt Procedura addizionale per Parti fornite Inserite i due ganci del sottovassoio O nelle Pinstallazione del finitore
79. XJF 180 EJER EE VARS ADJUST DATA3 Ci Xil 3 180 EWE DP tat Uo WERE 1 18 RVFIVAET FUT EY hL A EFI MO Ai mm 180 EER CPE AT gt FEDRA Hii DROWEA ADJUST DATA RH RTA MORDORA ADJUST DATA2 ET AMET 180 EEO A ADJUST DATA3 180 Ein RT N AO N AO N AO N AO N ABO 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm Adjust the values If the center moves more front copy example I Increases the value If the center moves inner copy sample m Decreases the value Amount of change per step 0 085 mm Perform a test copy Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line 2 of copy example shows the reference value Reference value Horizontal difference of center line 2 for the single copying 2 mm Horizontal difference of center line 2 for the duplex copying 3 mm R gler les valeurs Pour l exemple de copie I dont l axe se d place davantage vers l avant augmenter la valeur Pour l exemple de copie m dont l axe se d place vers l int rieur diminuer la valeur Changement par graduation d chelle 0 085 mm Effectuer une copie de test R p ter les tapes 1 3 jusqu ce que l cart de la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie indique la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Diff rence horizontale de l axe 2 pour la copie recto 2 mm Diff rence horizontale d
80. and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Upper paper feed clutch lower paper feed clutch MP paper con veying clutch Electrical problem with clutch Check see page 1 4 51 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 14 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in vertical conveying section Jam code 22 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 15 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in bypass conveying section Jam code 23 Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch registration switch 16 A paper jam in the paper conveying sec tion is indicated dur ing copying jam in registration transfer section Jam code 30 Broken feed switch 1 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective swit
81. chart P 1 3 24 U066 For copying an original placed on tion scanning adjustment vi image adjustment the platen 43 LA U071 ADJUST DATA1 2 P 1 3 28 U071 For copying originals from the DP 3 4 5 Adjusting the leading edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 B MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 65 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the platen d U404 BMARGIN P 1 3 66 U404 For copying originals from the DP B MARGIN BACK Adjusting the trailing edge margin Adjusting the original scan data U403 D MARGIN Test chart P 1 3 65 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment the platen 13 U404 D MARGIN P 1 3 66 U404 For copying originals from the DP D MARGIN BACK Adjusting the left and right margins Adjusting the original scan data U403 AMARGIN Test chart P 1 3 65 U403 For copying an original placed on scanning adjustment image adjustment C MARGIN the platen U404 AMARGIN P 1 3 66 U404 For copying originals from the DP hi A MARGIN BACK C MARGIN C MARGIN BACK When maintenance item U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically is run using the specified original P N 302FZ56990 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the scanner magnification U065 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration U066 Adjusting the scanner center line U067 When maintenance item U411 Adjusting the scanner automatically is
82. de 100 V 1 M4 x 14TP Schraube 4 Schild Funktionsanweisung aufer 100 V Modelle 1 f r metrische Angaben f r Angaben in Zoll Warnschild Original entfernen auBer 100 V Modelle 1 Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben aufer 100 V Modelle 1 Vite M4 x 14TP ui 4 Etichetta Procedura di funzionamento eccetto modelli 100 V 1 per specifiche in unit del sistema metrico B Tappetino originale zu per specifiche in pollici o C Accessorio di fissaggio 2 H Etichetta di avvertimento Rimuovere origi D Accessorio di regolazione angolare 1 nale eccetto modelli 100 V 1 EPR f aa 3 Etichetta di avvertimento Originale rivolto verso l alto eccetto modelli 100 V 1 m E M4 X IATP IRE Lees 4 uat G jx AE MMS CIR 100V HE 1 Mi ABIE ABIR A DP e RR UR RR ER 1 son DEA BENE rici 1 H DRE Hunger C ix Her 2 CR 100V BB Lui 1 D f I HGB RES E ffi ESO 1 E CAM X TP uo 4 G PALF ASL 100V ERSE ccoo 1 fra vt SE ADA Qu i edd a e Eas 1 ek od wo DuC o ice edo bx eio hebr toe 1 H JRA SAUD Av 100V HERRIE 1 I FARINE vv 100V EERS 1 Installation Procedure When installing the DP be sure to turn the MFP
83. de extremo gu a ejemplos de copia j disminuye el valor Para una sincronizaci n m s lenta de extremo gu a ejemplos de copia k aumenta el valor Magnitud del cambio por incremento 0 17 mm Haga una copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separaci n de la l nea 2 del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia Valor de referencia Separaci n vertical de la linea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm Die Werte einstellen F r den schnelleren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel j Den Wert verringern F r den langsameren Vorderkantentakt Kopierbeispiel k Den Wert erh hen Anderung pro Schritt 0 17 mm Eine Testkopie erstellen Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm Regolare i valori Per accelerare la fasatura del bordo di entrata esempi di copia j riduce il valore Per rallentare la fasatura del bordo di entrata esempi di copia k aumenta il valore Entit modifica per passo 0 17 mm Eseguire una copia di prova Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando lo scostamento della linea 2 dell esempio di copia riporter i valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Scostamento verticale della linea 2 compreso fra 2 5 mm Vote t WER WIEN HEFER G WBA HFEA EN HEFER CO HK
84. de instalar el finalizador la secci n de funcionamiento queda fijada y no puede ajustar el ngulo N Abra la cubierta de transferencia izquierda y la cubierta frontal Den Hebel zur Vorderseite ziehen um den Bedienteil anzuheben und diesen mit dem Bedienteil S icherungsstift M sichern Hinweis Nach der Installation des Fixierers wird der Bedienteil gesichert und der Winkel kann nicht mehr ver ndert werden N Die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung ffnen Tirate la leva verso il lato frontale per sollevare la sezione di comando e fissarla usando il perno di fissaggio della sezione di comando M Nota Dopo che avete installato il finitore la sezione di comando stata assicurata e l angolo non pu essere regolato N Aprite il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale ERREEN a 1 KERTA FH E SEDE E EY VDE TF E HE TRAE EREA ARTT RE 2 FT AE RAI A AR ES b EU MERE M CHET EE TAI x ARI SE RENEE 2720 AAREMEITTE ETA 2 MENNE LOB A AAN 3 Remove the staple holder 1 remove the two screws 2 from the upper side and the front side and loosen the two screws 3 on the left side 3 Retirer le support d agrafes 1 retirer les deux vis 2 d
85. edge of the image is spo radically misaligned with the original 15 lmage is partly missing 13 Paper creases ME See page 1 4 48 See page 1 4 48 See page 1 4 49 See page 1 4 49 19 Image is not square 18 lmage center does not align with the original center 17 Image is out of focus See page 1 4 49 See page 1 4 50 See page 1 4 50 1 No image appears entirely white 2GN 2GP 2GR Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures No trans fer charg ing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 10 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB No LSU laser is output Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 21 Defective main PWB Check if YC21 A3 on the main PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the main PWB No devel oping bias output The connector term
86. ee enne N 2GN 2GP 2GR CONTENTS 1 1 Specifications e A ciel aL ali 1 1 1 IE LAMB 1 1 4 1 Machine Beet iria 1 1 4 PARTS zo pH iria 1 1 5 1 1 3 Machine cross sectioni i anali A ii iei cda 1 1 6 1 2 Installation 1 2 1 Installation environment iccirco ia 1 2 1 1 2 2 Unpacking and installation ie ie iaia iaia 1 2 2 1 Installation procedure atadas 1 2 2 2 Setting initial copy modes nier bre rr eee ier e 1 2 10 1 2 3 Installing the key counter option mener nen enne nennen nnns 1 2 11 1 3 Maintenance Mode 1 3 1 Maintenance mode LA te niet air 1 3 1 1 Executing a maintenance item e 1 3 1 2 Maintenance modes item list i 1 3 2 3 Contents of the maintenance mode itemS nee 1 3 6 1 4 Troubleshooting 1 4 1 Paper misteed detection cirie cn te tcc p i eU rt aaa 1 4 1 1 Paper misfeed indication iii 1 4 1 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions ie 1 4 2 3 Paper misfeedsi ila eee 1 4 11 1 42 Self diagNoSiS ill alcalina 1 4 22 1 Self diagnostic function iii aaa 1 4 22 2 Evi HfelE To eloztifeMeo o qum 1 4 23 1 4 3 Image formation problems eene en neris ene rnit tenere nnne 1 4 44 1 No image appears entirely white sse nnne nennen enn 1 4 45 2 No image appears entirely blaCk ii 1
87. et ins rer cette derni re dans le MFP 5 Attacher la fixation C l aide des deux gou pilles E Monte el herraje de fijaci n 4 Alinee el saliente del MFP 7 con el orificio 8 del herraje de fijaci n C e inserte el herraje de fijaci n C en el MFP 5 Asegure el herraje de fijaci n C con dos pasadores E Anbringen der Befestigungshalterung 4 MFP Projektion 7 mit Loch 8 der Befesti gungshalterung C ausrichten und Befesti gungshalterung C in den MFP einsetzen 5 Befestigungshalterung C mit zwei Stiften E befestigen Applicazione dell accessorio di fissag gio 4 Allineare la sporgenza dell MFP 7 con il foro 8 dell accessorio di fissaggio C quindi inserire l accessorio di fissaggio C nell MFP 5 Assicurare l accessorio di fissaggio C con due perni E ze ISl EM 4 MEP RER 7 SMELL e PF CC BHL 8 JEJE SLE E CC HA MFP 5 FO RA CED TEE SE ERE CC TTE e AERAR Y tlt 4 MFP AMO E 7 amp HESE C OX 8 d o MPP ASIA C 78 LIA to 5 EX E 2ATHRESA 0 TETI Install the DP 6 Align hinge hole 9 of DP A with pin 10 of fixing fitting C place DP A on the MFP 7 Slide DP A to ward the front side Installer le DP 6 Aligner le trou de la charni re 9 du DP A sur la goupille 10 de la fixation C et placer le DP A sur le MFP 7 Faire glisser le DP A vers l avant
88. for 10 s The LEDs turns off and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Initializing the touch panel Description Automatically correct the positions of the X and Y axes of the touch panel Purpose To automatically correct the display positions on the touch panel after it is replaced Method 1 Press the start key The key displayed at the upper left of the touch panel flashes 2 Press on the center of the key The key on lower right flashes 3 Press the center of the flashing key Initialization of the touch panel is complete and the screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 43 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U202 Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Description Initializes or operates the KMAS host monitoring system This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Checking DP operation Description Simulates the original conveying operation separately in the optional DP Purpose To check the DP operation Method 1 Press the start key 2 Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper 3 Select the item to be operated 4 When selecting TEST2 to set the magnification using the keys Display Operation Setting range Initial setting
89. gt sel El gt s z gt evfev Lat oo aj 57 a ww LO 0 D 92A 7 LL Nem ea sv sv GAS 19 ia salia 2 m ate GNOS sv sv an i oev oev oev oev 9 s etal mos Ts IN lv GAS 1 TTT i 2 LIC ZINIO 5 ELS aaa EE sel i 27 e O 611 iv uv iw iv 2 e D i maung Sts oiv orv FTAVNI AdOO E amp o 5 x A e ol lt a Lo A c Y 2 o O s Y m 1a 18 GAVZ gt g 13N gt gt o n ta SAS zs za za 18 1 nix e m gsn Y3HILI r3 a 2 E os MEME cafe 98 i ua AN gt 0593 E a gt SS va ra sa 1 z z 1553 CN ET zo a S A sa sa va i ot a gt 1 sil CO a 9 NOS sapos 88 os E i DI 28 a zg 1 a D sa sa DE ep o 2 6a 68 08 1 ovaJora QNS 5 TUVO AMM z n ale na o 1 gt ra vr vt T H he z er er 2N z e Qi Im ec E a zi zr SN a zlal Sl lzlz gt 6 O uu ON gt Fl tol tay gt m ec Ju 5 Si a ON r E gt gt E Ebr al 3210 ESI o oial Ham LS z E E Slade BIS EIE E ell a 2 ol lol E m E amp gt ZIASAA gt a 9 SEE EE SR 2 x sle TOIL E a F g 3 e L O amp Ee or sto LESS MF IIC E FEl sts ra E E e E Te Ts eo Jo To lo s FO vlr ASMA 4 3 a cose 9 al IND fi Q elles a uo ui s a olalalalal lt 121212181813 3 913 QE n ane Save eL 9 E O x x x x x 6 6 6 6 2 lt 9 9 5 H 1 TIE Fassa gt Le ELIA ZOA 9o o o EIE gt Dz i LL cR AE t SI x3 35 1 Tel S 9 or or Or or fz bi z iW i NS FOE z NOS e 9 i vol QN
90. if an original non feed jam oblique feed or wrinkling of original occurs when the DP is used Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step REGST Amount of slack in the reading original 31 to 31 0 0 17 mm from the DP REGST MIX Amount of slack in the reading original 31 to 31 0 17 mm from the DP in the auto selection mode Press the system menu key Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack If an original non feed jam or oblique feed occurs increase the setting value If wrinkling of original occurs decrease the value 7 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the developing unit number Description Displays the developing unit number Purpose To check the developing unit number Method Press the start key The number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the developing unit history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the developing counter Purpose To check
91. is heard 1 4 56 Check if the pulleys rollers and gears operate smoothly Grease the bearings and gears Check if the following clutches are installed correctly upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch Correct 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly 1 Precautions Before starting disassembly press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Turning off the main power switch before pressing the Power key to off may cause damage to the equipped hard disk When optional fax kit is installed be sure to disconnect the modular code before starting disassembly When handling PWBs printed wiring boards do not touch parts with bare hands The PWBs are susceptible to static charge Do not touch any PWB containing ICs with bare hands or any object prone to static charge Use only the specified parts to replace the fuser unit thermostat Never substitute electric wires as the machine may be seriously damaged When replacing battery on a PWB dispose properly according to laws and regulations When removing the hook of the connector be sure to release the hook 2 Drum Note the following when handling or storing the drum When removing the drum unit never expose the drum surfa
92. la borne est requis Instale el n cleo de ferrita s lo para modelo de 230 V 3 Instale el n cleo de ferrita D en el cable conector modular Aseg rese de dar tres vueltas al cable a trav s del n cleo de ferrita Deje una separaci n de 30 mm 10 mm entre el n cleo de ferrita y el terminal Aufsetzen des Ferritkerns nur 230 V Modell 3 Ferritkern D auf das Modulkabel aufsetzen Das Kabel dreimal durch den Ferritkern f hren Zwischen Ferritkern und Buchse muss ein Abstand von 30 mm 10 eingehalten wer den Montare il nucleo di ferrite solo per il modello da 230V 3 Montare il nucleo di ferrite D sul cavo con nettore modulare Avere cura di avvolgere tre volte il cavo attorno al nucleo di fer rite Lasciare una distanza di 30 mm 10 mm tra il nucleo di ferrite e il terminale Xe fX MUERA TF 230V 215 3 14 D 8 VBR EURI IPER eo eg 30 mm 10 mm bid Ro Z2r24 KAP ORY Hit 230V ERROA 3 Va F7 A RCI AIA bay D EYI a R 71354 KAF IDS sat Ce 75x74 AT lito 30mm 10mm HITSIE Connect the MFP to the telephone line 4 Plug the telephone line modular connector cable with the ferrite core D into the line ter minal and then connect the line terminal to the telephone line For the 120 V model use the supplied mod ular connecter cable B Connecter le MFP a la ligne de t l phone 4 Brancher le cable du connecteur modul
93. length switch upper lower paper size width switch MP paper size length switch or MP paper size width switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper lower paper size length switch or MP paper size length switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Upper paper size length switch YC13 B2 on the engine PWB Lower paper size length switch YC13 A19 on the engine PWB MP paper size length switch YC6 B11 on the engine PWB Defective upper lower paper size width switch or MP paper size width switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not change when the width guide in the cassette 1 2 or insert guide on the MP tray is moved replace the switch Upper paper size width switch YC12 3 4 5 on the engine PWB Lower paper size width switch YC12 9 10 11 on the engine PWB MP paper size width switch YC6 A1 A2 A3 on the engine PWB 14 A paper jam in the paper feed paper conveying fuser eject or duplex sec tion is indicated when the main power switch is turned on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective feed switch 1 2 3 registration sw
94. lo scostamento della linea 2 dell esempio di copia riporter i valori di riferimento Valore di riferimento Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale 2 per la copia singola 2 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale 2 per la copia duplex 3 mm MEU WRU Boy Sen LEVA CD IU MIRAN A HEER Cm IRE HORNO EE E 0 085mm HEAT MNRE E 1 IRR 128 3 ELI AZ ERE ERI 2 BOTA RN ME CREO RODEEUNHub R CO REE comm PW 7A pat 1795 AL EPITO 2 RAPE RE 3mm REIL HET Do TtVIDERNTTNATVIHA ACU TN 1 Ee EU TVICDBRITFPNTWIHZA ESHTI Mm RENE Fl 5 a LAF y 7 0021 E 0 085mm ag wZwogassQ 3TrxIg g cIemxcRMB1 3d 03 lt B gt FOGA Po 2 OATH 2mm LAP MEDAL FARRO DEAFTA 3mm LAP 19 A 60 x 5mm Adjustment using the DP auto adjustment original 1 Direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original upward and set the original from the place where F and R are marked 2 Set the maintenance mode U411 Press the DP FACE UP key the INPUT key and the START key in order to adjust the surface 3 When RESULT OK 00 appears on the display the adjustment is completed If ERROR XX appears the adjustment is failed Check the original set position and repeat the steps 1 to 2 until RESULT OK 00 appears For details see the service manual R glage
95. made Paper feed locations Magnifications Simplex or duplex copy mode Number of copies in simplex copy mode continuous copying is performed when set to 999 in duplex copy mode continuous copying is performed regardless of the setting Copy density Keys on the operation panel To control the paper feed pulley remove all the paper in the drawers or the drawers With the paper present the paper feed pulley does not operate Press the start key The operation starts Copy operation is simulated without paper under the set conditions To stop continuous operation press the stop key 7 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U019 Displaying the ROM version Description Displays the part number of the ROM fitted to each PWB Purpose To check the part number or to decide if the newest version of ROM is installed Method Press the start key The ROM version are displayed 1 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys Display Description MAIN MMI ENGINE ENGINE BOOT SCANNER OPTION LANGUAGE DICTIONARY DP LCF OPTION CASSETTE DF MAIN DF MTRAY DF SADDLE DF MAILBOX INNER DF SIMPLE DF MAIN FAX BOOT1 FAX APL1 FAX IPL1 FAX BOOT2 FAX APL2 FAX IPL2 Main PWB ROM IC Operation PWB ROM IC Engine
96. of centerfold paper detection sen 1370 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher only sor CPDS turning on The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES does not turn on within specified time of centerfold paper detection sen sor CPDS turning on 1770 ms 30 ppmy 1370 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold eject switch CESW is not turned on within specified time 3040 ms The centerfold eject switch CESW is not turned off 4213 ms within specified time of its turning on Centerfold side registration sensor 1 CSRS1 is not 600 ms turned on within specified time Centerfold side registration sensor 2 CSRS2 is not 600 ms turned on within specified time 89 The home position is not detected within the specified 1000 ms Jam in centerfold unit 3000 sheet document finisher only time after driving the centerfold staple motor CSTM The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned off within specified time 4528 ms 30 ppm 3504 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned on within specified time 4528 ms 30 ppm 3504 ms 40 50 ppm The centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 90 Jam in mail box
97. of second page using the DP 303JX57010 for input gamma MTF MATRIX Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 303JX57020 for MTF filter and matrix ALL 1 Set specified originals P N 2AC68241 303JX57010 303JX57020 in the DP Stack the originals in the order of 2AC68241 303JX57010 and 303JX57020 2 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts INPUT 1 Seta specified original P N 2AC24681 in the DP 2 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts GAMMA 1 Seta specified original P N 303JX57010 in the DP 2 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts MTF MATRIX 1 Seta specified original P N 303JX57020 in the DP 2 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and opera tion stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U411 Error Codes Codes Description ERROR 01 ERROR 02 ERROR 03 ERROR 04 ERROR 05 ERROR 06 ERROR 07 ERROR 08 ERROR 09 ERROR 0a ERROR 0b ERROR 0c ERROR 0d ERROR 0e ERROR Of ERROR 10 ERROR 11 ERROR 12 ERROR 13 ERROR 14 ERROR 15 ERROR 16 ERROR 17 ERROR 18 ERROR 19 ERRO
98. of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Registration switch eject switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 51 19 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in optional job separator eject sec tion Jam code 51 Broken feedshift switch or job separator eject switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch job separator eject switch 20 A paper jam in the feedshift section is indicated during copying jam in feed shift section Jam code 52 1 4 16 Check if the feedshift sole noid malfunctions Run maintenance item U033 and select the feedshift solenoid on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the feedshift solenoid Check see page 1 4 51 Broken feedshift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually R
99. of the separate phone 5 When connecting a separate phone to the MFP attach the ferrite core D to the tele phone line of the separate phone Be sure to loop the cord twice through the ferrite core Installer le noyau de ferrite ligne du t l phone s par 5 Lors de la connexion d un t l phone s par au MFP fixer le noyau de ferrite D la ligne du t l phone s par Veiller enrouler deux fois le cordon autour du noyau de ferrite Instale el n cleo de ferrita l nea telef nica del tel fono independiente 5 AI conectar un tel fono separado al MFP coloque el n cleo de ferrita D a la l nea telef nica del tel fono separado Aseg rese de dar dos vueltas al cable a trav s del n cleo de ferrita Aufsetzen des Ferritkerns Telefonlei tung mit separatem Telefon 5 Beim AnschlieBen eines separaten Telefons an den MFP den Ferritkern D auf die Tele fonleitung des separaten Telefons aufsetzen Das Kabel zweimal durch den Ferritkern f hren Montare il nucleo di ferrite linea tele fonica del telefono separato 5 Nel caso in cui si colleghi un telefono sepa rato all MFP montare il nucleo di ferrite D sulla linea del telefono separato Avere cura di avvolgere due volte il cavo attorno al nucleo di ferrite RETE HERRIA Bia 5 RE TENER MFP BY 14415 D B28 PABBA BiG EA REA FRS 7254 RITO UNE UMRESOR 5 AME U ERE L MEP AME DET BPS Met VE
100. on A piece of paper torn from copy paper is caught around feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject Switch or feedshift switch Check visually and remove it if any Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch eject switch feedshift switch 2 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from cassette 1 Jam code 10 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 1 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 1 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 1 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the upper paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the upper paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the upper paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 51 3 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed f
101. operation Description Applies current to each solenoid in order to check its ON status Purpose To check the operation of each solenoid Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the solenoid to be operated 3 Press the start key The solenoid turns on for 1 s Display Solenoids TONER Toner feed solenoid TNFSOL BRANCH1 Feedshift solenoid FSSOL BRANCH2 Feedshift solenoid FSSOL MOTOR ON The drive motor DM and the paper feed motor PFM are turned on Optional To stop motor driving press MOTOR ON again Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 17 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U034 Adjusting the print start timing Description Adjusts the leading edge registration or center line Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description LSU OUT TOP Leading edge registration adjustment LSU OUT LEFT Center line adjustment Adjustment leading edge registration adjustment 1 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step TOP Adju
102. output DUPFCL On Off Ground DUPPCSW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Pin No Signal I O Voltage Description YC10 B7 CFM11 12 13 O 0 24 V DC CFM11 12 13 On Off Connected B8 DUP PO l 0 5 V DC Duplex unit distinction signal is regis Bg 24VDR o 24V DC 24 V DC power output ration switch fuser B10 CFM8 9 10 O 0 24V DC CFM8 9 10 On Off unit duplex B11 NC l Not used feed clutch duplex paper con veying switch and cooling fan motor 8 to 13 YC11 1 R24VDR O 24VDC 24 V DC power output Connected 2 R24VDR O 24VDC 24 V DC power output to the drive 3 GND sdil Ground motor paper feed motor 4 GND Ground feed clutch 1 5 5VD O 5VDC 5 V DC power output She ood 6 5VD O 5VDC 5 V DC power output switch 1 7 GND Ground 8 GND Ground 9 DM_ON O 0 24V DC DM On Off 10 PFM_ON O 0 24V DC PFM On Off 11 DM_LOCK I 0 5 VDC DM LOCK signal 12 PFM_LOCK I 0 5 VDC PFM LOCK signal 13 DM_CLK O 0 5V DC pulse DM CLOCK signal 14 FCL1 O 0 24V DC FCL1 On Off 15 24VDR O 24VDC 24 V DC power output 16 GND l Ground 17 FSW1 I 0 5VDC FSW1 On Off 18 5VD O 5VDC 5 V DC power output YC12 1 24VDR O 24VDC 24 V DC power output Connected 2 24VUP I 24VDC 24 V DC power input tothe Upper 3 Pwsw uo I 0 5VDC PWSW U On Off and lower paper size 4 PWSW U1 I 0 5VDC PWSW U On Off width 5 PWSW U2 I 0 5VDC PWSW U On Off switches 6 GND SJ Ground 7 24VDR O 24VDC 24 V DC powe
103. overflow switch 5 TOFSW5 Tray overflow switch 6 TOFSW6 Tray overflow switch 7 TOFSW7 Method Checking the switch of the centerfold unit 1 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches BUNDLE UP HP SW BNDL DOWN HP SW BLADE HP SW WIDTH HP SW U WIDTH HPSWL FEED IN SW PAPER DET SW TRAY PAP DET SW EJECT SW TRAY DET SW Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 1 CPCBS1 Centerfold paper conveying belt sensor 2 CPCBS2 Blade home position sensor BLHPS Centerfold side registration sensor 2 CSRS2 Centerfold side registration sensor 1 CSRS1 Centerfold paper entry sensor CPES Centerfold paper detection sensor CPDS Tray paper detection sensor TPDS Centerfold eject switch CESW Centerfold top cover switch CTCSW Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the operation of the DP motors Description Turns the motors in the optional DP on Purpose To check the operation of the DP motors Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Motors DP FEED MOTOR DP REG MOTOR DP CONV MOTOR DP LIFT MOTOR CIS FAN MOTOR DP FEED MOT REV Original feed motor OFM is turned on Orig
104. paper feeder sequence error jam A communication sequence error occurs between the machine and the 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper feed section 10 No paper feed from cassette 1 Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within the speci fied time of upper paper feed clutch PFCL U turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 1489 ms 30 ppm 1152 ms 40 50 ppm 11 No paper feed from cassette 2 Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within the speci fied time of lower paper feed clutch PFCL L turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm 12 No paper feed from optional cassette 3 Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within the speci fied time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time paper feed from optional paper feeder 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within the speci fied time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified ti
105. position oblique du DP 1 V rifier l cart horizontal entre la position de la ligne 1 de l original a et celle de la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart exc de la valeur de r f rence le r gler selon la proc dure suivante Valeur de r f rence Pour la copie recto l cart horizontal de la ligne 2 doit tre de 3 mm Pour la copie recto verso l cart horizontal de la ligne 2 doit tre de 4 mm Verificaci n de la posici n oblicua del DP 1 Compruebe la separaci n horizontal entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 de las posiciones del ejemplo de copia Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia aj stela siguiendo este procedimiento Valor de referencia Para el copiado por una cara la separaci n horizontal de la linea 2 debe estar dentro de 3 mm Para el copiado duplex la separaci n horizontal de la l nea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 mm Pr fen der Schr glage des DP 1 Den horizontalen Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 der Kopierbeispielspositionen pr fen Wenn der Abstand gr Ber als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen lt Bezugswert gt Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 mm liegen Verifica della posizione obliqua del DP 1 Verificare lo scostamento orizzontale fra la linea 1 del
106. print mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ADJUST DATA Description Setting range Initial setting Exposure is toner economy mode 12 to 0 6 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter 4 Press the start key The value is set Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U087 Setting DP reading position modification operation Description The presence or absence of dust is determined by comparing the scan data of the original trailing edge and that taken after the original is conveyed past the DP original scanning position If dust is identified the DP original scanning position is adjusted for the following originals Purpose When using optional DP to solve the problem when black lines occurs due to the dust with respect to original reading position Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description CCD Setting of standard data when dust is detected BLACK Initialization of original reading position Setting standard data when dust is detected 1 Selectthe
107. remedy or replace the cable The tray elevation motor malfunc tions Replace the tray elevation motor The tray lower limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective tray lower limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sen sor Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 35 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 36 Side registration motor 1 problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on side registration motor 1 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective side reg istration motor 1 Replace side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Adjustment motor problem optional document finisher When the adjustment motor is driving the ON status of the
108. retainer in the aperture in the upper right cover 9 Fit the key counter cover with the key counter socket assembly inserted to the key counter cover retainer on the machine using the screw 10 Insert the key counter into the key counter socket assembly Key counter cover retainer 66060022 Key conuter cover Key counter L SET 4 signal cable A d 7 Projection 7 M4 x 30 screw B1B54300 Figure 1 2 17 11 Turn the main power switch on and enter the maintenance mode 12 Run maintenance item U204 and select ON 13 Exit the maintenance mode 14 Check that the message requesting the key counter to be inserted is displayed on the touch panel when the key counter is pulled out 15 Check that the counter counts up as prints are made 1 2 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 3 1 Maintenance mode The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine 1 Executing a maintenance item Press the status key Enter 10871087 using Maintenance mode is entered the numeric keys Enter the maintenance item number using the cursor up down keys The maintenance item is or numeric keys selected Y Press the start key Y The selected maintenance item is run Y Press the stop key Repeat the same maintenance item Run another maintenance item Enter 001 using the curso
109. run using the specified original P N 2AC68241 the following adjustments are automatically made Adjusting the DP magnification U070 Adjusting the DP scanning timing U071 Adjusting the DP center line U072 Image quality Item Specifications 100 magnification Enlargement reduction Lateral squareness Leading edge registration Skewed paper feed Left right difference Curling Machine 0 8 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 0 Using DP 1 5 Machine 1 5 mm 375 mm Using DP 2 5 mm 375 mm Cassette 2 5 mm MP tray 2 5 mm Duplex copying 2 5 mm Cassette 1 5 mm or less MP tray 1 5 mm or less Duplex copying 2 0 mm or less Cassette 2 0 mm MP tray 2 0 mm Duplex mode 3 0 mm Simplex mode 10 0 mm or less Duplex mode 10 0 mm or less 2 4 8 2GN 2GP 2GR
110. scanner unit suit and insert two pins 6 Remove two positioning pins after fixing ISU with three screws 7 Refit two connectors and ISU cover 8 Refit the platen Lens number Figure 1 5 39 1 5 19 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Adjusting the position of the ISU reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Caution Adjust the amount of slack in the paper at the registration roller first see page 1 3 20 Check for the longitudinal square ness of the copy image and if it is not obtained perform the longitudinal squareness adjustment Before making the following adjustment output a VTC PG2 pattern in maintenance item U993 to use as the original for the adjustment Procedure e Original Copy Copy Place the original example 1 example 2 on the platen Figure 1 5 40 Press the start key and make aa Seren and a test copy at 100 magnification 1 Remove the platen Loosen the two screws and adjust the position of the mirror 2 frame For copy example 1 move the frame in the direction of the white arrow lt a For copy example 2 move the frame in the direction of the black arrow m Is the image correct End Mirror 2 frame Figure 1 5 41 1 5 20 2GN 2GP 2GR 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit Take the following procedure w
111. set according to user copy service provider request If a paper jam occurs frequently in the optional document finisher when the number of copies is counted at the time of paper ejection copies are provided without copy counts The copy service provider cannot charge for such copying To prevent this the copy timing should be made earlier If a paper jam occurs frequently in the paper conveying or fuser sections when the number of copies is counted before the paper reaches those sections copying is charged without a copy being made To prevent this the copy timing should be made later Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the copy count timing Display Description FEED When secondary paper feed starts EJECT When the paper is ejected Initial setting EJECT 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting OEM purchaser code Description Sets the OEM purchaser code Purpose Sets the code when replacing the main PWB and the like Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Adjust the preset value using the or numeric keys 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 60 Setting service status page Description Determines displaying the toner coverage report on reporting Purpose According to user request changes
112. the count value machine number and the developing counter Method Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No 1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of developing counter Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 79 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U989 HDD scandisk Description Restores data in the hard disk by scanning the disk Purpose If power is turned off while accessing to the hard disk is performed the control information in the hard disk drive may be damaged Use this mode to restore the data Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key When scanning of the disk is complete the execution result is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the time for the exposure lamp to light Description Displays clears or changes the accumulated time for the exposure lamp to light Purpose To check duration of use of the exposure lamp Also to clear the accumulated time for the lamp after replace ment Method Press the start key The accumulated time of illumination for the exposure lamp is displayed in minutes Display Description CCD Accumulated time for the exposure lamp CIS Accumulated time for CIS Cle
113. to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric shock Never connect the ground cable to any of the following gas pipes lightning rods ground cables for telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the le roe iE LT RR CAUTION Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface the copier may tip over causing injury N e Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place This may cause fire or electric shock N e Do not install the copier near a radiator heater other heat source or near flammable material This may cause fire cs ie cets a8 cats ibi asti lalla ia cl N Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as possible Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance N Always handle the machine by the correct locations when MOVING it o Always use anti toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped Failure to do this may cause the copier to move unexpectedly or topple leading to injury ui Q Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively Protect the eyes If toner or developer is acciden tally ingested drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immedi ately If it gets into the eyes rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical Cu P
114. turned on at low speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at high speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at middle speed Eject motor EJM is turned on at low speed Relief path motor RPM is turned on counterwise Relief path motor RPM is turned on clockwise Paper conveying belt motor 1 PCBM1 is turned on Paper conveying belt motor 2 PCBM2 is turned on Side registration motor 1 2 SRM1 2 is turned on Side registration motor 1 2 SRM1 2 is turned on Staple shift motor 1 STSM1 is turned on Staple shift motor 2 STSM2 is turned on Staple motor STM is turned on Main tray motor MTM is turned on Punch motor PUNM is turned on Paddle motor PDM is turned on 2 To stop operation press the stop key Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U240 Method Checking the solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Select the item to be operated The solenoid turns on for 1 s Display Solenoid FEED IN SOL REAR DOWN SOL 1 REAR DOWN SOL 2 SUB PATH SOL SUB TRAY R SOL SUB TRAY L SOL BOOKLET SOL PADDLE SOL HOLD DOWN SOL EJECT SOL PUNCH SOL M TRAY LOCK SOL Paper entry solenoid PESOL Trailing edge holder solenoid 1 TEHSOL1 Trailing edge holder solenoid 2 TEHSOL2 Relief path solenoid RPSOL Feedshift solenoid 1 FSSOL1 Feedshift solenoid 2 FSSOL2 Feedshift solenoid 3 FSSOL3 Paddle solenoid PDSOL Paper holder solenoid PHSOL Pressure switch
115. 0 50 ppm The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning off 2837 ms 30 ppm 2196 ms 40 50 ppm 61 Duplex paper convey ing section 2 The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within speci fied time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUP PCSW turning on 1994 ms 30 ppm 1543 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the duplex paper conveying switch DUP PCSW turning off 1994 ms 30 ppm 1543 ms 40 50 ppm Optional DP 1 4 6 70 No original feed The original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within specified time during the first sheet feeding 2436 pulse The original feed switch OFSW does not turn on within specified time during the second sheet feeding 4430 pulse 71 An original jam in the original feed conveying section 1 DP timing switch 2 DPTSW2 does not turn off within specified time 2500 pulse 72 An original jam in the original feed conveying section 2 The original feed switch OFSW and original registration switch ORSW does not turn off within specified time 16675 pulse 73 An original jam in the original conveying sec tion DP timing switch 1 DPTSW 1 does not turn off within specified time 4979 pulse 74 An original jam in the original registration section The original registration sw
116. 0000 Enter the encryption code 6 digit alphanumeric characters and then press OK Remind the customer not to forget the encryption code entered a Press OK Hard disk formatting begins o When formatting finishes follow the onscreen instructions to turn the Main Power Switch off and on again After the opening screen is displayed confirm that a hard disk icon 3 is shown in the lower right corner of the screen See Illustration B Keep the used USB Key in the USB Key Box on the back side of the left center cover that is attached to the back side of the machine See Illustration C N co Espa ol Piezas suministradas llave USB at air 1 Precauciones antes de la activaci n AI activar el kit de seguridad se eliminar n todos los datos que el cliente tenga almacenados en el disco duro Antes de iniciar la activaci n pida al cliente que confirme que los datos se pueden eliminar Aseg rese de que el interruptor principal est apagado Procedimiento de activaci n 1 Inserte la llave USB en la ranura de memoria USB de la m quina y encienda el interruptor principal Consulte la ilustraci n A 2 Despu s de la pantalla inicial aparecer el mensaje Comenzar instalaci n de kit de seguridad Pulse OK 3 Siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla para retirar la llave USB y apague el interruptor principal 4 Encienda el interruptor principal Aparecer la pantalla de introducci n d
117. 0420H One 1 M3 bronze nut P N C2303000 Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight screws P N B3024100 Two 2 M4 x 10 tap tight P screws P N B8014100 x _ Procedure 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Fit the key counter socket assembly to the key counter retainer using the two screws and nut Fit the key counter mount to the key counter cover using the two screws and attach the key counter retainer to the mount using the two screws M4 x 6 screws B4304060 Key counter retainer 66060030 Key counter mount 66060040 M3 nut Key counter cover 2A360010 e M3 x 6 flat head screws B2303060 Key counter socket assembly 41529210 Pat Figure 1 2 15 4 Remove the scanner right cover and the Scanner right cover Aperture upper right cover zi 5 Cutout the aperture plate on the upper right cover using nippers 6 Pass the connect inside the machine through the aperture and refit the upper right cover and scanner right cover Connector iis Upper right cover Figure 1 2 16 1 2 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Pass the key counter signal cable through the aperture in the key counter cover retainer and insert into the connector of the machine 8 Seat the projection of the key counter cover
118. 1 Checking the drum number Displaying the drum history Developing Initial setting for the developing unit Setting toner loading operation MODE2 Checking sensors for toner Checking clearing the developing drive time Checking the developing count Fuser and cleaning Setting the fuser control temperature Driving start temperature when warm up starts Control temperature for displaying Ready for copying Control temperature during printing 175 30 ppm 185 40 50 ppm 190 30 ppm 200 40 50 ppm 190 30 ppm 200 40 50 ppm Resetting the fuser problem data Checking fuser counts Turning the fuser heater on Checking the fuser temperature Operation panel and support equipment Turning all LEDs on Initializing the touch panel Setting the KMAS host monitoring system Checking DP operation Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter OFF COUNTER 1 2 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Checking the operation panel keys Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Inch specifications Letter Metric specifications A4 1 2 Setting the trial functions Setting punch destination Inch specifications INCH Metric specifications EUROPE METRIC Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher OFF Setting finisher stack quantity 0 0712
119. 1 3 28 P 1 3 66 Adjustment auxiliary scanning direction of CCD CIS 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value tit Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 13 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 U071 U404 P 1 3 28 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 27 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U071 Adjusting the DP scanning timing Description Adjusts the DP original scanning timing Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image when the optional DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA1 Leading edge registration first page 32to32 O 0 09 mm ADJUST DATA2 Trailing edge registration first page 32t032 O 0 09 mm ADJUST DATA3 Leading edge registration second 45to45 O 0 09 mm page ADJUST DATA4 Traili
120. 11 Retire el anillo de retenci n 13 del herraje de control de ngulo D que se instal en el paso 12 para retirar el eje 14 12 Inserte el eje 14 en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha 13 Fije el anillo de retenci n 13 a la muesca del eje 14 y asegure el eje 14 14 Reinstale la cubierta trasera 12 que ha retirado en el paso 10 con cuatro tornillos 11 11 Anschlagring 13 von der Winkeleinstellbefestigung D abnehmen die in Schritt 12 montiert wurde um die Welle 14 zu entfernen 12 Welle 14 in die R ckseite des rechten Scharniers einsetzen 13 Anschlagring 13 an der Wellenkerbe 14 anbringen und Welle befestigen 14 14 Die in Schritt 10 abgenommene R ckabdeckung 12 wieder mit vier Schrauben 11 einbauen 11 Rimuovere l anello di bloccaggio 13 dell accessorio di regolazione angolare D che era stato installato al Punto 12 per rimuovere l albero 14 12 Inserire l albero 14 nella parte posteriore della cerniera destra 13 Applicare l anello di bloccaggio 13 nell incavo dell albero 14 e assicurare l albero 14 14 Rimontare il coperchio posteriore 12 rimosso al Punto 10 con quattro viti 11 11 FR FER 9 Zo p eco KY fa BETIS D ESA C130 WOR C14 JE F 12 34i 14 dE SUE SEE PRU E o 13 13 C130 BRERA C140 B 04 14 Mz 14 H 4 SURE C11 EZ 10 P F RJ i C120 Ezio 11 FIR 12 CROATA 0 A Hv ZU YZ 031
121. 1d Nn M 8 E AL c ta ia ONO S ld UNOS mn or o m eiv eiv e AE Udar gt y ONOS ste o NS z z sivferv ASA TMS 1d anos Fete O e ele nv nv SNS NOS gt o v v ONO Y Wad NNT EJE gt ONO y Ea Ed anos HS s ps sis siv s an9 ONE e iv CEE ofo s EMS NT ss CAS 9 viv viv GNDd z z QNS efe dar n ervlerv AV ca ZMS ANT E zz E ziv ziv mu 1 2X5 100710007 Ave i ow amp rotor ove ZI MSZOT n 5 ev ev IRE UNO Osa ev ev 1 zo QAS z a i OTL La Ev O ow Pal Ea 0 Sv 9v QNO E ae 9 9 3 e z z Vor L Sv SY p sts a HHH ma win ea c NS o 77 N anoa pee LE NOAVEH wW UNO rir o eo efe pps teeters o Gull ev a a efe gt o SL Ts 5 O zv zv il O E NOA ELE gt zz gt by iv USI lev e ON LL y B AGUS ele P sv 1v bv AQU 12 eie Sv zv Sv 7asis 99 e eje vv ev w ESSO Sus ZI 9 v v ev vv Ey OSI LA y E a gt sfs zv sv E Jasa EJE zZ a 9 9 iv 9v odsad lt o elo 1 HE SIS 135 LS 9 mS OU pod o Ph po 0 p o Ra E 0 ri Ve e v e S u X L vlale sla elv X 2 o man 7 o zie AVE as gt Llet Fansa z z uz z oto u O lt ajajzt 2 x ea E mo eee 1 uio DE g y ui Wenn aS u X Be ESTESE lt Aduad o x9 an z e lR EA EE c HE O EL daadid Ole amp x x x x Q s O perc teas 1 5 o 9 TO gt z 8 L EN a 35 9 8 a FIER y we Tz z la 5 z 8 gl Su 8 elslsl lelo Z gt nt ej Els o ermsMd SE 77 u ES 3 e Loops S E D i els Y lm i
122. 2 3 Unpacking 1 Machine 11 Spacer 2 Outer case 12 Document tray 3 Inner frame 13 Hinge joints 4 Skid 14 Bar code labels 5 Bottom front left pad 15 Power cord 6 Bottom front right pad 16 Plastic bag 7 Bottom rear left pad 17 Leaflet 8 Bottom rear right pad 18 Plastic bag 9 Machine cover 19 M3x8 screws 10 Upper pad 20 Operation guide Caution Place the machine on a level surface 2GN 2GP 2GR Remove the tapes spacers and pad 1 Remove two tapes Spacers 2 Pull the lever and operation section is low ered 3 Remove two spacers Remove waste textile on the operation panel if any 4 Remove the pad 5 Remove the tape holding the power cord Pad Figure 1 2 4 Install the optional paper feeder 1 Install the optional paper feeder as necessary 2 Verify levelness at the four corners of the platen using a level gauge and adjust the level bolts at the bottom of the machine to optimize levelness Release the lever holding mirror 1 and 2 frames 1 Turn the lever of the machine rear side with the tool to release the lever holding the mir ror 1 and 2 frames Figure 1 2 5 1 2 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Release of cassette lift plate 1 Pull cassette 1 and 2 out Remove the lift plate stopper from each cas sette and attach it to the storage location When moving the machine attach the lift E C ee a plate in original position Sey
123. 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller Check and remedy or feedshift pulley is deformed 35 Defective eject switch 2 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 2 on and off A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying sub tray eject jam Jam code 84 manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 36 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying sub tray eject jam Jam code 85 Defective eject switch 3 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 3 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 19 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 37 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying inter nal tray paper entry sensor 1 jam Jam code 86 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 1 Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 1 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 38 A paper jam in optional doc
124. 23 situate sul coperchio frontale sinistro 8 che avete rimosso nel passo 4 per rimuovere la sezione laterale bianca destra 22 e montate il coperchio frontale sinistro J S D AAC P BR Ze BU aA 8 IEA MOS HC FC MAA E 22 Ja LZ B s RIS D 22 EARL DIS D TROTA 12 Fit the left front cover J S D using the two screws 6 on the left side to secure and using the two screws 5 that have been removed in step 3 12 Placer le couvercle avant gauche J S D l aide des deux vis 6 sur le c t gauche pour le fixer et en utilisant les deux vis 5 retir es auparavant lors de l tape 3 12 Encaje la cubierta delantera izquierda J S D utilizando los dos tornillos 6 en el lado izquierdo y utilizando los dos tornillos 5 que fueron desmontados en el paso 3 12 Die linke Frontabdeckung J S D mit den zwei Schrauben 6 auf der linken Seite und mit den in Schritt 3 entfernten zwei Schrauben 5 befestigen 12 Montate il coperchio frontale sinistro J S D usando le due viti 6 sul lato sinistro per fissarlo e usando le due viti 5 che sono state rimosse nel passo 3 12 y 1247 AMR 6 E RE ZC HU S D J JR UE F HINIR 5 RETTE 12 7 8 973 J S D EEMODEA 6 24 TC HEL FIS CAR L 7E CA 5 2 KTHY HU 5 13 Refitthe staple holder that has been removed in step 3 to its origi
125. 28 PE A FRI ZC DU TRE zT 24 9822 M3 x OSTP L FI 22 EEE rs 2H A E 11S 8 8 3ETT A E Hosa v BOO amp MFP AO BRI dz VAL ZETA TA ETS Fi x DI EX M3 X OSTP L 22k E HE h A ICRI TWS EY 18 1 ATE 12 Fitthe ground plate J using a TP screw M3 x 05 L 12 Placer la plaque de masse J l aide d une vis TP M3 x 05 L 12 Encaje la placa de tierra J utilizando un tornillo TP M3 x 05 L 12 Die Grundplatte J mit einer TP Schraube M3 x 05 L befestigen 12 Montate la piastra di terra J usando una vite TP M3 x 05 L 12 JH14 2 22M3 x OSTP L SE ERARO 12 7 A J Z CA M3 X OSTP L 1 KTH n FF S 13 Fitthe hook 20 and the hole 22 of the transfer unit A to the oblong hole 19 and the projection 21 of the frame of the MFP and secure the unit using a TP screw M3 x 05 L Arrange the cable 23 to position it under the metal fittings 24 13 Placer le crochet 20 et l orifice 22 de l unit de transfert A dans l orifice oblong 19 et dans la saillie 21 du cadre du MFP et fixer l unit l aide d une vis TP M3 x 05 L Arranger le cable 23 pour le mettre en place au dessous des garnitures en m tal 24 13 Encaje el gancho 20 y el orificio 22 de la unidad de transferencia A al orificio alargado 19 y la saliente 21 del armaz n del MFP y asegure la unidad utilizando un tornillo T
126. 2989 ms 30 ppm time of its turning on 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 86 Internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 is not turned on 2674 ms 30 ppmy Jam in eject section of internal tray 1 3000 sheet document fin isher only even if a specified time has elapsed after the eject signal was received 2070 ms 40 50 ppm 87 Jam in eject section of internal tray 2 3000 sheet document fin Internal tray entry sensor 2 ITPES2 does not turn on within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 turning on 1708 ms 30 ppm 1322 ms 40 50 ppm Internal tray entry sensor 2 ITPES2 does not turn off 676 ms isher only vera A N within specified time of internal tray entry sensor 1 ITPES1 turning off 88 Eject switch 1 ESW1 is not turned on within specified 1324 ms Jam in eject section of time main tray 3999 2005 Side registration home position sensor 1 SRHPS1 is not 500 ms document finisher only er i A turned off within specified time of its turning on Side registration home position sensor 2 SRHPS2 is not 500 ms turned off within specified time of its turning on The paper conveying belt detection sensor PCBDS is 2000 ms not turned off within specified time 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 89 The centerfold paper entry sensor CPES does not turn 1770 ms 30 ppm finisher Jam in centerfold unit off within specified time
127. 4 45 3 Image is too light A rero REPRE ERR nne etr earn ede 1 4 46 4 Background is visible nia iaia ia aaa dea 1 4 46 5 A white line appears longitudinally i 1 4 46 6 A black line appears longitudinally iii 1 4 47 7 A black line appears laterallY sse emen nem nennen nnne 1 4 47 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the Other ie 1 4 47 9 Black dots appear on the image u iii 1 4 47 ION NES cae 1 4 48 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original 1 4 48 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original 1 4 48 13 Paper creases ice re irent idas 1 4 48 14 Offset OCCUIS ee ON 1 4 49 15 Image is partly missing A IRA alal od eed ee i ae 1 4 49 16 Eusing IS DOOF otitis 1 4 49 17 Image is out of FOCUS 100 iii 1 4 49 18 Image center does not align with the original center 1 4 50 19 Image Is Not Square coto tnnt eot Rael ione 1 4 50 1 4 4 Electric proble da a 1 4 51 14 5 Mechanical problems i ovario aa psi eee 1 4 55 1 5 Assembly and Disassembly 1 5 1 Precautions for assembly and disassembly sss eem nennen 1 5 1 agciiste e cp m 1 5 1 2 DTU cer
128. 4 B1 YC13 A12 YC13 B15 YC13 B18 YC14 B4 YC13 A5 YC13 A2 YC13 A7 Figure 2 1 3 Paper feed section block diagram cassettes 1 and 2 LE o t or Om OT YC6 A11 weesw Figure 2 1 4 Paper feed section block diagram MP tray 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 2 Main charging section The main charging section consists of the main charger assembly drum and so on The drum is electrically charged uni formly by means of a grid to form a latent image on the surface The main charger unit charges the drum so that a latent image is formed on the surface the shield grid ensuring the charge is applied uniformly In addition the main charger unit is equipped with the main charger cleaning motor and it is cleaning automatically Main charger unit Tungsten wire Shield grid Figure 2 1 5 Main charging section YC9 B13 B14 MCCM_FWD REV ca HVTPWB ZENER PWB Figure 2 1 6 Main charging section block diagram 2 1 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 3 Optical section The optical section consists of the scanner mirror frame and image scanning unit for scanning and the laser scanner unit for printing
129. 4827 U zx 7 bh 14 ZI At 12 BEY ZAR LoT b 14 BHAT 5 13 2 py 772 13 amp ux7rtk 4 PRERA ve h 14 MET 14 FIE 10 TCH L EHS 12 EEA 1 4 RTRM V ROIS Connect the signal lines 15 Connect control signal line 15 of DP A and data signal line 16 to the MFP 16 Turn fixing knobs 17 at the both sides of the connector clockwise to secure the signal lines Connecter les circuits de transmission 15 Connecter le circuit de transmission de com mande 15 du DP A ainsi que celui de donn es 16 au MFP 16 Tourner les boutons de fixation 17 de cha que c t du connecteur dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre pour fixer les circuits de transmission Conecte las l neas de se al 15 Conecte la linea de se al de control 15 del DP A y la l nea de se al de datos 16 al MFP 16 Gire los pomos de fijaci n 17 de ambos lados del conector en sentido horario para asegurar las l neas de sefial Anschlie en der Signalleitungen 15 Steuersignalleitung 15 von DP A und Datensignalleitung 16 an den MFP anschlieBen 16 Befestigungshandr der 17 an beiden Sei ten des Anschlusses nach rechts drehen um die Signalleitungen zu befestigen Connessione delle linee dei segnali 15 Connettere la linea del segnale di controllo 15 del DP A e la linea del segnale dati 16 all MFP 16 Ruotare le rotelle di fissaggio 17 su entrambi i lati del conn
130. 5 4 Open the hook 7 on the right side and remove the left front cover 8 4 Ouvrir le crochet 7 se trouvant sur le c t droit et retirer le couvercle avant gauche 8 4 Abra el gancho 7 en el lado derecho y desmonte la cubierta delantera izquierda 8 und die linke Frontabdeckung 8 abnehmen e rimuovete il coperchio frontale sinistro 8 4 FT FFA BU SCARE CD SP Ac REAR 8 8 OAT 5 Remove the two screws 9 and remove the ejection cover 10 with the mounting plate 5 Enlever les deux vis 9 et enlever le couvercle d jection 10 avec la plaque de montage 5 Saque los dos tornillos 9 y desmonte la cubierta de expulsi n 10 con la placa de montaje 5 Die zwei Schrauben 9 entfernen und dann die Auswurfabdeckung 10 mit der Montageplatte abnehmen 5 Rimuovete ora le due viti 9 e quindi il coperchio di espulsione 10 con la piastra di montaggio 5 E P24 9R2 9 Uc FERES 10 BYE OR T 5 EX 9 2k AF UL HER 10 HX FH I EN AT 6 Remove the two screws 11 and then remove the inner ejection cover 12 6 Enlever les deux vis 11 puis enlever le couvercle d jection interne 12 6 Saque los dos tornillos 11 y desmonte la cubierta de expulsi n interior 12 6 Die zwei Schrauben 11 entfernen und dann die innere Auswurfabdeckung 12 abnehmen 6 Rimuovete le due viti 11 e quind
131. 6 YC19 A9 YC13 m ate YC14 m BE EL 12 12 Mo YC18 i B1 B19 B1 B16 YC2 1 YC24 14 YC20 i i 14 YC8 1 18 YC23 1 1 B15 14 YC7 1 ais YC6 A1 1 B1 A14 YC9 B14 B1 Ed Ga AAA 7 YC1 lt EN a 8 BO B1 YC10 YC11 7 EN O al Figure 2 3 4 Engine PWB silk screen diagram 2 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC1 Connected to the power source PWB CFM3 4 ZCROSS 5VD FH M ON FH S ON GND 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC CFM3 4 On Off Zero cross signal 5 V DC power input FH M On Off FH S On Off Ground Connected to the power source PWB 24VDR GND GND GND 3 3V 5VD 24VDR 24V DC 3 3 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC 24 V DC power input Ground Ground Ground 3 3 V DC power input 5 V DC power input 24 V DC power input Connected to the optional document finisher N AlN Oa A OY Ii2 2 o0 A Y NN SET SIG DFSDO DFSDI DFSCLK DFSEL SISEL DFRDY SIRDY 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Document finisher connection signal Document finisher serial communication data sig nal Document finisher serial communication data sig nal Document finisher CLOCK signal Document finisher SELECT signal Not used Document finisher READY signal Not used Connected to the optional paper feeder ON DOA
132. B3 REI CO 9 ff gt hb A OFEA 042 1X LCISIXERR 15 SHO HAT 10 13P 3 Z 16 o plxEz 7 07 1 KERVI LULAT Ze 20 FIC eI LT ISP RZA 16 ART 5 11 11 11 11 11 mmm A HA PAE gt al SZ D Insertthe transfer unit A Secure the unit using two TP screws M3 x 05 L and the pin 18 that has been fitted to the transfer unit A Ins rer l unit de transfert A dans le MFP depuis l avant et le faire glisser vers la gauche Fixer l unit avec deux vis TP M3 x 05 L etla goupille 18 qui a t ajust e dans l unit de transfert A Inserte la unidad de transferencia A en el MFP desde el lado delantero y deslice hacia la izquierda Asegure la unidad utilizando dos tornillos TP M3 x 05 L y el pasador 18 colocado en la unidad de transferencia A Die Transfereinheit A von vorn in den MFP einf hren und nach links schieben Die Einheit mit zwei TP Schrauben M3 x 05 L und dem an der Transfereinheit A angebrachten Stift 18 sichern Inserite nell MFP l unit di trasferimento A dal lato frontale e quindi fatela scorrere a sinistra Fissate l unit usando due viti TP M3 x 05 L e il perno 18 che avete inserito nell unit di trasferimento A JAMFP 4 LA9 Bil TATA ACA S
133. C9 on Toner level is not detected when toner connector termi the engine PWB and the continuity across empty is detected nals the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective toner Replace the toner container sensor container sensor C7400 Developing unit connector insertion Developing unit Reinsert the developing unit connector if problem connector inserted necessary Absence of the developing unit is incorrectly detected Defective develop Replace the developing unit ing unit connector C7410 Drum unit connector insertion prob Drum unit connec Reinsert the drum unit connector if neces lem tor inserted incor sary Absence of the drum unit is detected rectly Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit connector C7800 Broken external thermistor wire Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC14 on 1 4 32 The thermistor output value is 4 5 V or more connector termi nals the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective humidity sensor Replace the humidity sensor Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Short circuited external thermistor The thermistor input value is 0 5 V or less Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC14 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repa
134. CIDE XF LEI UE CONVEY SPEED LEE Ci 335877 AD o lt bY gt FOUN EI J CIS MAIN ADJ Ge hE Oa WERT XT SEHE i 4 2 EHR 41 5 Y FJ fll CIS SUB ADJ VERRA HIVIZ Uc RB RFS HTT o FAHD I Be G KPIR 41 5 Y a SERB DP SEE ERE EE RAR a OM 1 a c v7zmoim00 oecno dis4o 1 4wTFLxAe RU00 EvHhkU AE HAT AMO m A VIENE OA KO FIR CHIE AT CHET 2 ti gt KEDA CONVEY SPEED HIZE S7 I8 OREA TO EESHA 2 OL FTN 1 5 LIP HM OA CIS MAIN ADJ EMOA amp CIS SUB ADJ Bi dE ROG 3 OATH 1 5 LIP DAESH ORXIT 13 h 2 Adjust the values For the shorter length copy example f h Increases the value For the longer length copy example g i Decreases the value Amount of change per step 0 42 mm 3 Perform a test copy 2 R gler les valeurs Pour l exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus courte f h aug menter la valeur Pour l exemple de copie dont la longueur est plus longue g i dimi nuer la valeur Changement par graduation d chelle 0 42 mm 3 Effectuer une copie de test 2 Ajuste los valores Para el ejemplo de copia m s corto f h aumenta el valor Para el ejemplo de copia m s largo g i disminuye el valor Magnitud del cambio por incremento 0 42 mm 3 Haga una copia de prueba 2 Die Werte einstellen F r die k rzere Lange des
135. Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective eject motor Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the eject motor Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U030 and check if the eject motor oper ates If not replace the engine PWB 3 The scanner motor or cooling fan motor 1 to 13 does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Broken motor coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the motor 4 The upper lower paper feed clutch feed clutch 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch MP feed clutch reg istration clutch or duplex feed clutch does not operate Broken clutch coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the clutch Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U032 and check if following terminals on the engine PWB goes low If not replace the engine PWB Upper paper feed clutch YC14 B1 on the engine PWB Lower paper feed clutch YC14 B4 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 1 YC11 14 on the engine PWB Feed clu
136. Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division DIMM installed incorrectly DIMM is not installed correctly DIMM installed incorrectly Check if the DIMM is inserted into the socket on the main PWB correctly DIMM problem The DIMM on the main PWB does not operate correctly Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective DIMM Replace the DIMM and check for correct operation 1 4 23 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures DMA problem DMA transmission of compressed decompressed rotated relocated or blanked out image data does not com plete within the specified period of time Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Hard disk drive problem The hard disk cannot be accessed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC49 on the main PWB and the connector on the hard disk Repair or replace if necessary Defective hard disk Run U024 HDD formatting without turning the power off to initialize the hard disk Replace the hard disk drive and check for correct operation if the problem is still detected after initialization Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation CF error for backup Optional data backup kit CF is not suit able as backup
137. Die S chraube 25 von der linken R ckseite des MFP entfernen den Hebel 26 nach oben drehen und die Schraube 25 wieder in das untere Loch einpassen 14 R imuovete la vite 25 dal lato posteriore sinistro dell MFP girate la leva 26 verso l alto e inserite di nuovo la vite 25 nel foro inferiore 14 f FMFEP Xj LZ Je fili 1 22025 330 COLTE WR 22 25 ETE T WFL 14 MFP KREIDE A 25 1 RERI L 23 26 EA HE SAL FRONT BELA 25 ZRVI 15 15 15 15 15 15 FAR LA B oi PRIA B o Insert the intermediate tray B and connect the connector white 27 of the intermediate tray B to the transfer unit Connectthe connectors gray 28 to the connectors of the MFP as shown in the illustration Connectthe gray connector 28 with more pins to the upper connector and the gray connector 28 with less pins to the lower connector Ins rer le plateau interm diaire B et connecter le connecteur blanc 27 du plateau interm diaire B l unit de transfert Connecter les connecteurs gris 28 aux connecteurs du MFP comme montr dans l illustration Connecter le connecteur gris 28 avec le plus grand nombre de broches au connecteur Sup rieur et le connecteur gris 28 avec le plus petit nombre de broches au connecteur inf rieur Inserte la bandeja intermediaria B y conecte el c
138. E ADJUST DATA1 CHET 1 GNZ PANEL JHE ADJUST DATA3 ML BE CERTA XE 180 HE EJ Jit ADJUST DATAS CHER 5 180 HERE ES 1 AVFFYAE PUM EY hL ae YS VO IA TM 180 dI HET 2 Fri E maim OH OWA ADJUST DATAL Seii OMIA TO Hii OFM OBA ADJUST DATA3 Riim OMA TO 180 BER OYA ADJUST DATAS 180 EES ORI 247 n Do 15 Soo Adjust the values For the faster leading edge timing copy examples j Decreases the value For the slower leading edge timing copy examples k Increases the value Amount of change per step 0 17 mm Perform a test copy Repeat the steps 1 to 3 above until the gap of line 2 of copy example shows the reference value Reference value Vertical gap of line 2 within 2 5 mm R gler les valeurs Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est plus rapide j diminuer la valeur Pour les exemples de copie dont la synchronisation du bord avant est plus lente k augmenter la valeur Changement par graduation d chelle 0 17 mm Effectuer une copie de test R p ter les tapes 1 3 jusqu ce que l cart de la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie indique la valeur de r f rence Valeur de r f rence Ecart vertical de la ligne 2 2 5 mm Ajuste los valores Para una sincronizaci n m s r pida
139. EL Be sure to adjust in the following order If not the adjustment cannot be performed correctly For the adjustment of DP oblique position see page 10 Reference value Single copying within 3 mm Duplex copying within 4 mm For the adjustment of DP original size see page 13 Reference value within 1 5 For the adjustment of DP leading edge timing see page 15 Reference value within 2 5 mm For the adjustment of DP original center line see page 17 Reference value Single copying 2 mm Duplex copying within 3 mm When using the DP auto adjusting original automatic adjustments excluding the DP oblique position adjustment can be performed For the adjustments using DP auto adjusting original see page 20 Veiller effectuer les r glages dans l ordre suivant Si ce n est pas le cas ils ne seront pas effectu s correctement Pour le r glage de la position oblique du DP voir la page 10 Valeur de r f rence Copie recto 3 mm Copie recto verso 4 mm O Pour le r glage du format d original du DP voir la page 13 Valeur de r f rence 1 5 O Pour le r glage de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP voir la page 15 Valeur de r f rence 2 5 mm Pour le r glage de l axe de l original du DP voir la page 17 Valeur de r f rence Copie recto 2 mm Copie recto verso 3 mm En cas d utilisation d
140. ER REGIST 302FG06211 2FG06211 5 51 Feed pulley PULLEY FEED 2BL16080 6 7 47 19 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED A 302GR06010 2GR06010 5 72 Feed roller 1 PULLEY MIDDLE FEED B 302GR06020 2GR06020 5 73 Feed roller 2 ROLLER B FEED 302BL06081 2BL06081 5 22 Feed roller 3 ROLLER C FEED 302BL06091 2BL06091 5 23 Registration switch SWITCH REGISTRATION 2FG27110 5 46 Left registration cleaner UNDER CLEANER REGIST 2BL07950 7 15 Registration guide GUIDE REGIST F 2BL16130 7 22 Right registration cleaner PARTS REGISTRATION CLEAN 2BL93450 5 44 Laser scanner unit LK 710 302GR93090 2GR93090 13 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS M ASSY 302GR93310 2GR93310 10 1 Platen PARTS CONTACT GLASS I ASSY 302GR93320 2GR93320 10 Slit glass PARTS CONTACT GLASS DP ASSY 302GR94380 2GR94380 10 2 Mirror 1 MIRROR A 2FB12140 9 25 Mirror 2 and mirror 3 MIRROR B 302GR17280 2GR17280 9 17 Reflector REFLECTOR SCANNER 302GR17250 2GR17250 9 27 Exposure lamp PARTS LAMP SCANNER SP 302GR94330 2GR94330 9 32 Original size detection switch SENSOR ORIGINAL 2C927090 9 44 Transfer roller unit TR 710 302GR93280 2GR93280 7 A02 Developing unit DV 715 302GR93030 2GR93030 14 1 Drum unit DK 715 30 ppm 302GN93010 2GN93010 16 A01 Drum unit DK 716 40 50 ppm 302GR93040 2GR93040 16 A01 Main charger unit MC 710 302GR93070 2GR93070 16 13 Drum separation claw PARTS CLAW SEPARATION ASSY 302GR93190 2GR93190 16 14 Fuser unit FK 715 U 302GR93050 2GR93050 15 A01 Fuser
141. ET D 1RII TT 28 LERAOBWH ERZ do Ze v2 FI T m 16 Hang the right and left pins MFP and the transfer unit A Raise the intermediate tray B and setitas shown in the illustration 29 of the intermediate tray B on the recessed portions 30 ofthe 16 Accrocher les goupilles droite et gauche 29 du plateau interm diaire B sur les parties en retrait 30 du MFP etde l unit de transfert A Elever le plateau interm diaire B et le placer comme indiqu sur l illustration 16 Cuelgue los pasadores derecho e izquierdo 29 de a bandeja intermediaria B en las partes entradas 30 del MFP y la unidad de transferencia A Suba la bandeja intermediaria B y fije tal como aparece en la figura 16 Den rechten und linken Stift 29 der Zwischenablage B in die Aussparungen 30 des MFP und der Transfereinheit A einhangen Die Zwischenablage B anheben und gem der Abbildung einstellen 16 Appendete i perni destro e sinistro 29 del vassoio intermedio B sulle parti rientranti 30 dell MFP e dell unit di trasferimento A Sollevate il vassoio intermedio B e regolatelo come illustrato in figura 16 E rp RT TE AEB BU A R10 9 FE EAR PRAG AI GO E PRA EE MAA ng 16 PRI NL B DEADE 29 KRB k OW Y b A oma 30 CHOBITS RU Ve B RO EW MOE DICE Y TS 17 Fitthe large e
142. Fuser heater break Fuser thermistor 1 is detected 40 C 104 F below with 10 s continuously dur ing warm up and ready in Defective fuser heater M or S Replace the fuser heater M or S Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermostat Replace the fuser thermostat Defective PWB Replace the power source PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Abnormally high fuser thermistor temperature Fuser thermistor 1 or 2 is detected 230 C 446 F or more for 40 ms Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 or 2 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Fuser thermistor break error The thermistor break signal is detected continuously for 500 ms Installation defec tiveness on fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Check the mounting state of the fuser ther mistor 1 or 2 If any problem is found repair it Defective fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Replace the fuser thermistor 1 or 2 Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 31 2GN 2GP 2GR
143. H fe PRIN E E 0 17mm BEAT MR ED HS LR 1 283 RRA 0 2 AST HEAL lt PER gt fk 2 SERIO 2 5mm Y BET WET o FAA LY IBA AE FAT BUENA RI Fut TUT BRIERE ACH k EA EU LAF vy 7470 OB ES 0 17mm OTAMBA R AEM YT NOR 2 OF HBIMBA C78 SE CHIL 3 EO IT lt i gt 02 DEFEN 2 5mm LAA 16 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm Checking the DP original center line 1 Check the gap between center line 1 on original a and center line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value adjust the gap according to the following procedure lt Reference value gt Horizontal difference of center line 2 for the single copying 2 mm Horizontal difference of center line 2 for the duplex copying 3 mm V rification de l axe de l original du DP 1 V rifier l cart entre l axe 1 de l original a et l axe 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart exc de la valeur de r f rence le r gler selon la proc dure suivante Valeur de r f rence Diff rence horizontale de l axe 2 pour la copie recto 2 mm Diff rence horizontale de l axe 2 pour la copie recto verso 3 mm Verificaci n de la l nea de centro del original del DP 1 Compruebe la separaci n entre la l nea de centro 1 del original a y la l nea de centro 2 del ejemplo d
144. LIVE 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC AC power input AC power input AC power output AC power input Connected to the engine PWB 24VDR GND GND GND 3 3VD 5VD 24VD 24 V DC 3 3 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC 24 V DC power output Ground Ground Ground 3 3 V DC power output 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output Connected to the engine PWB GND FH S ON FH M ON 5VD ZCROSS CFM3 4 0 5 V DC 5V DC 5V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC Ground FH S On Off FH M On Off 5 V DC power output Zero cross signal CFM3 4 On Off Connected to the optional document finisher SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND SGND Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground Ground YC4 Connected to the cool ing fan motor 3 4 N Alo a A Y N AID 0 SWN HAIN DOO Bb ON gt CFM3 4 24VD DCOV 24V 24V DC CFM3 4 On Off 24 V DC power output YC5 Connected to the fuser heater M S 2 3 2 FH M ON FH S ON FH LIVE 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 0 V AC 220 240 0 V AC 120 V AC 220 240 V AC FH M On Off FH S On Off AC power output Connector Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC6 Connected to the scan ner PWB Connected to the optional cassette heater Connected to the optional paper feeder optional document finisher and hard disk Connected to the main operation
145. NA A AE I 20 5 MFP Fo EAS PREDER GO lU 8 Je fao f ZR s RC A Es a N Da BE AJLOREU HIT 100V HERRIA 19 RANS V XE 23 0 7 Uv ERT VA viti Do 20 MFP A R Ze HEAT 6 HO Hilo ERED v G 70 Etc REO AIFS Bd a Adhere the caution label Remove original except for 100 V models 21 Clean the label surface of the original deliv ery table with alcohol 22 Adhere caution label Remove original H of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP on to the label of the original delivery table Figure b Coller l tiquette d avertissement rela tive au retrait de l original sauf pour les mod les 100 V 21 Nettoyer la surface de l tiquette du plateau de sortie d original avec de l alcool 22 Coller l tiquette d avertissement relative au retrait de l original H dans la langue corres pondant la destination du MFP sur l tiquette du plateau de sortie d original Figure b Pegue la etiqueta de precauci n Reti rar original excepto para los mode los de 100 V 21 Limpie con alcohol la superficie de etiquetas de la cubierta de originales 22 Pegue la etiqueta de precauci n Retirar ori ginal H del idioma correspondiente al des tino del MFP sobre la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales Figura b Anbringen des Warnschildes Original entfernen aufer 100 V Modelle 21 Die Sc
146. O LEES via r l e z cc 6 6 6 i DZ sfs F a al 8 amp a ES ANOS Fr 130 DUI eralera ASSN amp al 9 9 la z ee ee ee es ZO CO aaa lalola al lol z S S As s EE UNO zia zia ama ollo Solo amp loltic a al fol leleel lalalala ela ze ze ze ze LE Er EBEEEPEDERESEEENE NE SEES ela 7 ele n eS ER Has s graas az ERE SERA SORA pel je n FE i no saves gt Ste orajora ve ve a 9 e iz Ias 6 6 ea 8 riotnonco cune ransosonoo grite te NOS z gt Ls z 35 op Or sa eg Seno PAD Ea 9v ELE E or ys LR 18 za ERST ES rr a az ie ue ve 1 98 98 NOS gt fz sa sa os oe oe oe an 1 er m 6z e ez 67 a sz ez L 31 ta z z aL tal ta lo va va zz zz anos FAPA Q st erajora O eg es Di sz sz EY sz 92 5 z value anos sralzra Si Q sia zia za za wo Q EI aa E g sa re o c a EZ El a UIAH Fo ez Ez 5 al ce E 11 z 2 ty iv viv viv w e Lu d a anos Kia E or gt zv ev ervje ISS gt 8 Z z oz oz ea cT o 6 ev ev zv nv VOI E lt lebe Hal Ren gt EN www nv nv RNC ashe n sr Ts Lal a x z E ov sv on jor I La anos a E 9 Lo a ov 9v 6v 6v O Fr sr o Es E s z Iv uv sv ev to E v ev 8v Iv av 2 st st sr Nave HIS 9 SIA Le e a sv ev O or e TNS vi vi TOJGdW ler _anos z oiv ory 9v 9v E s e eo enfer sanar PO fer 9 i Saar OE sv sv Y
147. P I m 17 2mm 3mm 2mm 3mm Adjusting the DP original center line 1 Set the maintenance mode U072 and adjust the copy example for each of single duplex and 180 degree rotation copying respectively For the single copying or the surface of the duplex copying adjusts the ADJUST DATA1 surface For the rear side of the duplex copying adjusts the ADJUST DATA2 rear side For the 180 degree rotation copying adjusts the ADJUST DATAS 180 degree rotation aa de l axe de l original du DP Ex cuter le mode d entretien U072 et r gler l exemple de copie pour la copie recto la copie recto verso et la copie avec rotation de 180 degr s res pectivement Pour la copie recto ou la surface de la copie recto verso r gler ADJUST DATA1 r gler donn es1 surface Pour le verso de la copie recto verso r gler ADJUST DATA2 r gler donn es2 verso Pour la copie avec rotation de 180 degr s r gler ADJUST DATAS r gler donn es3 rotation de 180 degr s Ajuste de la l nea de centro del original del DP 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento U072 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado por una cara para el copiado duplex y para el copiado con giro de 180 grados respectivamente Para el copiado por una cara o para el anverso en el copiado d plex ajuste ADJUST DATA ajustar dato
148. P M3 x 05 L Instale el cable 23 para ubicarlos debajo de los herrajes de metal 24 13 Den Haken 20 und das Loch 22 der Transfereinheit A in das Langloch 19 und den Vorsprung 21 des MFP Rahmens einpassen und die Einheit mit einer TP Schraube M3 x 05 L sichern Das Kabel 23 unter den Metallbeschl gen 24 hindurchf hren 13 Inserite il gancio 20 e il foro 22 dell unit di trasferimento A nel foro oblungo 19 e nella sporgenza 21 del telaio dell MFP e assicurate l unit usando una vite TP M3 x 05 L Disponete il cavo 23 in modo da farlo scorrere al di sotto del supporto metallico 24 13 KME F A E ROO RIH LZ HE MFP EARL AMERO DE ER Hi FAI 22M3 x 0STPD ETT SL x H 2 23 MEA 24 AY FI re E 13 Xx HF Oo7 Z7 20 ER 22 Ze MP REZ LA ADER 19 eE 21 Cd CHO Hit EA M3 X 05TP L 1 KTHET S ERR 23 AGAR 24 D FZZ 5c BUR 2 2 E 14 R emove the screw 25 from the left rear side of the MFP turn the lever 26 upward and fitthe screw 25 again to the lower hole 14 Enlever la vis 25 du c t arri re gauche du MFP tourner le levier 26 vers le haut et replacer la vis 25 dans l orifice inf rieur 14 S aque el tornillo 25 del lado trasero del MFP mueva la palanca 26 hacia arriba y fije el tornillo 25 de nuevo en el orificio inferior 14
149. PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 46 A paper jam in optional built in fin isher is indicated dur ing copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 96 Defective intermediate tray sensor With 5 V DC present at YC3 1 on the finisher control PWB check if YC3 2 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the intermediate tray sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the intermediate tray sensor 1 4 21 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 2 Self diagnosis 1 Self diagnostic function This unit is equipped with a self diagnostic function When a problem is detected copying is disabled and the problem dis played as a code consisting of C followed by a number indicating the nature of the problem A message is also displayed requesting the user to call for service After removing the problem the self diagnostic function can be reset by turning safety switches off and back on List of system errors When an unexpected error is detected for some reason a system error will be indicated After a system error is indicated the error can be cleared by turning the main power switch off and then on If the error is detected continuously however perform the operation shown in Table 1 4 1 If a system error occurs frequently a fault may have occurred Check the details of the C call to take proper measures System error Contents Operation 0800 Image processing problem Sys
150. PWB ROM IC Engine PWB booting Scanner PWB ROM IC Optional language ROM IC Optional DP main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional paper feeder main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet document finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional 3000 sheet document finisher internal tray PWB ROM IC Optional centerfold main PWB ROM IC Optional mail box main PWB ROM IC Optional built in finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional document sheet finisher main PWB ROM IC Optional fax control PWB booting Optional fax control PWB APL Optional fax control PWB IPL Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 13 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U020 1 3 14 Initializing all data Description Initializes all the backup RAM on the main PWB to return to the original settings Refer to 1 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 3 Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialized Turn the main power switch off and on If initialization error occurs an error code is displayed If ERROR 09 occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and
151. Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the developing drive time Description Displays the developing drive time for checking or clearing a figure which is used as a reference when cor recting the toner control Purpose To check the developing drive time after replacing the developing unit Method Press the start key The developing drive time is displayed in minutes Clearing 1 Press the clear key 2 Press the start key The time is cleared Setting 1 Enter a drive time in minutes using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The time is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 41 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U158 Checking the developing count Description Displays the developing count for checking Purpose To check the developing count after replacing the developing unit Method Press the start key The developing counter count is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the fuser control temperature Description Changes the fuser control temperature Purpose Normally no change is necessary However can be used to prevent curling or creasing of paper or solve a fuser problem on thick paper
152. R 12 Hook the round terminals onto the catches inside of the scanner unit 1 13 Loop the scanner wires around the outer grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to above 2 14 Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit right winding from above to below 3 15 Wind the scanner wires around the scanner wire drum five turns from the rear toward the hole in the drum 4 16 Insert the locating ball on the scanner wire into the hole in the scanner wire drum 5 17 Wind the scanner wires three turns from the inner toward the hole in the drum 6 18 Install the scanner wire stoppers to the scanner wire drum to fix the wires 7 19 Loop the scanner wire around the groove in the scanner wire pulley at the scanner unit left winding from below to above 8 20 Loop the scanner wires around the inner grooves in the pulleys on the mirror 2 frame winding from below to above 9 21 Hook the scanner wires around the scanner wire guides at the machine left 10 22 Hook the round terminal onto the scanner wire spring 11 Five turns from Five turns from the rear toward the rear toward AX Locating ball Me xL Three turns from Three turns from the inner toward the inner toward 6 6 Figure 1 5 35 1 5 16 23 24 25 26 Move the mirror 1 and 2 frames to the 27 28 29 30 Remove the two scann
153. R 1a ERROR 1b ERROR 2X ERROR 3X ERROR 4X ERROR 5X ERROR 6X ERROR 7X ERROR 8X ERROR 9X ERROR aX ERROR bX ERROR cX ERROR dX ERROR eX ERROR fX ERROR ff Black band detection error scanner leading edge registration Black band detection error scanner center line Black band detection error scanner main scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected scanner leading edge registration Black band is not detected scanner center line Black band is not detected scanner main scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected scanner auxiliary scanning direction magnification Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification far end Black band is not detected DP main scanning direction magnification near end Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction magnification leading edge original check Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge Black band is not detected DP auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge 2 DMA time out Auxiliary scanning direction magnification error Auxiliary scanning direction leading edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction trailing edge detection error Auxiliary scanning direction skew 1 5 error Maintenance request error Main scanning direction center line error Main scanning direction skew 1 5 error Main scan
154. RAY SAA 3 BRE I ELEDE ila FABIA E ik B HATS Va TENL A D2P23 75 2 Z Vater yi 3 35 ATIC RR UR L T LED Jk B O 2P 2472 1 CRETA 2 Open the left transfer cover and the front cover 3 Remove the staple holder 4 remove the two screws 5 from the upper side and the front side and loosen the two screws 6 on the left side couvercle avant 3 Retirer le support d agrafes 4 retirer les deux vis 5 du c t sup rieur et du c t avant et desserrer les deux vis 6 du c t gauche la cubierta frontal 3 Desmonte el soporte de grapas 4 saque los dos tornillos 5 del lado superior y el lado delantero y afloje los dos tornillos 6 en el lado izquierdo 2 Die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung ffnen 3 Den Heftklammerhalter 4 entfernen die zwei Schrauben 5 an der Ober und Vorderseite herausdrehen und die zwei Schrauben 6 auf der linken Seite l sen 2 Aprite il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale 3 Rimuovete il vassoio graffette 4 rimuovete le due viti 5 dal lato superiore e dal lato frontale e allentate le due viti 6 sul lato sinistro 2 3TJTA 3X Zc s BUR RI m 3 Jg PR BET x O AP LATE DU 1 2 2 5 PEPE RSIS Me ZZ 6 HALA 753 358 J Oft o 23 E BRUT s WIN ATTINENI 4 ROHL El LUDER 5 Z4 LC filo EA 6 244050
155. RDAD OE 74 HaT D eWOUfIg25 23 Ft7r24Fkavl b 4 2 HEL ES 3 6 Connect the MFP to the separate phone 6 Plug the separate phone line with the ferrite core D into the line terminal and then con nect the line terminal to the separate phone line If you don t connect the MFP to the sep arate phone wipe the surface of the tele phone terminal with alcohol and adhere the terminal seal C Connecter le MFP au t l phone s par 6 Brancher la ligne de t l phone s par avec le noyau de ferrite D la borne de la ligne puis connecter la borne de la ligne la ligne de t l phone s par Si le MFP n est pas connect au t l phone s par nettoyer la surface de la borne de t l phone avec de l alcool et apposer le joint de borne C Conecte el MFP al tel fono separado 6 Enchufe la l nea del tel fono separado con el n cleo de ferrita D en el terminal de l nea y seguidamente conecte el terminal de l nea a la l nea del tel fono separado Si no conecta el MFP a un tel fono separado lim pie la superficie del terminal telef nico con alcohol y pegue el sello del terminal C AnschlieBen des MFP an das separate Telefon 6 Das Kabel des separaten Telefons mit dem Fer ritkern D in die Ger tebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Dose f r das separate Telefon anschlie en Wenn der MFP nicht an das sepa rate Telefon angeschlossen wird die Oberfl che der Telefonbuchse m
156. S 23 RIT 7 MO 7 V Le VaR TS 24 MFP ATK EET SEO SICA o TRA AJ AW 1 BARVO RZY HIF 5 c De DI Operation check 1 To check the machine operation prepare original a where 4 lines b are drawn 20 mm from the edges of the A3 sheet and 1 line c is drawn at its center 2 Connect the power plug of the MFP into the wall outlet and turn the main power on 3 Set the original a on the DP and perform a test copy to check the operation and the copy example 4 Compare original a with the copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value perform the following adjustments according to the type of the gap Check images of the DP after checking and adjusting images of the MFP For details see the service manual V rification du fonctionnement 1 Pour v rifier le bon fonctionnement de l appareil pr parer un original a sur lequel sont trac es 4 lignes b 20 mm des bords de la feuille A3 et 1 ligne c en son axe 2 Brancher la fiche d alimentation du MFP sur la prise murale et mettre l appareil sous tension 3 Placer l original a sur le DP et effectuer une copie de test pour v rifier le fonctionnement et l exemple de copie 4 Comparer l original a avec l exemple de copie Si l cart exc de la valeur de r f rence effectuer les r glages suivants en fonction du type d cart V rifier les images du DP apres avoir contr l et r
157. Scanning Speed 1 sided monochrome 50 sheets min Color 25 sheets min 2 sided monochrome 25 sheets min Color 12 5 sheets min NOTE These specifications are subject to change without notice 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 2 Parts names 1 Machine 1 Original cover Option 2 Original size indicator plates 3 Clip holder 4 Reception indicator 5 Error indicator 6 Left cover 1 7 Leftcover 1 Lever 8 Leftcover2 Platen 10 Operation panel 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 qo Figure 1 1 1 Toner container Toner container stopper Waste toner box Front cover Paper width adjusting tab Length adjustment plate Top tray Main power switch Paper width guides Multi purpose tray Memory card cover holder Handles USB memory slot A2 USB memory slot A3 Memory card slot Network interface connector USB interface connector Parallel interface connector Option interface slot OPT1 Option interface slot OPT2 USB memory slot A1 Green knob A1 Paper feed unit A2 Paper feed unit cover A2 2 Operation panel 4 2GN 2GP 2GR 17 18 System Menu Counter ES C AT Som SS Il Ld i Help Sede Al o D O Saus Copy se eu OOOO Mr Program Send DOO m ean es Start 9 Applica
158. T1 e fissare la scheda con le due viti 1 rimosse nell operazione 1 Rivolgere l etichetta 3 sulla scheda a circuiti FAX verso il lato destro e inse rire la scheda lungo l incavo Non toccare il terminale della scheda a circuiti FAX Per inserire il circuito FAX tenere l estremit superiore e la base della scheda a circuiti FAX o la sporgenza della scheda a circuiti FAX Non inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX nell OPT2 ZUR AL RIN 2 4 OPT1 ANA Pr PERPE A HAR 1 Rik AIRES 1 AERE BHR SiS 3 METE RARE FAM REA BRT TERRIER E RT ER RAR AIN AD Sie RB PARES SEU EA BIBBIA FERRE A GEA OPT2 FAX EROR Y 4417 2 OPTI ORIO C FAX d A ARA L PIEL CHALE CA 1 2 4 CHEF De FAX RIA BAU TIF ENTWSIAIL 3 AMIA HATS OE FAX E RO tin MNAO E FAX BIR OPARILERO ER DRAB Ce OPT2 124 FAX SEAM A FHA LARE E rm 2005 12 303KH56710 Rev 1 0 Install the ferrite core only 230 V model 3 Install the ferrite core D onto the modular connecter cable Be sure to loop the cord three times through the ferrite core Make a gap of 30 mm 10 mm between the ferrite core and the terminal Installer le noyau de ferrite mod le 230 V 3 Installer le noyau de ferrite D dans le c ble du connecteur modulaire Veiller enrouler trois fois le cordon autour du noyau de ferrite Un cart de 30 mm 10 mm entre le noyau de ferrite et
159. TEST 1 NON P Without paper TEST2 With paper 100 to 200 96 5 Press the start key The operation starts 6 To stop continuous operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the presence or absence of a key card or key counter Description Sets the presence or absence of the optional key card or key counter Purpose To run this maintenance item if a key card or key counter is installed Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description KEY DEVICE Sets the presence or absence of the key card or key counter MESSAGE Sets the message when optional equipment is not installed Setting KEY DEVICE 1 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON The key card or the key counter is installed OFF Not installed 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Setting MESSAGE 1 Select the COUNTER CARD or COIN 2 Press the start key The setting is set 3 Turn the main power switch off and on Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 44 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U206 Setting the presence or absence of the coin vender Description Sets the presence or absence of the
160. The specified initial settings are provided according to the destinations in the maintenance items below To change the initial settings in those items be sure to run maintenance item U021 after changing the destina tion Initial setting according to the destinations Maintenance Title Japan Inch Europe Metric item No Asia Pacific 208 Setting the paper size for the paper A4 Letter A4 feeder 253 Switching between double and single Single Double Double counts Switching between double and single counts Description Switches the count system for the total counter and other counters Purpose Used to select according to the preference of the user copy service provider if A3 Ledger paper is to be counted as one sheet single count or two sheets double count Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select double or single count Display Description SINGLE COUNT Single count for all size paper DBL CNT A3 LGR Double count for A3 Ledger size or larger DBL COUNT B4 Double count for B4 size or larger Initial setting DBL CNT A3 LGR 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 59 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U260 Selecting the timing for copy counting Description Changes the copy count timing for the total counter and other counters Purpose To be
161. USBi lt td 1 Pr cautions avant l activation L activation du kit de s curit des donn es supprime toutes les donn es enregistr es sur le disque dur par le client Avant l activation v rifier avec le client si les donn es peuvent tre supprim es Veiller mettre l interrupteur principal de l appareil hors tension Proc dure d activation 1 Ins rer la cl USB dans l emplacement de m moire USB de l appareil et mettre l interrupteur principal sous tension voir illustration A 2 Lorsque l cran d accueil s ouvre le message L installation du Kit de s curit va commencer s affiche Appuyer sur OK o principal hors tension 4 Mettre l interrupteur principal sous tension L cran de saisie du code de cryptage s affiche Demander au client de changer le code de cryptage L utilisation de la valeur par d faut du code de cryptage 000000 n affecte pas la fiabilit de la s curit des donn es Si le client d sire changer le code prier le client d effectuer les op rations suivantes Appuyer sur Code de cryptage Appuyer sur Retour arri re pour effacer 000000 Entrer le code de cryptage caract res alphanum riques de 6 chiffres puis appuyer sur OK Rappeler au client de bien se souvenir du code de cryptage entr m Appuyer sur OK Le formatage du disque dur commence o Lorsque le formatage est termin suivre les instructions l cran pour mettre l interrupteur principal ho
162. V DC power output Ground LICSW L On Off 5 V DC power output Ground PSW L On Off 5 V DC power output Connector Signal Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC14 Connected to the feed shift sole noid feedshift Switch eject Switch cool ing fan motor 5 left cover 1 Switch upper lower paper feed clutches humidity sensor eject motor FSSOL2 FSSOL1 24VDR GND FSSW 5VD GND NC 5VD GND ESW 5VD CFM5 GND GND LC1SW PFCL U 24VDR 24VDR PFCL L 24VDR RCL 3VD HUMS GND THOUT EM B EMB EM A EMA NC NC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 3 8 V DC 0to5 V DC 0 to 5V DC 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse 0 24 V DC pulse FSSOL On Off return FSSOL On Off activate 24 V DC power output Ground FSSW On Off 5 V DC power output Ground Not used 5 V DC power output Ground ESW On Off 5 V DC power output CFM5 On Off Ground Ground LC1SW On Off PFCL U On Off 24 V DC power output 24 V DC power output PFCL L On Off 24 V DC power output RCL On Off 3 3 V DC power output HUMS detection voltage signal Ground Thermistor detection voltage signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal EM drive control signal Not used Not used Connected to the total counter optional key card and
163. WB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Polygon motor steady state problem The polygon motor rotation is not stable for 20 s after the polygon motor rotation has been stabilized Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation BD steady state problem ASIC detects a BD error A for 2 s after the polygon motor rotation has been sta bilized Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective laser scanner unit Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Broken cleaning lamp wire While the cleaning lamp is on the bro ken cleaning lamp wire detection signal is detected for 2 s continuously Defective cleaning lamp Replace the cleaning lamp Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation
164. a 0 Ii ALAN ON A GND 5VD PFSEL PFSCLK PFSDI PFSDO PFRDY PFFEED 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC Ground 5 V DC power output Paper feeder SELECT signal Paper feeder CLOCK signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder serial communication data signal Paper feeder READY signal Paper feeder FEED signal Connected to the MP unit waste toner box detection switch over flow sensor front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1 2 2 3 6 gt rrrrrrese ey 0 06 0 GO A W N a MPPWSWO MPPWSW1 MPPWSW2 GND 5VD MPPSW GND 24VDR MPPFCL 24VDR MPFCL NC GND CFM2 5VD 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 5 VDC 0 5 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 24V DC 0 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 5 VDC MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off MPPWSW On Off Ground 5 V DC power output MPPSW On Off Ground 24 V DC power output MPPFCL On Off 24 V DC power output MPFCL On Off Not used Ground CFM2 On Off 5 V DC power output Connector Signal Voltage 2GN 2GP 2GR Description YC6 Connected to the MP unit waste toner box detection switch over flow sensor front cover switch and cooling fan motor 1 2 WTDSW GND OFS GND FRCSW GND CFM1 GND 5VD MPPLSW GND 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC WTDSW On Off Ground OFS On Off Ground FRCSW On Off Ground CFM1 On Off Ground
165. acing the consumable parts Method Press the start key The counts by paper feed locations are displayed Display Paper feed locations MP TRAY MP tray CASSETTE 1 Cassette 1 CASSETTE2 Cassette 2 CASSETTE 3 Optional cassette 3 CASSETTE 4 Optional cassette 4 LCF Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder DUPLEX Duplex section When an optional paper feed device is not installed the corresponding count is not displayed Clearing 1 Select the count to be cleared 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 74 Checking clearing the punch hole scrap counter Description To set the punch limit display and clear the punch counter of optional 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To set the maximum number of punches possible in order to instruct the user of the time to replace punch waste Also used to manually clear the punch hole scrap count if a message requiring collection of punch hole scrap is shown on the touch panel after collection If punch hole scrap is collected with the machine power turned off the punch hole scrap count is not cleared and consequently this problem occurs Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description Setting range Initial setting PUNCH LIMIT The maximum number of punches 0 to 999000 35000 maximum number of punching times PUNCH COUNT Punch hole scrap count
166. adjustment home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed When adjustment operation starts the ON status of the adjustment home posi tion sensor is not detected The adjustment motor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective adjust ment motor Replace adjustment motor The adjustment home position sen sor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective adjust ment home posi tion sensor Replace the adjustment home position sen sor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher front side registration motor problem optional built in finisher When the front side registration home position sensor is turned on during initial ization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the front side registration home position sensor is turned off during initial ization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The front side reg istration motor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective front side registration motor Re
167. aintenance item No Description U051 1 3 20 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper Description Adjusts the amount of slack in the paper Purpose Make the adjustment if the leading edge of the copy image is missing or varies randomly or if the copy paper is Z folded Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial range setting MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 30 to 20 0 CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette 30 to 20 0 DUPLEX Duplex mode second 30 to 20 0 MP TRAY THICK Paper feed from MP tray thick paper 30 to 20 0 Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 increase the value For output example 2 decrease the value The greater the value the larger the amount of slack the smaller the value the smaller the amount of slack Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 6 7 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U053 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Description Performs fine adjustment of the speeds of the motors Purpose To adjust the speed of the respective motors when the magnification is not co
168. aintenance U600 pour initialiser l ensemble de commande de fax Pour plus de d tails se reporter au manuel d entretien Verifique el funcionamiento 1 Conecte el MFP a un recept culo de pared y encienda el interruptor principal 2 Ejecute el modo de mantenimiento U600 para inicializar el conjunto de control de fax Para m s detalles lea el manual de servicio Betriebspr fung 1 Netzstecker des MFP in eine Steckdose ste cken und Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Wartungsmodus U600 ausf hren um die Faxsteuerbaugruppe zu initialisieren Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanlei tung Verifica del funzionamento 1 Collegare MFP ad una presa di corrente e portare l interruttore principale su On 2 Eseguire il modo di manutenzione U600 per inizializzare il gruppo di controllo fax Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni RIEN 1 43 MFP RA SES TTE HE RR 2 HUT SEA U600 375815 fe AER Bf BAPE IIS PNE MFP APROBAR hz WAR A WA YF ON ICTS 2 RYT HAZE F U600 PEG L FAX FEAR ZIET 5 SEMI CAZA TFT MABMO ZE DUI 2005 12 303KH56710 Rev 1 0 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR Data Security Kit C 303KP56710 Data Security Kit C Installation Guide For MFP Models Guide d installation du kit de s curit des donn es C pour les mod les MFP Guia de instalaci n del Kit de seguridad C para los modelos MFP Frangais Pi ces fournies GCIS
169. aire de la ligne de t l phone avec le noyau de ferrite D la borne de la ligne puis connec ter la borne de la ligne la ligne de t l phone Pour le mod le 120 V utiliser le cable du connecteur modulaire B fourni Conecte el MFP a la l nea telef nica 4 Enchufe el cable conector modular de la l nea telef nica con el nucleo de ferrita D en el terminal de l nea y seguidamente conecte el terminal de l nea a la l nea telef nica Para el modelo de 120 V utilice el cable conector modular B suministrado AnschlieBen des MFP an die Telefon leitung 4 Telefonmodulkabel mit dem Ferritkern D in die Ger tebuchse einstecken und das Kabel an der Telefondose anschlie en F r das 120 V Modell ist das mitgelieferte Modulkabel B zu verwenden Collegamento dell MFP alla linea del telefono 4 Inserire il cavo connettore modulare della linea del telefono con il nucleo di ferrite D nel terminale della linea quindi collegare il terminale della linea alla linea del telefono Per i modelli da 120 V utilizzare il cavo con nettore modulare B in dotazione 4 MFP 23 iR ZR 4 FERE ki D ERI Risk i A Fi Zum T FRR Bid FIERI RE WF 120V 25 BEA M RS TE Zx B ZERO 4 74 PR 5 DEY a 7 a FO07x24 hav D 2350 HIS a EROS Bie 120V f Km EOEV27 2F B fEATSO SE 30 10 mm Install the ferrite core telephone line
170. all for service C0700 occurs Also to restore data when the hard disk has been damaged Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description INITIALIZE CF Initializes the data backup kit CF and backs up the job accounting data in the hard disk into the data backup kit CF FAX IMAGE Prints the fax reception data backed up in the data backup kit CF JOB ACCOUNTING Restores the job accounting data stored in the data backup kit CF to the hard disk 3 Press the start key The selected item is executed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 78 Relay board maintenance Description Sets the machine status temporarily when call for service C0060 occurs However after the setting call for service C0060 occurs again when progress of period Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item Display Description MODE 0 Setting mode OFF MODE 1 Setting mode ON Usable up to three times of use Initial setting MODE 0 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement After removing the cause of the problem be sure to change the setting in OFF Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U942 Setting of amount of slack for feeding from DP Description Adjusts the amount of slack generated when the optional DP is used Purpose Use this mode
171. alor de referencia gt Para la direcci n de exploraci n secundaria separaci n vertical de la l nea 2 dentro de 1 5 Para la direcci n de exploraci n principal separaci n horizontal de la l nea 3 dentro de 1 5 Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Hauptscanrichtung Horizontaler Abstand der Linie 3 Innerhalb 1 5 Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando lo scosta mento della linea 2 3 dell esempio di copia riporter i valori di riferi mento lt Valore di riferimento gt Per l orientamento della scansione ausiliare lo scostamento verticale della linea 2 deve essere compreso fra 1 5 Per l orientamento della scansione principale lo scostamento orizzon tale della linea 3 deve essere compreso fra 1 5 LIES LAA 3 BAIS ERE A End 2 3 f FRU B PEL lt xiii gt FRI IA k 2 WEHR 1 5 p FESR m Be G KERR 41 5 p IEH TINO 2 3 OP AAMC RA ETFI 3 MO IT lt HU gt El ERAMOYS 2 DER Fi 1 5 LAP ATT AIDA BS DEETAN 1 5 DIP ear any the DP leading edge timing Check the gap between line 1 on origi
172. als Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 1 Replace paper feeder lift motor 1 Defective paper feeder lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 1 Defective paper feeder lift switch 1 Check if YC1 5 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift Switch 1 Paper feeder lift motor 2 error optional paper feeder When optional cassette 4 is inserted paper feeder lift switch 2 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of paper feeder lift motor 2 Replace paper feeder lift motor 2 Defective paper feeder lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 2 Defective paper feeder lift switch 2 Check if YC1 7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift Switch 2 Paper feeder lift motor 1 error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder A motor over current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer Poor contact in
173. and 18 nach oben ber das Kontaktglas legen Die Ecke der Originalmatte B deren Oberfl che nicht ausgeschnitten ist mit der linken inneren Kante des Originalbedienfeldes ausrich ten 18 Den DP A schlieBen und die Originalmatte B mit dem Klettband auf ihm befestigen Fissaggio del tappetino originale 17 Posizionare il tappetino originale B con il velcro 18 rivolto verso l alto sul vetro di appoggio Allineare l angolo del tappetino originale B non tagliato in superficie con l angolo interno sinistro del pannello di controllo originale 18 Chiudere il DP A e applicarvi il tappetino originale B con il velcro 5 xe Jo fis 17 Ae B CER Hr BOR E EAE EE 18 I8 E Tek UI Sae RE B WAVER f AL Raz 18 XRB DP A JF ENTER oa B RAEE En rav y KORY It 17 ivo h B 4 777177 18 EIT CY A RHA LEE rac y h B IE F20NTUELAERAETRO LR IAhbt cito 18 DP ASK A FAL Jazz v HF B amp DP ASK A CREO SIT SB Adhere the label Operation proce dure except for 100 V models 19 Clean the label surface of the original feed unit cover with alcohol 20 Adhere label Operation procedure G of which the language corresponding to the destination of the MFP on to the existing label of the original feed unit cover Figure a Coller l tiquette relative la proc dure d utilisation sauf pour les mod les 100 V 19 Nettoyer la surface de l tiquette d
174. and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch duplex paper conveying switch 23 A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 2 Jam code 61 Broken duplex paper con veying switch or feed switch 1 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Duplex paper conveying switch feed switch 1 24 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying no original feed Jam code 70 Defective original feed Switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the original feed motor malfunctions Run maintenance item U243 and select the original feed motor on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary 25 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying sec tion Jam code 71 Defective DP timing switch 2 R
175. aring 1 Select the item to be cleared 2 Press the start key The accumulated time is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 80 Checking the scanner count Description Displays the scanner operation count Purpose To check the status of use of the scanner Method Press the start key Display Description COPY SCAN COUNT Scanner operation count for copying OTHERS SCAN CNT Scanner operation count except for copying Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U993 Outputting a VTC PG pattern Description Selects and outputs a VTC PG pattern created in the machine Purpose When performing respective image printing adjustments used to check the machine status apart from that of the scanner with a non scanned output VTC PG pattern Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the VTC PG pattern to be output Display PG pattern to be output Purpose PG1 Leading edge registration adjust ment Center line adjustment Margin adjustment Lateral squareness adjustment Magnification adjustment Driving unevenness of drum 3 Press the system menu key 4 Press the start key A VTC PG pattern is output 5 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the system men
176. as moved by 106 pulses When the rear side registration home position sensor is turned off during initial ization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The rear side reg istration motor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective rear side registration motor Replace rear side registration motor The rear side reg istration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective rear side registration home position sensor Replace the rear side registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Finisher trailing edge registration motor problem optional built in fin isher When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned on during initialization the sensor did not turn on while it has moved by 106 pulses When the trailing edge registration home position sensor is turned off during initialization the sensor did not turn on in three seconds The trailing edge registration motor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defect
177. auche 8 5 Quite el tornillo 6 y el pasador 7 para desmontar la cubierta superior izquierda 8 5 Die Schraube 6 und den Stift 7 entfernen um die obere linke Abdeckung 8 abzunehmen 5 Rimuovere la vite 6 e il perno 7 per rimuovere il coperchio superiore sinistro 8 5 Je FIMRZOMIT BHO HZ Eis T 8 5 EX 6 di3kQEr MIAFALTA LAS 8 EROI 6 Remove the two screws 9 and then remove the ejection cover 10 with the mounting plate 6 Enlever les deux vis 9 puis enlever le couvercle d jection 10 avec la plaque de montage 6 Saque los dos tornillos 9 y desmonte la cubierta de expulsi n 10 con la placa de montaje 6 Die zwei Schrauben 9 entfernen und dann die Auswurfabdeckung 10 mit der Montageplatte abnehmen 6 Rimuovete ora le due viti 9 e quindi il coperchio di espulsione 10 con la piastra di montaggio 6 HI F200 AEREA 10 ET SORT P 6 EA 9 2 AZ LE 273 00 amp IS JR TZ LIA 7 Remove the two screws 11 and then remove the inner ejection cover 12 7 Enlever les deux vis 11 puis enlever le couvercle d jection interne 12 N Saque los dos tornillos 11 y desmonte la cubierta de expulsi n interior 12 N Die zwei Schrauben 11 entfernen und dann die innere Auswurfabdeckung 12 abnehmen N Rimuovete le due viti 11 e quindi il coperchio interno di espu
178. c de l alcool 24 Coller l tiquette d avertissement relative l orientation vers le haut de la face de l original 1 dans la langue correspondant la destination du MFP sur l tiquette du plateau d original Figure c Pegue la etiqueta de precauci n Ori ginal cara arriba excepto para los modelos de 100 V 23 Limpie con alcohol la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales 24 Pegue la etiqueta de precauci n Original cara arriba I del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP sobre la etiqueta de la cubierta de originales Figura c Anbringen des Warnschildes Origi nalschriftseite nach oben au er 100 V Modelle 23 Die Schildoberfl che am Originalzufuhr schacht mit Alkohol reinigen 24 Das Warnschild Originalschriftseite nach oben I in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild am Origi nalzufuhrschacht aufkleben Abbildung c Applicazione dell etichetta di avverti mento Originale rivolto verso l alto eccetto modelli 100 V 23 Pulire con alcool l etichetta sul piano originali 24 Applicare l etichetta di avvertimento Origi nale rivolto verso l alto I nella lingua corri spondente alla destinazione dell MFP sopra l etichetta del piano originali Figura c tan FRIEMSLI BE 100V 5 VELE LE a A WE 24 1838 4G MFP A beet AUER bn ARIE HEI MATERIE E o E Cc FARR FALRA Y tH 100V ERA
179. ce to strong direct light Keep the drum at an ambient temperature between 0 C 32 F and 35 C 95 F and at a relative humidity not higher than 8596 RH Avoid abrupt changes in temperature and humidity Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful to or may affect the quality of the drum Do not touch the drum surface with any object Should it be touched by hands or stained with oil clean it 3 Toner Store the toner container in a cool dark place Avoid direct light and high humidity 1 5 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 2 Paper feed section 1 Detaching and refitting the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Procedure Removing the primary paper feed units 1 Open the front cover and pull out the cas settes 1 and 2 2 Remove the screw and remove the primary paper feed unit Removing the forwarding pulley 3 Remove the stopper from the primary paper feed unit 4 Raise the forwarding pulley retainer in the direction the arrow and remove from the pri mary paper feed unit 5 Remove the stop ring from the forwarding pulley retainer 6 Remove the forwarding pulley from the for warding pulley shaft Forwarding pulley retainer Stopper Figure 1 5 2 Forwarding pulley retainer X Forwarding pulley shaft gt Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 3 Removing the paper feed pulley 7 8 Remove two stop rin
180. ch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 registration switch The contact between the right and left registration rollers is not correct Check visually and replace 1 4 15 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 17 A paper jam in the fuser section is indi cated during copying jam in fuser section Jam codes 40 to 44 46 and 47 Broken eject switch or feed shift switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Eject switch feedshift switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 51 18 A paper jam in the eject section is indi cated during copying jam in eject section Jam code 50 Broken eject switch actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication
181. cking the copy counts Description Checks the copy counts Purpose To check the copy counts Method Press the start key The current counts of copy counter printer counter and fax counter are displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U927 Clearing the all copy counts and machine life counts one time only Description Resets all of the counts back to 0 Purpose To start the counters with value 0 when installing the machine Supplement The total account counter and the machine life counter can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or less Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key All copy counts and machine life counts are cleared CANNOT EXECUTE is displayed if the count cannot be cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U928 Checking machine life counts Description Displays the machine life counts Purpose To check the machine life counts Method Press the start key The current machine life counts is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 77 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U933 Setting the backup kit Description Initializes optional data backup kit CF and restore the backup data Purpose To initialize the CF when c
182. component developing System 2 1 12 2 1 5 Transfer and separation SEctions ii 2 1 13 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections sssssssssseeeeee ennemis 2 1 14 2 17 F ser SectlOni mir 2 1 15 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections sssssssssseseene eee Ea ETTE nennen nne enne 2 1 16 221 9 Duplex section ci RO eei DEO DEOR Menu ages 2 1 17 1 Paper conveying operation in duplex COpying nennen 2 1 18 2 2 Electrical Parts Layout 2 223 Electrical parts layout ud eo poe estetica at nde ias 2 2 1 Dice 2 2 1 2 Switches and sensors iii 2 2 2 3 Motors ero rn A A 2 2 4 4 Other electrical components cree ederet etie eee edere n agde e petes eee gine ee 2 2 5 2 3 Operation of the PWBs 2 91 Power so rce PWB eser te e tiet ree a eo ene Fe Wei AA S OC ET 2 3 1 2 3 2 Engine PWB ner ere ete e eoe Ee E ee ada dia 2 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 4 Appendixes Maintenance parts Suminist dpi 2 4 1 Periodic maintenance procedures i cnn nan nn rnnn enne nennen nennen rre narran nne 2 4 3 Chart of image adjustment procedures i 2 4 7 General wiring diagram ooo detect ne e qe tee ue dee aaa ira 2 4 9 INSTALLATION GUID THE DOCUMENT PROCESSOR BUILT IN FINISHER JOB SEPARATOR FAX System M Data Security Kit C 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 1 Specifications I Desktop Copying system Indir
183. connection of connector YC22 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold unit set switch Replace the centerfold unit set switch Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold side registration motor 1 problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side registration motor 1 and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold side registra tion motor 1 Replace centerfold side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold paper conveying belt motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 2500 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 2 and the continuity across the con nector terminals Repair or replace if neces sary Defe
184. correct compliance with warning messages using this symbol AAWARNING Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol AACAUTION Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with warning messages using this symbol Symbols The triangle A symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution The specific point of attention is shown inside the symbol A General warning A Warning of risk of electric shock A Warning of high temperature Y indicates a prohibited action The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol General prohibited action Disassembly prohibited eo indicates that action is required The specific action required is shown inside the symbol General action required Remove the power plug from the wall outlet Gage Always ground the copier 1 Installation Precautions AA WARNING e Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified Avoid multiple connections to one outlet they may cause fire or electric shock When using an extension cable always check that it is adequate for the rated current cee ee eee ee eee ee cee ceaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecscnciesaeeeeeeesetees Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric shock Connecting the earth wire
185. creasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Supplement While this maintenance item is being executed copying from an original is available in the interrupt copying mode Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U099 Adjusting original size detection Description Checks the operation of the original size detection sensor and sets the sensing threshold value Purpose To adjust the sensitiveness of the sensor and size judgement time if the original size detection sensor mal functions frequently due to incident light or the like Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description DATA Displaying detection sensor transmission data B W LEVEL Setting detection sensor threshold value Setting original size judgment time Method to display the data for the sensor 1 Place the original and close the original cover or DP The detection sensor transmission data is dis played Display Description ORIGINAL AREA R Detected original width size R ORIGINAL AREA G Detected original width size G ORIGINAL AREA B Detected original width size B ORIGINAL AREA Detected original width size SIZESWL Displays the original detection switch ON OFF
186. creen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting punch destination Description Sets the destination of optional punch unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To be set when installing a different punch unit from the destination of the machine Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description AUTO With no punch unit JAPAN METRIC Metric Japan specifications INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications Initial setting INCH Inch specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 46 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U236 Setting the limit for the ejection section of the built in finisher Description If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher this mode sets whether A5R B5R statement size paper is output to the machine eject tray or not Purpose If the machine is equipped with an optional built in finisher and if paper jams occur due to curling of paper in the built in ejection section when two sided copying onto A5R B5R statement size paper is performed this mode is used to change the setting to ON to disable ejection to the machine eject tray Method Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed Sett
187. ctive center fold paper convey ing belt motor 1 2 Replace centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 2 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Blade motor problem optional cen terfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1500 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the blade motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective blade motor Replace the blade motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold staple motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Jam89 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold staple motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold staple motor Replace the centerfold staple motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 39 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Center
188. d istruzioni CREA DP Bi zr s RAs 16 DP BE Rai FAIR Int HERRA FA R 053677 Vx ES o 2 Wee eek U411 S DP FACE UP CIETRISH 1 4 INPUT GA IERI START FLA HELL 3 i LHL RESULT OK 00 A IE SS 00 IN VET HEL ERROR XX Cii XX MEA rer Jof BERE 1 28 2 HF RESULT OK 00 CES IE S 000 HM ES ISM DP B Sa RARE AE 1 DP AMET FRR A RZJ ERARIO Jj 2 b DP RSE F3 5 2 AwT T wA FBUMI amp t gt FULDP FACE UP 2 INPUT X START DOIRACHI L RO ARE eT 2 3 FA ATFVUA IZ RESULT OK 00 ARTIE iD ERROR XX BRA amp dU AER O 5 ROE y ME A MEE LL RESULT OK 00 BER SN x CHIL 2 ERED IT EE DY EA IZLI ERMENI E 20 A 60 x 5mm 4 After completing the surface adjustment direct F and R of the DP auto adjustment original downward and set the original by inserting the side where the F and R are marked into the DP first 5 Set the maintenance mode U411 Press the DP FACE DOWN key NORMAL TARGET key START INPUT key and START in order to adjust the rear surface 6 When RESULT OK 00 appears on the display the adjustment is completed If ERROR XX appears the adjustment is failed Check the original set position and repeat the steps 4 to 5 until RESULT OK 00 appears For details see the service manual 4 Une fois le r glage de la surface effectu diriger F avant et R arri re de la fonctio
189. d off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 Check see service manual of paper feeder Optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace feed switch 3 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 2 paper feeder paper conveying clutch Electrical problem with clutch Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 5 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 4 Jam code 13 1 4 12 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley
190. d pulley 11 Upper paper width switch PWSW U 27 Feed switch 3 FSW3 12 Lower paper width switch PWSW L 28 Front registration guide 13 Upper paper length switch PLSW U 29 Paper conveying guide 14 Lower paper length switch PLSW L 30 Vertical paper conveying guide 1 15 Cassette lift 31 Vertical paper conveying guide 2 16 Right registration roller 2GN 2GP 2GR The MP tray can be hold up to 200 sheets of paper at one time Paper is fed from the MP tray by the rotation of the MP for warding pulley and MP paper feed pulley Also during paper feed the MP separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time by the torque limiter 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 2 1 2 Paper feed from the MP tray MP tray MP lift guide MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP feed pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed pulley 9 MP feed roller 2 10 MP paper switch MPPSW 11 MP feed switch MPFSW 12 MP paper length switch MPPLSW 13 MP paper width switch MPPWSW O sow Rw uo FSW1 te oe D PSW U LICSW U FSW2 ros PSW L LICSW L FSW3 HO 2GN 2GP 2GR EPWB YC14 B6 YC10 A2 YC11 14 YC11 17 YC13 B9 YC13 B12 YC1
191. d replace when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and replace when user call occurs Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and replace when user call occurs Points and cautions P 1 5 28 P 1 5 32 P 1 5 29 Eject section Eject roller Eject pulley Switchback roller Switchback pulley 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs Clean with alcohol Check and clean with alcohol when user call occurs 2 4 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions part location Covers Covers Clean Every service Clean with alcohol or a dry cloth Section Dust filter 1 Clean Every service Vacuum Dust filter 2 Clean Every service Vacuum Maintenance Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions part location Other Image quality Check and Every service adjust Section 2 4 6 Chart of image adjustment procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Adjusting Maintenance mode
192. direcci n de exploraci n secundaria Para el copiado d plex ajuste CIS MAIN ADJ aj principal CIS direc ci n de exploraci n principal del reverso y CIS SUB ADJ aj secundario CIS direcci n de exploraci n secundaria del reverso Einstellen der Originalgr e des DP 1 Den Wartungsmodus U070 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel f r jede Einzel und Duplexkopie einstellen F r die Einzelkopie die CONVEY SPEED ZUFUHRGESCHWINDIG KEIT Subscanrichtung einstellen F r die Duplexkopie CIS MAIN ADJ CIS HAUPTEINSTELLUNG Hauptscanrichtung hinten und CIS SUB ADJ CIS UNTEREINSTEL LUNG Subscanrichtung hinten einstellen Regolazione delle dimensioni dell originale DP 1 Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U070 e regolare l esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola e duplex Per la copia singola regolare CONVEY SPEED VELOCIT TRASFE RIMENTO orientamento della scansione ausiliare Per la copia duplex regola CIS MAIN ADJ REGOLAZIONE SCAN SIONE PRINCIPALE CIS orientamento scansione principale lato posteriore e CIS SUB ADJ REGOLAZIONE SCANSIONE AUSI LIARE CIS orientamento scansione ausiliare lato posteriore HE DP RERI Wa DP RERT 1 RAR Ca EWR CL MEER EWR 2 3 ZER WR 1 Bee HEE HTL U070 IA a EAE Ve PE AMS EZ BREA Vit SR PEL ZIE AL
193. drum unit see pages 1 5 26 and 24 Remove the right registration cleaner Replace the right registration cleaner and Install the cleaner Refit the drum unit and developing unit Figure 1 5 23 1 5 3 Optical section 1 Detaching and refitting the exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp as follows Procedure 1 Remove the original cover or the DP 2 Remove ten screws and remove the rear Cover 3 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner right cover 4 Remove the platen Remove the connector of the inverter PWB 6 Release the wire from the wire saddles and pull the connector out from the opening on the rear of the scanner unit a 2GN 2GP 2GR Rear cover Figure 1 5 24 Platen Scanner right cover Figure 1 5 25 Opening Wire saddles Connector Figure 1 5 26 1 5 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Remove the sponge from the wire guide and release the wire 8 Move the mirror 1 frame to notch position and release the wire from the wire holder 9 Remove the screw and remove the expo sure lamp 10 Replace the exposure lamp and install the lamp 11 Refit the platen scanner right cover and rear cover 1 5 12 Wire holder x Sponge Figure 1 5 27 Exposure lamp Figure 1 5 28 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the scanner wires Take the following procedure when the scanner wires are broken or to be replaced NOTE When fitting t
194. e ii 1 B Modulkabel nur 120 V Modell sut CG Verschlusskappoe cnni data tetra 1 D Ferritkern 120 V MOdell i 1 A A 2 E Alphabetaufkleber i 1 Parti fornite A Scheda a circuiti FAX isinira 1 B Cavo connettore modulare solo per il modello da 120 V 1 C Guarnizione terminale ne 1 D Nucleo di ferrite modello da 120 V 1 modello da 230 V wid E Etichetta alfabetica 1 Hg ant A ERU AM B ig GEHT 120V WS roa j M E D ith JE eee 1 4T D an ug eo RP 1 B 7a Fa F 120V ROA eee 1 C e a EE E E EE 1 D 774 hay 120V EBR dc ded ae wee ada WA Ea REV UPYPE C RET 1 230V TEER ai 2 E JU gv SE ieri laden 1 Istruzioni per il montaggio Assicurarsi di aver spento l interruttore dell MFP e di aver sfilato la spina dell MFP dalla presa prima di installare il sistema fax E X PEHRA E F FR ASER i 1 RRR BSBA MFP HAART BRIAR EAA FIFV7 SE aie FIR FPIVAVAF DE RET SEE WS MFP AKO A 4 Y AA YF OFF ICL SE VET I TREK TODD Rimuovere il coperchio 1 Rimuovere le due viti 1 quindi rimuo vere il coperchio OPT 1 2 if Testi 1 FT 2 BEST 1 REIT OPT 1 HR 2 DAN ORY HL 1 Ex 1 2 REAL OPTI 002073 2 MOAT 2 Inserire la scheda a circuiti FAX A lungo l incavo nell OP
195. e as first copy time Fast 1200 mode 600 dpi 300 dpi Microsoft Windows 95 OSR2 Microsoft Windows 98 second edition Microsoft Windows NT4 0 service pack 5 or later Microsoft Windows 2000 service pack 2 or later Microsoft Windows Me Microsoft Windows XP Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Apple Macintosh OS 9 x Apple Macintosh OS X 10 x Parallel Bi directional parallel IEEE 1284 Nibble ECP mode High speed USB USB2 0 USB host interface Optional interface 2 slots KUIO LV RS 232C Network interface 10Base T 100Base TX PRESCRIBE PCL6 5e XL KPDL3 KC GL Line Printer IBM Proprinter X24E EPSON LQ 850 DIABLO 630 Outline font 80 fonts PCL6 136 fonts KPDL3 Bitmap font 1 font 79 fonts are processed by outline font 2GN 2GP 2GR Graphi Seenen PRESCRIBE JPEG image command supported One dimensional barcode 45 types Two dimensional barcode PDF417 1 type Connectivity i Plug amp Play SNMP printer MIB supported Scanner functions Eterna ate 10BASE T 100BASE TX Network Protocol TCP IP Transmission system PC transmission SMB Scan to SMB FTP Scan to FTP E mail transmission SMTP Scan to E mail TWAIN scan TWAIN source Resolution 600 dpi 400 dpi 300 dpi 200 dpi 200 x 100 dpi 200 x 400 dpi File Format eeen Monochrome TIFF MMR PDF MMR Gray JPEG PDF JPEG Color JPEG PDF high compression
196. e connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective paper entry sensor Replace the paper entry sensor and check for correct operation The optical path of the paper entry sensor is blocked by foreign matter Remove the foreign matter Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation EEPROM problem optional document finisher Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective EEPROM or fin isher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Mail box communication error optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher Communication with the mail box is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of the connector of the mail box and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the mail box main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Mail box drive motor problem optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher The motor lock signal is detected above 500 ms during driving the mail box drive motor Poor contact in the connector
197. e copia Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia aj stela siguiendo este procedimiento Valor de referencia Diferencia horizontal de la linea de centro 2 para el copiado por una cara 2 mm Diferencia horizontal de la l nea de centro 2 para el copiado d plex x3 mm Pr fen der Originalmittellinie des DP 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Mittellinie 1 des Originals a und der Mittellinie 2 des Kopierbeispiels pr fen Wenn der Abstand gr Ber als der Bezugs wert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen lt Bezugswert gt Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 f r die Einzelkopie 2 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 f r die Duplexkopie 3 mm Verifica della linea centrale del DP 1 Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea centrale 1 sull originale a e la linea centrale 2 dell esempio di copia Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura Valore di riferimento Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale 2 per la copia singola 2 mm Differenza orizzontale della linea centrale 2 per la copia duplex 3 mm HE DP RARO TREE Cao POR C1 AIR 2 AT AA AAA RE Be PET BR EG gt ATR AN De 2 FE 2mm AZ 2 WFE 3mm DP AF VS SER 1 Hia a OLR CL EE SFY PV OPK 2 o Tv ER 2 3 v2 TEAM OE Gr KO FI CHEAT 9 lt B gt Hio PORRO DEETAN 2mm LAP WX Fb 2 DEATA 38mm A
198. e following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Mail paper entry switch tray eject sensor 42 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor non arrival jam Jam code 92 1 4 20 Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey ing motor malfunctions Check Check if the eject roller and eject pulley contact each other Check and remedy Check if the eject guide is deformed Check and remedy Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 43 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying reverse sensor jam Jam code 93 Defective reverse sensor With 5 V DC present at CN14 5 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 7 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the reverse sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the reverse sensor Check if the reverse motor malfunctions Check Check if the reverse roller and reverse pulley contact each other
199. e l axe 2 pour la copie recto verso 3 mm Ajuste los valores Si el centro se desplaza m s hacia el frente ejemplo de copia l aumenta el valor Si el centro se desplaza hacia dentro ejemplo de copia m disminuye el valor Magnitud del cambio por incremento 0 085 mm Haga una copia de prueba Repita los pasos 1 a 3 anteriores hasta que la separaci n de la l nea 2 del ejemplo de copia presente el valor de referencia Valor de referencia Diferencia horizontal de la linea de centro 2 para el copiado por una cara 2 mm Diferencia horizontal de la linea de centro 2 para el copiado duplex 3 mm Die Werte einstellen Wenn die Mitte nach vorne verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel I Den Wert erh hen Wenn die Mitte nach innen verlagert ist Kopierbeispiel m Den Wert verringern Anderung pro Schritt 0 085 mm Eine Testkopie erstellen Die Schritte 1 bis 3 wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels den Bezugswert aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 f r die Einzelkopie 2 mm Horizontaler Unterschied der Mittellinie 2 f r die Duplexkopie 3 mm Regolare i valori Se il centro si sposta pi avanti esempio di copia 1 aumenta il valore Se il centro si sposta verso l interno esempio di copia m riduce il valore Entit modifica per passo 0 085 mm Eseguire una copia di prova Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte da 1 a 3 fino a quando
200. e la fonction de r glage automatique d original du DP les r glages automatiques sauf le r glage de la position oblique du DP peuvent tre effectu s Pour les r glages effectu s l aide de la fonction de r glage automatique d original du DP voir la page 20 Haga el ajuste en el orden siguiente De lo contrario el ajuste no ser correcto Para el ajuste de la posici n oblicua del DP consulte la p gina 10 Valor de referencia Copiado por una cara dentro de 3 mm Copiado duplex dentro de 4 mm Para el ajuste del tamafio de original del DP consulte la p gina 13 Valor de referencia dentro de 1 5 Para el ajuste de la sincronizaci n de extremo gu a del DP consulte la p gina 15 Valor de referencia dentro de 2 5 mm Para el ajuste de la linea de centro del original del DP consulte la p gina 17 Valor de referencia Copiado por una cara 2 mm Copiado d plex dentro de x3 mm Cuando se usa el original de ajuste autom tico del DP se pueden realizar los ajustes autom ticos a excepci n del ajuste de la posici n oblicua del DP Para los ajustes que usan el original de ajuste autom tico del DP consulte la p gina 20 Die Einstellungen m ssen in der folgenden Reihenfolge vorgenommen werden Sonst kann die Einstellung nicht richtig ausgef hrt werden Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Schr glage des DP siehe Seite 10 lt Bezugswert gt Einzelkopie Innerhalb x3 mm Duplexkopie Inne
201. e registration see page 1 3 25 Original is not placed correctly Place the original correctly 19 Image is not square Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Laser scanner unit positioned incor Adjust the installation position of the laser scanner unit see rectly page 1 5 23 1 4 50 1 4 4 Electric problems 2GN 2GP 2GR Troubleshooting to each failure must be in the order of the numbered symptoms Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 1 The machine does not operate when the main power switch is turned on The power cord is not plugged in properly Check the contact between the power plug and the outlet No electricity at the power outlet Measure the input voltage Broken power cord Check for continuity If none replace the cord Defective main power Switch Check for continuity across the contacts If none replace the main power switch Defective power source PWB With AC present check for 24 V DC at YC1 7 on the power source PWB 5 V DC at YC1 6 and 3 3 V DC at YC1 5 If none replace the power source PWB 2 The eject motor does not operate Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective drive transmis Sion system
202. e time for the exposure lamp to light Checking the scanner count Outputting a VTC PG pattern Initial setting for executing U020 1 The item initialized for executing U020 2 The item initialized for executing U021 1 3 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Contents of the maintenance mode items Maintenance item No Description U000 1 3 6 Outputting an own status report Description Outputs lists of the current settings of the maintenance items and paper jam and service call occurrences Outputs the event log or service status page Purpose To check the current setting of the maintenance items or paper jam or service call occurrences Before initial izing or replacing the backup RAM output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be output Display Output list MAINTENANCE List of the current settings of the maintenance modes EVENT LOG Outputs the event log SERVICE STATUS Outputs the service status page 3 Press the start key The interrupt print mode is entered and a list is output When A4 Letter paper is available a report of this size is output If not specify the paper feed location When output is complete the screen for selecting an item is displayed Event log Event Log MFP Firmware version 2GN 2000 001 036 2006 04 17 1 2 3 Paper Jam L
203. econd 500 to 500 1 0 mm Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Center line of printing FE Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 5 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 U072 P 1 3 25 P 1 3 30 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the printing area for folio paper Description Changes the printing area for copying on folio paper Purpose To prevent cropped images on the trailing edge or left right side of copy paper by setting the actual printing area for folio paper Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Setting Setting range Initial setting LENGTH DATA Length 330 to 356 mm 330 WIDTH DATA Width 200 to 220 mm 210 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 19 2GN 2GP 2GR M
204. ect electrostatic system Originals iiem Sheets books and three dimensional objects Maximum size A3 Ledger Original feed system Fixed Copy paper rre Weight Cassette 60 105 g m MP tray 45 200 g m Types Cassette Plain Preprinted Bond Recycled Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched High quality and Custom1 8 MP tray Plain Transparency Preprinted Labels Bond Recycled Vellum Rough Letterhead Color Colour Prepunched Envelope Cardstock Thick paper High quality and Custom1 8 Copying sizes isee Cassette A3 Ledger A5R StatementR MP tray A3 Ledger A6R StatementR Magnification ratios Manual mode 25 40096 196 increments Auto copy mode fixed ratios Metric 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1 1 41 1 1 22 1 1 15 1 0 86 1 0 81 1 0 70 1 0 50 1 0 25 Inch 1 1 1 0 1 4 00 1 2 00 1 1 29 1 1 21 1 0 78 1 0 64 1 0 50 1 0 25 Copy Sp ed iriiritia At 100 magnification in copy mode 30 ppm model A3 Ledger 20 sheets min B4 Legal 20 sheets min A4 Letter 30 sheets min A4R Letter R 22 sheets min B5 30 sheets min B5R 20 sheets min A5R Statement 14 sheets min AGR 16 sheets min 40 ppm model A3 Ledger 23 sheets min B4 Legal 23 sheets min A4 Letter 40 sheets min A4R Letter R 27 sheets min B5 40 sheets min B5R 22 sheets min ASR Statement 16 sheets min AGR 18 sheets min 50 ppm model A3 Ledger 26 sheets min B4 Legal 26
205. ect the power cord Toner container Figure 1 2 12 Waste toner box Figure 1 2 13 Connect the power cord to the connector on the machine Insert the power plug into the wall outlet Install the fixing brackets Remove two screws from the rear cover Hook the catch of fixing bracket onto the groove of round frame and secure it using two screws removed before step Fixing brackets Carry out initial developer setting maintenance item U130 ARONA Turn the main power switch on and press the status key Enter the maintenance mode by entering 10871087 using the numeric keys Enter 130 using the numeric keys and press the start key 2GN 2GP 2GR Grooves Figure 1 2 14 Press the start key to execute the maintenance item The drive stops within approximately 5 minutes Press the stop key Output an own status report maintenance item U000 SN Enter 000 using the numeric keys and press the start key Press the stop key Exit maintenance mode Select MAINTENANCE and press the start key to output a list of the current settings of the maintenance items Enter 001 using the numeric keys and press the start key The machine exits the maintenance mode Print out the user setting list Select Report Print to output the user various setting reports Make test copies Place an origina
206. ective measures Misadjusted leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U034 to readjust the leading edge registration see page 1 3 18 Misadjusted scanner leading edge registration Run maintenance mode U066 to readjust the scanner lead ing edge registration see page 1 3 24 12 The leading edge of the image is sporadically misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Feed clutch paper feed clutch MP paper feed clutch or registration clutch installed or operating incor rectly 13 Paper creases Copy example Causes Check the installation position and operation of each clutch If any of them operates incorrectly replace it Check procedures corrective measures 1 4 48 Paper curled Check the paper storage conditions Paper damp Check the paper storage conditions Defective pressure springs Replace the pressure springs Defective separation Check the drum separation claws and heat roller separation claws 14 Offset occurs Copy example Causes 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures 4 Defective cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Defective fuser unit Check the heat roller and press roller Wrong types of paper 15 Image is partly missing Copy example Causes
207. ed el ctrica antes de instalar el sistema de fax F Schelle wird nicht benutzt 1 Installationsablauf Schalten Sie den Netzschalter des MFP aus und trennen Sie den MFP vom Netz bevor Sie das Faxsystem installieren F Fascetta da non utilizzare 1 Remove the cover 1 Remove two screws 1 and then remove OPT 1 cover 2 Retirer le couvercle 1 Retirer les deux vis 1 puis le couvercle OPT 1 2 Desmonte la cubierta 1 Quite dos tornillos 1 y desmonte la cubierta OPT 1 2 Entfernen der Abdeckung 1 Die beiden Schrauben 1 herausdrehen und Abdeckung OPT1 2 abnehmen Install the FAX circuit board 2 Insert the FAX circuit board A along the groove in OPT1 and secure the board with two screws 1 that have been removed in step 1 Direct the label 3 on to the FAX circuit board toward right side and insert the board along the groove Do not touch the FAX circuit board terminal Hold the top and bottom of the FAX circuit board or the projection of the board to insert the FAX circuit board Do not insert the FAX circuit board into OPT2 Installer la carte circuits FAX 2 Ins rer la carte circuits FAX A le long de la rainure dans l OPT1 et la fixer l aide des deux vis 1 retir es l tape 1 Diriger l tiquette 3 situ e sur la carte circuits FAX vers la droite et ins rer la carte le lo
208. edge margin MP tray 118 to 236 0 1 mm Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Printer leading edge margin 3 0 2 5mm Ejection direction reference Printer Printer left margin right margin 2 0 2 9mm 2 0 29mm Printer trailing edge margin 3 0 2 5mm Figure 1 3 24 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U403 U404 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the platen Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original on the contact glass Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step A MARGIN Scanner left margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm B MARGIN Scanner leading edge margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm C MARGIN Scanner right margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm D MARGIN Scanner trailing edge margin 0 to 10 0 2 0 0 5 mm Display D
209. el c digo de cifrado Pida al cliente que cambie el c digo de cifrado Si usa el valor predeterminado del c digo de cifrado 000000 la fiabilidad de la seguridad de los datos no se ver afectada Si el cliente desea cambiar el c digo avise al cliente que debe seguir los pasos a continuaci n Pulse Encriptaci n C digo Pulse Retroceso para borrar 000000 Introduzca el c digo de cifrado 6 caracteres alfanum ricos y pulse OK Advierta al cliente que no debe olvidar el c digo de cifrado introducido 5 Pulse OK Se inicia el formateado del disco duro 6 Cuando termine el formateado siga las instrucciones que aparecen en pantalla para apagar y encender el interruptor principal 7 Despu s de que aparezca la pantalla inicial compruebe que se muestra un icono de disco duro 3 en el ngulo superior derecho de la pantalla Consulte la ilustraci n B 8 Conserve la llave USB utilizada en su recept culo situado en el lado posterior de la cubierta central izquierda instalada en la parte de atr s de la m quina Consulte la ilustraci n C Datensicherheits Kit C Installationsanleitung f r MFP Modelle Kit Sicurezza Dati C Guida all installazione per i modelli MFP Data Security Kit C amp amp BEFBEXIECE IRR Italiano Componenti forniti Chiave USB H 1 Precauzioni prima dell attivazione Attivando il Kit Sicurezza Dati tutti i dati m
210. elapsed The stapler con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The stapler is bro ken Replace the stapler and check for correct operation Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher stapler problem optional built in finisher The stapler home position sensor does not change state from nondetection to detection within 200 ms of the start of stapler motor counterclockwise forward rotation During initialization the stapler home position sensor does not change state from non detection to detection within 600 ms of the start of stapler motor clockwise reverse rotation The stapler con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable The stapler is blocked with a sta ple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the stapling section of the sta pler The stapler is bro ken Replace the front stapler and check for cor rect operation Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Stapler moving moto
211. emorizzati dal cliente sul disco rigido verranno eliminati Prima di iniziare l attivazione verificare con il cliente che i dati possano essere eliminati Accertarsi che l interruttore di alimentazione principale della macchina sia spento Procedura di attivazione 1 Inserire la chiave USB nel relativo slot di memoria della macchina e accendere l interruttore di alimentazione principale vedere Figura A 2 Una volta visualizzata la schermata iniziale viene visualizzato il messaggio Verr avviata l installazione del Kit sicurezza Premere OK 3 Seguire le istruzioni sullo schermo per la rimozione della chiave USB e spegnere l interruttore di alimentazione principale 4 Accendere l interruttore di alimentazione principale Viene visualizzata la schermata per l immissione della chiave di crittografia Chiedere al cliente di modificare la chiave di crittografia L utilizzo del valore predefinito della chiave di crittografia 000000 non influisce sull affidabilit della sicurezza dati Se il cliente desidera modificare la chiave di crittografia necessario che esegua i passi descritti qui in basso Premere Chiave di crittografia Premere Backspace per eliminare 000000 Immettere la chiave di crittografia 6 caratteri alfanumerici e poi premere OK Ricordare al cliente di non dimenticare la chiave di crittografia immessa 5 Premere OK La formattazione del disco rigido ha inizio 6 Al termine della formattazione se
212. en refitting insert the cutout in the MP paper feed clutch over the stopper on the machine 12 Remove the screw from the cam at the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft and move the cam and the bushing toward the inner side Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft Figure 1 5 13 Stop ring MP paper feed clutch Figure 1 5 14 Bushing MP forwarding pully shaft Figure 1 5 15 2GN 2GP 2GR 13 Remove the stop ring of the MP paper feed pulley shaft and slide the bushing in the Bushing direction of the arrow Stop ring MP paper feed pully shaft Figure 1 5 16 14 Slide the MP forwarding pulley shaft tempo rarily toward the rear side and then raise it to remove from the MP unit Remove the shaft while raising the actuator of the MP paper switch MP forwarding pully shaft Figure 1 5 17 15 Remove the bushing an cam on the rear of the MP forwarding pulley shaft MP forwarding pully shaft Bushing Figure 1 5 18 1 5 7 2GN 2GP 2GR 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 5 8 Remove the stop ring and slide the MP for warding pulley with the forwarding pulley retainer from the shaft to remove it Replace the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Install the MP forwarding pulley to the MP forwarding pulley shaft Refit the MP forwarding pulley shaft to the MP unit Install the MP paper feed pulley to the MP unit Ref
213. ence of the user Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON To eject to the side of the machine OFF Not to eject to the side of the machine Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 61 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U332 Setting the size conversion factor Description Sets the coefficient of nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size The coefficient set here is used to convert the black ratio in relation to the A4 Letter size and to display the result in user simulation Purpose To set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for nonstandard sizes in relation to the A4 Letter size Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select CALCULATION RATE 3 Change the setting using the keys Description Setting range Initial setting Size parameter 0 1 to 3 0 1 0 4 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 62 Specific paper feed location setting for printing function Description Sets a paper feed location specified for printer output Purpose To use a paper feed location only for printer output A paper feed location specified for printer output cannot be used for copy output Setting 1 Pres
214. eplace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feedshift switch registration switch Check if the registration clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the registration clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and rem edy if necessary Electrical problem with the registration clutch Check see page 1 4 51 Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 21 A paper jam in the switchback section is indicated during copying jam in optional switchback unit Jam code 53 Broken feedshift switch or switchback eject switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective feedshift switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn the feedshift switch on and off manually Replace the feedshift switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Defective switchback eject Switch With 5 V DC present at CN5 2 on the switchback unit main PWB check if CN5 4 on the switchback unit main PWB remains low when the switchback eject switch is turned on and off If it does replace the switchback eject switch 22 A paper jam in the duplex section is indi cated during copying jam in duplex paper conveying section 1 Jam code 60 Broken feedshift switch or duplex paper conveying switch actuator Check visually
215. er paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn off within specified time of the MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL turning on 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm Section Description Conditions 2GN 2GP 2GR Specified time Paper feed section 22 Multiple sheets in verti cal conveying section The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the feed switch 2 FSW2 turning off 1910 ms 30 ppm 1478 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of the feed switch 3 FSW3 turning off 1989 ms 30 ppm 1539 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of the feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on 1910 ms 30 ppm 1478 ms 40 50 ppm The feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn off within speci fied time of the feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on 1904 ms 30 ppm 1474 ms 40 50 ppm 23 Multiple sheets in MP tray conveying section The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning off 3539 ms 30 ppm 2739 ms 40 50 ppm The registration switch RSW does not turn off within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning on 3933 ms 30 ppm 3043 ms 40 50 ppm Paper conveying section 30 Misfeed in registration transfer section
216. er value see page 1 3 39 Drum unit Figure 1 5 50 1 5 24 2 Detaching and refitting the main charger unit Follow the procedure below to replace the main charger unit Procedure 1 2 3 4 no Remove the developing unit see page 1 5 26 Release the inserted part and remove the connector cover Remove the connector While pushing the hole with a sharp pointed object remove the main charger unit Release the inserted part and remove the cleaning motor unit from the main charger unit Replace the main charger unit Refit the cleaning motor unit to the main charger unit Install the main charger unit 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Figure 1 5 51 Main charger unit Figure 1 5 52 Main charger unit Inserted part Cleaning motor unit Figure 1 5 53 1 5 25 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 5 Developing section 1 Detaching and refitting the developing unit Follow the procedure below to replace the developing unit Procedure Developing release lever 1 Open the front cover pag 2 Remove the toner container and waste toner Eds box TW 3 Remove the pin and turn the developing release lever in the direction of the arrow N ei I a Remove the developing unit Replace the developing unit and install the unit 6 Perform maintenance mode U157 and U158 to clear the counter value see page 1 3 41 42 Developing unit Figure 1
217. er wire stoppers and frame securing tools Focusing on the locating ball of the wire drum move aside the wires to inside Move the mirror 2 frame from side to side to correctly locate the wires in position Refit the mirror 1 frame machine left and insert the two frame secur ing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the scanner unit to secure the frames in position Hold the wires and fix each front and rear wire holder plate to mirror 1 frame with the screw Remove the two frame securing tools Refit the exposure lamp 2GN 2GP 2GR Frame securing tool Mirror 2 frame Frame securing tool Mirror 1 frame Figure 1 5 36 1 5 17 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Detaching and refitting the ISU reference Follow the procedure below to replace the ISU Fitting requires the following tools Two positions pins P N 1856812 Procedure Detaching the ISU ISU cover 1 Remove the platen see page 1 5 11 2 Remove seven screws and then remove the ISU cover Figure 1 5 37 3 Remove three screws and two connectors and then remove the ISU 4 Replace the ISU Connector Connector Figure 1 5 38 1 5 18 2GN 2GP 2GR Fitting the ISU 5 Adjust the position of ISU to the frame hole of number and the same number which are recorded in the lens of ISU and then insert two positioning pins Example When a lens number is 5 move ISU so that the positioning hole of 5 of the number stamped in the
218. escription Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Increasing the value makes the margin wider and decreasing it makes the margin narrower Scanner leading edge margin 3 1 5mm Ejection direction reference Scanner Scanner left margin right margin 2 1 0mm 2 1 0mm Scanner trailing edge margin 2 1 0mm Figure 1 3 25 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U404 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 65 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the DP Description Adjusts margins for scanning the original from the DP Purpose Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect when the optional DP is used Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U402 U403 P 1 3 64 P 1 3 65 Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Setting Initial Change in Display Description range setting value per step A MARGIN Left margin first page 0 to 10 0 3 0 0 1 mm
219. etection switch Defective original size detection sensor Check if sensor operates correctly If not replace it Problem Causes 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures 11 The touch panel keys do not work Poor contact in the touch panel connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective touch panel or main operation PWB If any keys do not work after running the maintenance item U201 to initialize the touch panel replace the touch panel or main oper ation PWB 12 The message requesting paper to be loaded is shown when paper is present on the cas sette 1 2 or MP tray Poor contact in the con nector terminals of upper lower paper switch or MP paper switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective upper lower paper switch or MP paper switch If the level of following terminal on PWB does not go low when the switch is turned on and off replace the switch Upper paper switch YC13 B12 on the engine PWB Lower paper switch YC13 B18 on the engine PWB MP paper switch YC6 A6 on the engine PWB 13 The size of paper on the cassette 1 2 or MP tray is not dis played correctly Poor contact in the con nector terminals of upper lower paper size
220. ettes 1 2 or MP tray to the left and right registration rollers at which point secondary feed takes place and the paper travels to the transfer section in sync with the printing timing Each cassette consists of a lift driven by the lift motor and other components Each cassette can hold up to 500 sheets of paper Paper is fed from the cassette by the rotation of the forwarding pulley and paper feed pulley The separation pulley prevents multiple sheets from being fed at one time via the torque limiter O 0 el LET Ne eil Figure 2 1 1 Paper feed from the cassettes 1 and 2 1 Upper forwarding pulley 17 Left registration roller 2 Lower forwarding pulley 18 Registration switch RSW 3 Upper paper feed pulley 19 Feed roller 1 4 Lower paper feed pulley 20 Feed pulley 5 Upper separation pulley 21 Feed switch 1 FSW1 6 Lower separation pulley 22 Feed roller 2 7 Upper paper switch PSW U 23 Feed pulley 8 Lower paper switch PSW L 24 Feed switch 2 FSW2 9 Upper lift limit switch LICSW U 25 Feed roller 3 10 Lower lift limit switch LICSW L 26 Fee
221. ettore in senso orario fissando cosi le linee dei segnali Es 15 4 DP CAD Ua Ss 15 MER 2 16 MER MFP 16 IEEE Bt A UU RIS p EA C17 HE FERIE ERROR 15 DP AA A DRHE S r 15 7 4155 16 amp MFP ZKPSIC BERGE A 16 247 2 pa IE 7 3 07 FASNOL IETS Fasten the original mat 17 Place original mat B with its Velcro 18 upward over the contact glass Align original mat B corner that has not been surface cut with the inner left corner of the original instruction panel 18 Close DP A and attach original mat B onto it with Velcro Fixer la plaque d original 17 Placer la plaque d original B sur la vitre d exposition en orientant les bandes Velcro 18 vers le haut Aligner le coin de la plaque d original B qui n est pas d coup sur le coin int rieur gauche du panneau d instructions de l original 18 Abaisser le DP A et y fixer la plaque d original B l aide des bandes Velcro Fije la alfombrilla para originales 17 Coloque la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro 18 hacia arriba sobre el cristal de contacto Alinee la esquina no cortada de la alfombrilla para originales B con la esquina interior izquierda del panel de instrucciones del original 18 Cierre el DP A y fije la alfombrilla para originales B con el velcro Befestigen der Originalmatte 17 Die Originalmatte B mit dem Klettb
222. evice problem Main PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory EEPROM data problem Main PWB Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory device problem Engine PWB Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Device damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Backup memory data problem Engine PWB Reading data from EEPROM is abnor mal Read and write data does not match five times continuously Problem with the backup memory data Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data Defective engine PWB If the C0160 is displayed after initializing the backup memory replace the engine PWB and check for correct operation Copy counts problem A checksum error is detected in the main and engine backup memories for the copy counters Data damage of EEPROM Contact the Service Administrative Division Defective PWB Replace the main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Machine number mismatch error Machine number of main PWB and engine PWB does not match
223. eying occurs sample 1 increase the preset value If the copy paper is Z folded sample 2 decrease the preset value ea e N Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 18 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 53 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U246 1 3 54 Setting adjustment of the paper stop timing 1 Select PUNCH POS ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of the paper stop timing 10 to 10 0 0 49 mm If the distance of the position of a punch hole is smaller than the specified value A increase the preset value If the distance is larger than the value A decrease the preset value o o Figure 1 3 19 Preset value A 5 5 2 mm inch 9 5 2 mm metric 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting adjustment of front rear side registration home position 1 Select WIDTH F HP ADJ or WIDTH R HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of front side registration home position 10 to 10 0 0 314 mm Adjustment of rear side registration home position 10 to 10 0 0 314 mm 3 Press the
224. f paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper switch PSW L Detects the presence of paper in the cassette 2 Upper lift limit switch LICSW U Detects the cassette 1 lift reaching the upper limit Lower lift limit switch LICSW L Detects the cassette 2 lift reaching the upper limit Upper paper size length switch PIES VAL RC trennt mener Detects the length of paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper size length switch PIES WEL os coe scenes ia Detects the length of paper in the cassette 2 Upper paper size width switch PWSWNU iseseitee retenti Detects the width of paper in the cassette 1 Lower paper size width switch LIEN Detects the width of paper in the cassette 2 MP paper switch MPPSW Detects the presence of paper on the MP tray MP paper size length switch MPPESW Hn Detects the length of paper on the MP tray MP paper size width switch MPPIWSW la ai Detects the width of paper on the MP tray 2 2 2 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 3T 2GN 2GP 2GR Feed switch 1 FSW1 i Controls feed clutch 1 drive timing Feed switch 2 FSW2 ii Controls feed clutch 2 drive timing Feed switch 3 FSW3 ssses Controls feed clutch 3 drive timing MP feed switch MPFSW Controls MP feed clutch drive timing Scanner home pos
225. feed pulley Upper lower separation pulley Upper lower forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley MP separation pulley MP forwarding pulley MP feed roller 1 MP feed pulley MP feed roller 2 Left registration roller Right registration roller Feed pulley Feed roller 1 Feed roller 2 Feed roller 3 Registration switch Left registration cleaner Registration guide Right registration cleaner Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Clean Replace Replace Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Replace Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with alcohol Clean with a dry cloth Replace Replace Replace
226. fer is separated from the drum by applying separation bias that is output from the high voltage trans former PWB HVTPWB to the separation electrode Drum LE separation claw Separation electrode Drum Transfer roller NE TAN Figure 2 1 17 Transfer and separation sections Separation electrode gt SC Transfer roller HVTPWB Figure 2 1 18 Transfer and separation sections block diagram 2 1 13 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 6 Cleaning and charge erasing sections The cleaning section consists of the cleaning blade that removes residual toner from the drum surface after the transfer process and the cleaning spiral that carries the residual toner back to the waste toner box The cleaning lamp CL consists of LEDs and removes residual charge on the drum before main charging Also the toner quantity in the waste toner box is sensed with the overflow sensor OFS Cleaning spiral Cleaning roller Cleaning lamp CL i zt Drum Figure 2 1 19 Cleaning and charge erasing sections CL YC9 B7 OFS Figure 2 1 20 Cleaning and charge erasing sections block diagram 2 1 14 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 7 Fuser section The fuser section consists of the parts shown in Figure 2 1 21 When paper reaches the fuser section after
227. fold side registration motor 2 problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected when initial operation even if 1000 ms passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC7 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of centerfold side registration motor 2 and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold side registra tion motor 2 Replace centerfold side registration motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Centerfold main motor problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher The motor lock signal is detected above 1000 ms during driving the centerfold main motor Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC12 on the centerfold main PWB and the connector of the centerfold main motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold main motor Replace the centerfold main motor Defective PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Sensor adjusting problem optional document finisher The sensor cannot be adjusted within the specified range The paper entry sensor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert th
228. g copying a jam in the original registration section Jam code 75 Defective switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Original registration switch DP timing switch 1 30 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying sec tion Jam code 76 Defective DP timing switch 2 Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 31 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying jam between finisher and machine Jam code 80 Defective paper entry sen sor Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indica tion of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis played in reverse 32 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying paper jam during paper insertion to the finisher Jam code 81 1 4 18 3000 sheet document finishe r document finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper entry sen sor 3000 sheet document finisher Run maintenance item U241 and turn the paper entry sensor on and off
229. gl les images du MFP Pour plus de d tails se reporter au manuel d entretien Verifique el funcionamiento 1 Para comprobar el funcionamiento del aparato prepare un original a que contenga 4 l neas b dibujadas a 20 mm de los bordes de la hoja A3 y 1 l nea c dibujada en el centro 2 Conecte el enchufe el ctrico del MFP en el tomacorriente de la pared y encienda el interruptor principal 3 Coloque el original a en el DP y haga una copia de prueba para verificar el funcionamiento y el ejemplo de copia 4 Compare el original a con el ejemplo de copia Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia realice los siguientes ajustes seg n el tipo de separa ci n Compruebe las im genes del DP despu s de comprobar y ajustar las im genes del MFP Para m s detalles lea el manual de servicio Funktionspr fung 1 Zum Pr fen der Ger tefunktion das Original a vorbereiten auf das 4 Linien b 20 mm von den Kanten des A3 Blattes und 1 Linie c in der Mitte gezeichnet sind 2 Den Netzstecker am MFP in die Steckdose stecken und den Strom einschalten 3 Das Original a auf den DP legen und eine Testkopie erstellen um die Funktion und das Kopierbeispiel zu pr fen 4 Das Original a mit dem Kopierbeispiel vergleichen Wenn der Abstand gr er als der Bezugswert ist die folgenden Einstellungen gem dem Abstandstyp durchf hren Die Bilder des DP nach dem Pr fen und Einstellen der Bilder des MFP pr fen Weitere E
230. gs from the primary paper feed unit Pull the paper feed pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the paper feed pulley Removing the separation pulley 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Remove the stop ring from the primary paper feed unit Pull the separation pulley shaft in the direc tion of the arrow and remove the separation pulley Replace the forwarding paper feed and separation pulleys Install the separation and paper feed pulleys to the primary paper feed unit Install the forwarding pulley to the forward ing pulley retainer When refitting the forwarding pulley orient it correctly as shown in Figure 1 5 6 Refit the forwarding pulley retainer to the pri mary paper feed unit Refit the primary paper feed unit When the forwarding pulley paper feed pul ley separation pulley or the primary paper feed unit is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter see page 1 3 75 2GN 2GP 2GR Stop ring Stop ring Paper feed pulley shaft Paper feed pulley Figure 1 5 4 Separation pulley shaft Stop ring Separation pulley Figure 1 5 5 Machine front Machine rear Forwarding pulley Figure 1 5 6 1 5 3 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Follow the procedure below to replace the MP separation MP paper feed and MP forwarding pulleys Procedure Removing the MP
231. guire le istruzioni sullo schermo per spegnere e riaccendere l interruttore di alimentazione principale T Una volta aperta la schermata iniziale verificare che un icona del disco rigido 5g sia visualizzata nell angolo inferiore destro dello schermo vedere Figura B 8 Conservare la chiave USB nell apposito scomparto situato sul retro della copertura centrale sinistra fissata alla parte posteriore della macchina vedere Figura C Deutsch Gelieferte Teile USB Schl ssel Vorsichtsma amp nahmen vor der Aktivierung Durch Aktivieren des Datensicherheits Kits werden alle Daten gel scht die vom Kunden auf der Festplatte gespeichert wurden Fragen Sie vor der Aktivierung den Kunden ob die Daten gel scht werden k nnen Stellen Sie sicher dass der Netzschalter des Ger ts ausgeschaltet ist Aktivierungsverfahren 1 2 e o a EN eo Stecken Sie den USB Schl ssel in den USB Speichersteckplatz des Ger ts ein und schalten Sie den Netzschalter ein Siehe Abbildung A Zuerst wird der Er ffnungsbildschirm angezeigt dann wird die Nachricht Sicherheits Kit wird installiert angezeigt Dr cken Sie OK Folgen Sie den Anweisungen die auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt werden um den USB Schl ssel zu entfernen und schalten Sie den Netzschalter aus Schalten Sie den Netzschalter ein Das Dialogfeld zur Eingabe des Verschl sselungscodes wird angezeigt Bitten Sie den Kunden den Verschl sselungscode z
232. gung eines Verfahrens zur Jobtrenner Installation nur metrische Spezifikationen Der folgende Schritt wird nach Schritt 9 auf Seite 4 hinzugef gt Gelieferte Teile F Auswerfanschlag A3 seee Den in der Abbildung gezeigten Abschnitt der Jobtrennerablage C mit Alkohol reinigen dann den Auswerfanschlag A3 F innerhalb der Bezugslinien ankleben Procedura addizionale per l installazione del separatore solo per le specifiche metriche Il seguente passo viene aggiunto dopo il passo 9 a pagina 4 Parti fornite F Fermo di espulsione A3 eeeess Dopo avere usato l alcol per pulire la parte del vassoio del separatore C illustrata in figura fare aderire il fermo di espulsione A3 F lungo le linee di riferimento SR T EMI ELS RE BU P oz ER APR TALE n A TS A Mie ant F HEHKPAER AS ccc ce eee eee ees TESTER EL a ARAFAT O las it Jets WHER AER A3 E o Sa TAE NULA RERO FM 2 UFILEROA ANTENNE 9 OIC KO FI IBN fer FBEHEAR Ba ABI iii Ya TERXLA BER LA 0 DOMO a TNA REM A bey 78 ASQ TIENE Cio THEY AIT S 2006 2 303KB56770 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR FAX System M INSTALLATION GUIDE for FAX System M GUIDE D INSTALLATION du syst me FAX M GU A PARA LA INSTALACI N del sistema de FAX M No inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax en OPT2 Deutsch INSTALLATIONSANLEITUNG
233. h unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the connector YC4 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective punch PWB Replace the punch PWB and check for cor rect operation Backup memory data problem optional mail box of 3000 sheet doc ument finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the mail box main PWB and the connector YC7 on the finisher main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective mail box main PWB Replace the mail box main PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the centerfold main PWB and the connector YC5 on the finisher main PWB and the con tinuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective center fold main PWB Replace the centerfold main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 41 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Lodo Contents Causes Chec
234. he paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in MP tray vertical paper conveying section Jam code 20 1 4 14 Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse MP feed switch registration switch Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 13 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying multiple sheets in paper feed section Jam code 21 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 or MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 MP feed switch Broken paper feeder feed Switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed Switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch Check if the clutch malfunc tions Run maintenance item U247 and select following clutch on the touch panel to be turned on
235. he scanning section 6 Inverter PWB INPWB Controls the exposure lamp 7 SHD PWB SHDPWB Controls the shading correction and AGC of CCD 8 CCD PWB CCDPWB Reads the image off originals 9 Main operation unit PWB OPWB M Controls touch panel and LCD indication 10 Right operation unit PWB OPWB R Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 11 Left operation unit PWB OPWB L Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 12 Upper operation unit PWB OPWB U Consists of the operation keys and display LEDs 13 Front operation unit PWB OPWB F Consists of the display LEDs 14 LCD inverter PWB LINPWB Controls LCD indication 15 Laser diode PWB LDPWB Generates and controls the laser light 2 2 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Switches and sensors oo uoomrom c eo 12 13 14 15 L Machine front ZA Machine inside C Machine rear Figure 2 2 2 Switches and sensors Main power switch MSW Turns the AC power on and off Interlock switch ILSW Turns the AC power for the fuser heater on and off Safety switch 1 SSW1 Breaks the safety circuit when the left cover 1 is opened Safety switch 2 SSW2 Breaks the safety circuit when the front cover is opened Upper paper switch PSW U Detects the presence o
236. he stapler is blocked with a staple Remove the stapler cartridge and check the cartridge and the sta pling section of the stapler Remove the staple if any Defective stapler section With 5 V DC present at YC2 24 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 19 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high If it does replace the stapler section 34 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying eject sensor stay jam 3000 sheet document finishe r Defective eject switch 1 Run maintenance item U241 and turn eject switch 1 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Jam code 83 Document finisher Defective eject sensor With 5 V DC present at CN5 4 on the finisher main PWB check if CN5 6 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the eject sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the eject sen sor Check if the paper convey Check and remedy ing motor malfunctions Check if the eject roller and Check and remedy eject pulley contact each other Check if the eject guide is Check and remedy deformed Defective finisher main Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation PWB Built in finisher Defective paper conveying With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB Switch check if YC2
237. he wires be sure to use those specified below Machine front P N 302GR17110 gray Machine rear P N 302GR17100 black Fitting requires the following tools Two frame securing tools P N 302C968310 Two scanner wire stoppers P N 3596811 Procedure Detaching the scanner wires Clip holder 1 Remove the exposure lamp see page 1 5 11 2 Remove the clip holder 3 Open the front cover and left cover 1 4 Remove four screws and remove front left cover Front left cover Figure 1 5 29 5 Remove the screw and pin and then remove the left upper cover Figure 1 5 30 1 5 13 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Remove two screws and remove the scan ner left cover 7 Remove each screw and then remove front and rear wire holder plates from mirror 1 frame 8 Remove the mirror 1 frame 9 Remove the round terminals from the scan ner wire springs on scanner unit left side 10 Remove the scanner wire 1 5 14 Scanner left cover Figure 1 5 31 Mirror 1 Ws Z X W Front wire holder plate Rear wire holder plate Figure 1 5 32 Scanner wire springs Round ass Figure 1 5 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Fitting the scanner wires Eiaie secudng adi 11 Move the mirror 2 frame as shown in the fig Mirror 2 frame ure and insert two frame securing tools into the positioning holes at the front and rear of the machine center to fix the mirror 2 frame in position Figure 1 5 34 1 5 15 2GN 2GP 2G
238. heck for cor rect operation Engine RAM error Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM error Defective flash ROM Replace the flash ROM and check for cor rect operation Flash ROM error during download Defective flash ROM Replace the flash ROM and check for cor rect operation Fax control PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 43 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 3 1 No image appears entirely white See page 1 4 45 6 A black line appears longitudi nally See page 1 4 47 11 The leading edge of the image is con sistently misaligned with the original See page 1 4 48 16 Fusing is poor N See page 1 4 49 1 4 44 2 No image appears entirely black Image formation problems 5 A white line appears longitudi nally 4 Background is visible 3 lmage is too light See page 1 4 45 See page 1 4 46 See page 1 4 46 See page 1 4 46 7 A black line appears laterally 9 Black dots appear 10 lmage is blurred on the image 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the other See page 1 4 47 See page 1 4 48 14 Offset occurs See page 1 4 47 See page 1 4 47 12 The leading
239. hen the laser scanner unit is to be replaced Procedure 1 Remove the developing unit and drum unit see pages 1 5 24 and 26 2 Remove the right lower cover and front left cover see pages 1 5 4 and 13 3 Remove four screws and remove the front right cover Front right cover Figure 1 5 42 4 Remove three screws and remove the top tray Figure 1 5 43 5 Remove five screws and remove the inner cover Inner cover Figure 1 5 44 1 5 21 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Remove two screws and two connectors and then remove the fan duct Fan duct Connectors Figure 1 5 45 m Remove six screws and remove the toner container retainer Toner container retainer Figure 1 5 46 8 Remove four screws and the connector and then remove the laser scanner unit 9 Replace the laser scanner unit and install the unit 10 Refit the toner container retainer fan duct and inner cover 11 Refit the top tray front right cover right lower cover and front left cover 12 Refit the drum unit and the developing unit Connector Laser scanner unit Figure 1 5 47 1 5 22 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Adjusting the skew of the laser scanner unit reference Perform the following adjustment if the leading and trailing edges of the copy image are laterally skewed lateral square ness not obtained Enter maintenance mode Procedure Correct image Copy Copy exa
240. her Copy example Causes Clean the separation electrode Check procedures corrective measures Dirty main charger wire Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Defective exposure lamp 9 Black dots appear on the image Copy example Causes Check if the exposure lamp light is distributed evenly If not replace the exposure lamp see page 1 5 11 Check procedures corrective measures Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty drum separation claws Clean the drum separation claws Dirty the heat roller separation claws Clean the heat roller separation claws 1 4 47 2GN 2GP 2GR 10 Image is blurred Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Scanner moves erratically Check if there is any foreign matter on the front and rear scanner rails If any remove it Deformed press roller Replace the press roller see page 1 5 30 Paper conveying section drive prob lem Check the gears and belts and if necessary grease them 11 The leading edge of the image is consistently misaligned with the original Copy example Causes Check procedures corr
241. hildoberfl che am Originalzufuhr schacht mit Alkohol reinigen 22 Das Warnschild Original entfernen H in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild am Original zufuhrschacht aufkleben Abbildung b Applicazione dell etichetta di avverti mento Rimuovere originale eccetto modelli 100 V 21 Pulire con alcool la superficie dell etichetta Sul piano di ricevimento originali 22 Applicare l etichetta di avvertimento Rimuo vere originale H nella lingua corrispondente alla destinazione dell MFP sopra l etichetta del piano di ricevimento originali Figura b AN HUS ER 100V 215 21 PURE AE G eed 22 Vitt 5 MEP FLORE IIIS RC HEL FIL CHL ABITO MOE E amp b Ria SAD SI LOREY Att 100V EBRELPE 21 ER TP VOIR LEP AA BT 5 22 MFP ATS ERA SEO S BAT A o TIBUS VIAN H 73 ECHO HITS m b Adhere the caution label Original face up except for 100 V models 23 Clean the label on the original table with alcohol 24 Adhere caution label Original face up 1 of which the language corresponding to the destination of MFP on to the label of the orig inal table Figure c Coller l tiquette d avertissement relative l orientation vers le haut de la face de l ori ginal sauf pour les mod les 100 V 23 Nettoyer l tiquette figurant sur le plateau d original ave
242. hin the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective inverter PWB Check if the exposure lamp lights when YC1 3 on the inverter PWB goes low while maintenance item U061 is run If not replace the inverter PWB Defective scanner PWB Check if YC6 3 on the scanner PWB goes low when mainte nance item U061 is run If not replace the scanner PWB 1 4 45 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Image is too light Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Insufficient toner If the display shows the message requesting toner replenish ment replace the container Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Defective transfer charging output 4 Background is visible The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 10 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if transfer charging takes place when CN1 5 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Copy example Causes Check procedures corrective measures Deteriorated toner Perform the drum refresh operation Dirty mai
243. i St DMA ka FILE 000000 OE EMA LC G6 EJ Tot LAR BERDA Ee AE VIO A FO PE CA ELTADI 151 1 KF ets Ay 9 ARATE RUT FO000001 414 LC2 dba F EKF 6 ME EAA UTC LOK E fien BRCM SEA Pe RARE I ERZETT E DK EEUU FFLAZA7D7 lt gt IMAN Za y EKT LED MEMOREZ LEHT EEZ y FID ERI YFA ANA T7 ZMERNE c i FRA FARBBIDICA RFLZI7A2 Aarin THOS AMET 5 ERED USB AIL A Hs fe ill 70 73 4 FA b CER UID USB X BOX TILMAN HTD 303KP56710 Rev 1 0 2006 4
244. i il coperchio interno di espulsione 12 6 8 F2 4 8822 11 ZUR DR THERN AR 12 6 EX 11 24 EARL AA 12 ZEV 3 1 7a7TEXRLr 3 A EMO FIRS 7 If the branch pressure lever 13 on the rear side of the job separator A has lowered raise it 7 Sile levier de pression fourchu 13 situ sur le c t arri re du s parateur de travaux A est abaiss le relever 7 Si baj la palanca de presi n de ramal 13 en el lado trasero del separador de trabajos A lev ntela T Falls der Zweigdruckhebel 13 auf der R ckseite des J obtrenners A abgesenktist muss er angehoben werden 7 Se la leva a pressione del braccio 13 situata sul lato posteriore del separatore A abbassata sollevatela 7 WREDA AIUTA 13 SI FAMI EEEE L Z 13 SFERZE Fo TOZAN EWS n 8 Insert the job separator A into the MFP from the front si side using a pin 14 and the front side using a TP screw M3 x 05 E de and slide itto the left Secure the rear 8 Ins rer le s parateur de travaux A dans le MFP depuis le c t avant et le faire glisser vers la gauche Fixer l arri re l aide d une goupille 14 et l avant l aide d une vis TP M3 x 05 E 8 Inserte el separador de trabajos A en el MFP del lado delantero y deslice hacia la izquierda Asegure el lado trasero utilizando un pasador 14
245. ico del MFP en un tomacorriente y conecte el interruptor principal 2 Presione Org papel F inalizando y Bandeja de salida en el panel de toque para seleccionar Band de separad trab Betriebspr fung 1 Den Netzstecker des MFP in eine Netzsteckdose einstecken und den Hauptschalter einschalten 2 Die Tasten Org P apier Endbearbeitung und Druckablage auf dem Sensorbildschirm in dieser Reihenfolge dr cken um J ob Separator F ach zu wahlen Verifica di funzionamento 1 Inserite il cavo di alimentazione dell MF P nella presa di rete e quindi accendetela 2 Premete Org Carta F initura e Vassoia di uscita sul pannello a sfioramento in questo ordine per selezionare Vass separat Lavori BUE ERA EMEP SIA AI BA 2 HE Fi EI DEC 2 2 i SARO GE VEA BERE 1 MFP ARKO HIRT 7 Fe se LAA BRAZA YO FEINA 2 By FRA CIR FARR EEFI THE M56 SICH LIV a TEA BR 32 Make a test copy to check that a copy is ejected to the job separator tray C Effectuer une copie de test pour v rifier que la copie est ject e dans le plateau du s parateur de travaux C Haga una copia de prueba para verificar que la copia sale a la bandeja del separador de trabajos C Eine Probekopie anfertigen um zu pr fen ob die Kopie in die J obtrennerablage C ausgewo
246. iginale e ripetere le operazioni da 4 a 5 fino a quando non viene visualizzato RESULT OK 00 RISULTATO OK 00 Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni 4 ERRE 4 DP Eko FAIR N IPE RA FAIR IT dd DP ARE 5 We HEE RES U411 Jk DP FACE DOWN EHH F i NORMAL TARGET Cl E kr E START INPUT FUGA A FEF START On zl f ELSE 6 ite EMBL RESULT OK 00 HRE iF 00 IN VET WAHL ERROR XX Cii XX Wu yip i Er tx ouf E LEUR STR 4 755 HE RESULT OK 00 C Z3 iB WEE EW 00 HM ron E FIORE TR DA RETRO PLR PICU FR ABA CWS 772 6 DP Affe v RS QALWTCWAGE RBEUM D AE EvL QDP FACE DOWN 3 NORMAL TARGET 3c START INPUT 3 START OJR L SE if og EE AR 1T 9 FL ATFUA IZ RESULT OK 00 BER ENNIE T ERD ERROR XX BRA amp VI Es Usus ASRCC 5 UR E v hp MER LU RESULT OK 00 BERANA E CHINA 5 ZERO CS IAH EA ZA PMESHOTE 21 INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR BUILT IN FINISHER Supplied parts A Transfer Unica e 1 B Intermediate tray stu C Staple cover 1 D Large ejection cover za Pi ces fournies A Unit de transfert 1 B Plateau interm diaire EN C Couvercle d agrafes i D Grand couvercle d jection 1 Partes suministradas A Unidad de transferencia eee 1
247. inal registration motor ORM is turned on Original conveying motor OCM is turned on DP lift motor DPLM is turned on DP fan motor 1 2 3 DPFM1 2 3 is turned on Original feed motor OFM is turned on reversing 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key when operation stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 51 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U244 Checking the DP switches Description Displays the status of the respective switches in the optional DP Purpose To check if respective switches in the optional DP operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches LIFT LOW LIM SW DP lift upper limit switch DPLULSW LIFT UP LIM SW DP lift lower limit switch DPLLLSW DP SET SW Original set switch OSSW DP PSD SW Original size length switch OLSW DP FEED SW Original feed switch OFSW DP REG SW Original registration switch ORSW CCD TMING SW DP timing switch 1 DPTSW1 CIS TMING SW DP timing switch 2 DPTSW2 DP COVER SW DP safety switch 2 DPSSW2 DP OPEN SW DP safety switch 1 DPSSW1 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 52 Checking messages
248. inals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 1 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U101 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB 2 No image appears entirely black Copy example Causes Check if developing bias is output when CN1 14 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U101 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Check procedures corrective measures No main charging Broken main charger wire Replace the main charger unit see page 1 5 25 Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Check if YC7 4 on the engine PWB goes low when mainte nance item U100 is run If not replace the engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB Check if main charging takes place when CN1 11 on the high voltage PWB goes low while maintenance item U100 is run If not replace the high voltage PWB Exposure lamp fails to light Poor contact in the expo sure lamp connector ter minals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity wit
249. ing 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Does not eject to the machine eject tray OFF Eject to the machine eject tray Initial setting OFF 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting finisher stack quantity Description Sets the number of sheets of each stack on the main tray and on the internal tray in the optional 3000 sheet document finisher Purpose To change the setting when a stack malfunction has occurred Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set Display Description MAIN TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the main tray MIDDLE TRAY Number of sheets of stack on the internal tray for sort copying or sta ple copying Setting the number of sheets of stack on the main tray 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Description 0 3000 sheets 1 1500 sheets Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the number of sheets of stack on the internal tray 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Description 0 For sort copying 10 sheets for staple copying 50 sheets 1 For sort copying 10 sheets for staple copying 30 sheets Initial setting O 2 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The scree
250. ing memory copying Caution Before making this adjustment ensure that the following adjustments have been made in maintenance mode U034 U402 U066 U403 U071 P 1 3 18 P 1 3 64 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 28 U404 U407 P 1 3 66 Adjustment 1 Press the start key Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Leading edge registration for memory image printing 47 to 47 47 1 0 mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 decrease the value For copy example 2 increase the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 27 6 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 67 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U411 1 3 68 Adjusting the scanner automatically Description Uses a specified original and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Purpose To perform automatic adjustment of various items in the scanner and the DP scanning sections Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N SCANNER Automatic adjustment in the scanne
251. ing section 3 Paper path sensor 1 PPSENS1 does not turn on within specified time of the paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 539 ms 30 ppm 417 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 3 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Paper feed section 1 4 4 18 Misfeed in vertical paper conveying sec tion The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 1 FSW1 turning on 1657 ms 30 ppm 1283 ms 40 50 ppm Feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 2 FSW2 turning on 1910 ms 30 ppm 1478 ms 40 50 ppm Feed switch 2 FSW2 does not turn on within specified time of feed switch 3 FSW3 turning on 1904 ms 30 ppm 1474 ms 40 50 ppm 19 Misfeed in paperfeeder vertical paper convey ing section Feed switch 3 FSW3 does not turn on within specified time of the paper feeder feed switch PFFSW turning on 1573 ms 30 ppmy 1217 ms 40 50 ppm 20 Misfeed in MP tray ver tical paper conveying section The registration switch RSW does not turn on within specified time of the MP feed switch MPFSW turning on 3933 ms 30 ppm 3043 ms 40 50 ppm 21 Multiple sheets in paper feed section The feed switch 1 FSW1 does not turn off within speci fied time of its turning on Paper length 4337ms 30 ppm Paper length
252. ing solenoid PSWSOL Punch pattern solenoid PPSOL Lock solenoid LSOL Method Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motors and solenoids FEED IN MOTOR BRANCH SOL 2 BRANCH SOL 3 BRANCH SOL 4 BRANCH SOL 5 BRANCH SOL 6 BRANCH SOL 7 FEED IN SOL Mail box drive motor MBDM Tray feedshift solenoid 1 TFSSOL1 Tray feedshift solenoid 2 TFSSOL2 Tray feedshift solenoid 3 TFSSOL3 Tray feedshift solenoid 4 TFSSOLA Tray feedshift solenoid 5 TFSSOL5 Tray feedshift solenoid 6 TFSSOL6 Mail paper entry solenoid MPESOL 2 To stop operation press the stop key Method Checking the motor of the centerfold unit 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motor CONV MOTOR BLADE MOTOR BUNDLE UP MOTOR BUNDLE DOWN MTR WIDTH TEST A3 WIDTH TEST LD STAPLE MOTOR Centerfold main motor CMM Blade motor BLM Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 1 CPCBM1 Centerfold paper conveying belt motor 2 CPCBM2 Centerfold side registration motor 1 2 CSRM1 2 Centerfold side registration motor 1 2 CSRM1 2 Centerfold staple motor CSTM 2 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key with the operation stopped The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 49 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U241 1 3 50
253. ing unit consists of the developing roller where a magnetic brush is formed the doctor blade and the develop ing spirals that agitate the toner When the toner sensor TNS detects a low toner level in the developing unit the toner replenishment signal is output to the engine PWB EPWB The engine PWB EPWB that has received the signal turns on the toner replenishment sole noid TNFSOL and replenishes toner from the toner container to the developing unit Also the toner container sensor TCS checks whether or not toner remains in the toner container 1 Developing unit housing 2 Developing roller 3 Toner sensor TNS 4 Doctor blade 5 Right developing spiral 6 Left developing spiral Figure 2 1 13 Developing section Developing roller Right developing spiral Developing paddle Flow of the toner Figure 2 1 14 Flow of the toner 2 1 10 TNFSOL TNFSOL TNS SIG BVSEL1 BVSEL2 HVTPWB Figure 2 1 15 Developing section block diagram 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 11 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 Single component developing system This machine uses the single component developing system and reversal processing is performed with a charged drum a Si and a charged magnetic toner With the single component developing system toner is electrically charged by friction with the developing sleeve and
254. inzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung Verifica del funzionamento 1 Per verificare il funzionamento della macchina preparare l originale a tirando 4 linee b a 20 mm dai bordi del foglio A3 e una linea c al centro 2 Inserire la spina dell alimentazione dell MFP nella presa a muro quindi posizionare l interruttore principale su On 3 Posizionare l originale a sul DP ed eseguire una copia di prova per verificare il funzionamento e l esempio di copia 4 Confrontare l originale a con l esempio di copia Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento eseguire le seguenti regolazioni in funzione del tipo di scostamento Controllare le immagini del DP dopo avere effettuato i controlli e le regolazioni delle immagini sull MFP Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale d istruzioni LERET 1 Fr BAS PE Le BRE MEG TK AS ifs Li PRK 20mm iti Hi 4 ABE Cb IF HERT OE 1 42x Co AG MFP ff si Sed Adis RETE PB IAT FP SE LU E DP ERER Ca JESETT WMA EN Fri ERE IEA XI EE IRR Ca MAA EA AA dele pa ue 308 MFP RAEE DP MAR SAIS ISI N e T SERERE 1 1374 AMERO 9i 2 S 20mm DALIA ITA b 4 AL REO HT c 1 ARNO FERA DER a PF HET 2 MP RED BRT 7 Fea ey NICE LIARZAZZA VFR NITTI 3 JR a amp DPARIC E v ALLA har Zio MERLO EPA TDMA MED 4 RA a EE MPL Pe he LEME LOPS AD SBR THAIS CU CHIE ETT 9 MFP AAO EUR TERR OFA OCHS DP AAO MRE CL MIS EAVIAPILESROC
255. ion Displays or clears the counts of optional DP or finisher Purpose To check the use of optional DP and finisher Also to clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the device the count of which is to be checked The count of the selected device is displayed Display Description DP Counts of optional DP FINISHER Counts of optional finisher DP Display Description ADP No of single sided originals that has passed through the DP RADP No of double sided originals that has passed through the DP Finisher Display Description CP CNT No of copies that has passed STAPLE Frequency the stapler has been activated PUNCH Frequency the punch has been activated STACK Frequency the stacker has been activated SADDLE Frequency the center holding has been activated Clearing 1 Select the item to be cleared To clear the counts for all press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Resetting partial operation control Description Resets the service call code for partial operation control Purpose To be reset after partial operation is performed due to problems in the casettes or other sections and the related parts are serviced Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key to rese
256. ion Press the stop key when main charger output stops The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played U101 1 3 38 Setting the other high voltages Description Sets the developing bias control voltage the transfer control voltage and the separation control voltage or checks the output of these voltages Purpose To check the developing bias the transfer voltage and the separation voltage or to take measures against drop of image density or background fog Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting DEV BIAS Developing bias AC component frequency at 20 to 32 28 image formation DEV SBIAS Developing shift bias potential at image for 0 to 3 2 mation DEV DUTY Developing bias AC component duty at image 0 to 100 50 formation TC DATA Transfer control voltage 0 to 300 130 SC DATA Separation control voltage 0 to 60 20 Increasing the DEV BIAS setting makes the image darker decreasing it makes the image lighter Increasing the DEV SBIAS setting makes the image darker Increasing the DEV DUTY setting makes the image lighter decreasing it makes the image darker Increasing the TC DATA setting makes the transfer voltage higher and decreasing it makes the voltage lower Increasing the SC DATA setting makes the separation voltage higher and decreasing it makes the volt age lo
257. ione obliqua del DP Per le regolazioni con l autoregolazione originale DP vedere pagina 20 RIETI BRA 2 O EX DP RHE USE SY E d ig ed q di 0 9i lt R gt HMHE 3mm A WHEN 4mm Y FK DP RRTV T 2 30 lt dt gt 15 p O EX DPL iS LES 15 To dE 2 5mm Y e x DP gs 2 ME E SI 170 lt A gt DEED 2mm ZEN 3mm Y fe DP ERE A Irem DP 1 Sr ERE MA zh s s e UE HN DP Hare fs IU VR ELS 20 X FU WILLEM 1 VE 1 ur E dedos r Ne eg we To N oF PF a OMAR CME ae IT 9 Z L NRO CMR AIT DRUG E LORRA c O DP AIMEE 10S dB AM 3mm LA Mi 4mm LA O DP SETE 13 7 dB 1 5 O DP 41554 SUT 15 x dB 2 5mm UA O Dit gt 0 ME REE 17 x Zeb AE 2mm UAN Mw 3mm EL DP ELS EUR fA RR c DP RORE DUO EEE D TA S e PESE AE 20 7 43mm 4mm y3 mm Amm Checking DP oblique position 1 Check the horizontal gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 of copy example positions If the gap exceeds the reference value adjust the gap according to the following procedure Reference value For single copying The horizontal gap of line 2 should be within 3 mm For duplex copying The horizontal gap of line 2 should be within 4 mm V rification de la
258. ir or replace if necessary Defective humidity sensor Replace the humidity sensor Drum EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drum unit Replace the drum unit Developing unit EEPROM error Reading from or writing to EEPROM cannot be performed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective develop ing unit Replace the developing unit Punch motor problem optional 3000 sheet document finisher The LOCK signal of the punch motor is detected for more than 500 ms while the punch motor is operating Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the punch PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective punch motor Replace the punch motor Defective PWB Replace the punch PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Tray upper limit detection problem optional document finisher When the tray elevation motor raises a tray the ON status of the tray upper limit sensor is detected The tray upper limit sen
259. is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller Image density Setting 3 Setting 0 Dark Set to LIGHTER Set to DARKER Density adjustment Light Center Dark Figure 1 3 17 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting Density in text mode 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting TEXT DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 TEXT LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and decreasing it makes the change smaller 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 35 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U093 1 3 36 Setting Density in photo mode 1 Select the item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting PHOTO DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 PHOTO LIGHTER Change in density when manual density is set light 0 to 3 0 Increasing the setting makes the change in density larger and de
260. it Alkohol abwischen und Verschlusskappe C einsetzen Collegamento dell MFP al telefono separato 6 Collegare la linea del telefono separato con il nucleo di ferrite D al terminale della linea quindi collegare il terminale della linea alla linea del telefono separato Nel caso in cui non si colleghi MFP al telefono separato pulire la superficie del terminale del telefono con dell alcol e applicare la guarnizione ter minale C 4 MFP ERRE i 6 FIERE D LAR iE ZEHN Ri Sum To ARRE ERA E IA k ARTIE MFP ERRE E RIE RE RR T Ze Ht LIFE C MAITE EL OH 6 TEL Sinti SMT IT ERED D O ERROZ 74 buy D BRYANT 62vcCv 25180 DIT RE AB IMT IT ak e BEGETS IAT HELIER LISA EL Yim T Je BE eT va it Li C B RU S A Error Help Logout Clear Reset Reset ABC DEF Attach the alphabet labels T Wipe the area above the numeric keys at the right side of the operation panel and adhere the alphabet labels E here 8 In Asia and Oceania use PORS TUV WXYZ label and do not use PRS TUV WXY and OPER labels Fixer les tiquettes de l alphabet T Nettoyer la surface au dessus des touches num riques droite du panneau de com mande et y coller les tiquettes de l alphabet E 8 En Asie et Oc anie utiliser l tiquette PQRS TUV WXYZ et pas les tiquettes PRS TUV WXY et OPER Fije las etiquetas de alfabeto T Limpie la zona situada encima de la
261. it the MP unit cover to the MP unit When refitting the MP unit cover the film on the cover is positioned under the MP paper feed pulley shaft Install the MP separation pulley to the MP unit Refit the MP unit When the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or the MP separation pulley is replaced perform maintenance mode U903 to clear the jam counter see page 1 3 75 Stop ring 0 MP forwarding pully Forwarding pully retainer Figure 1 5 19 MP paper feed pully shaft Film Figure 1 5 20 3 Detaching and refitting the left and right registration cleaner 2GN 2GP 2GR Take the following procedure when the left or right registration cleaner is to be replaced Procedure Removing the left registration cleaner 1 2 3 4 5 Open the left cover 1 and remove the trans fer roller unit see page 1 5 27 Remove two roller stoppers and remove the left registration roller Remove two registration guides Remove the left registration cleaner Replace the left registration cleaner and reg istration guides Install the left registration cleaner and regis tration guides Refit the left registration roller roller stop pers and transfer roller unit Registration guide stopper Figure 1 5 21 Figure 1 5 22 1 5 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Removing the right registration cleaner 1 2 3 1 5 10 Remove the developing unit and
262. itch feedshift switch eject switch or duplex paper conveying switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn each switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 53 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 15 The message requesting cover to be closed is dis played when the front cover or left cover 1 2 is closed 1 Poor contact in the con nector terminals of front cover switch left cover 1 Switch or left cover 2 Switch Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective front cover switch left cover 1 switch or left cover 2 switch Check for continuity across each switch If there is no continuity when the switch is on replace it 16 Others 1 4 54 Wiring is broken shorted or makes poor contact Check for continuity If none repair 1 4 5 Mechanical problems Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 1 No primary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the following rollers or pulleys are dirty with paper powder upper lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys upper lower separation pulleys feed rollers registration rollers MP forward ing pulley MP paper feed pulley and MP sep aration pulley Clean with isopr
263. itch ORSW does not turn on within specified time and after 5 retries 4979 pulse Section Description Conditions 2GN 2GP 2GR Specified time Optional DP 75 An original jam in the original registration section The original registration switch ORSW does not turn off within specified time 19533 pulse DP timing switch 1 DPTSW1 does not turn on within specified time 4979 pulse 76 An original jam in the original feed conveying section DP timing switch 2 DPTSW2 does not turn on within specified time 2500 pulse 78 Document processor top cover open The document processor top cover is opened during orig inal feeding Optional finisher 80 Jam between the fin isher and machine 3000 sheet document finisher only Paper ejection is not output from the machine to the doc ument finisher within specified time of the paper entry sensor PES turning on 81 Paper entry sensor nonarrival jam 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned off even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1360 ms 30 ppm 1052 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1360 ms 30 ppm 1052 ms 40 50 ppm 3000 sheet document finisher The paper entry sensor PES doe
264. item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U196 Turning the fuser heater on Description Turns the fuser heater M or S on Purpose To check fuser heaters turning on Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the heater to be turned on The selected heater turns on for 2 s and then turns off Display Description MAIN Fuser heater M FH M SUB Fuser heater S FH S Completion Press the stop key when fuser heaters M and S are off The screen for selecting the maintenance item No is displayed Checking the fuser temperature Description Displays the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Purpose To check the fuser temperature the ambient temperature and the absolute humidity Method Press the start key The fuser temperature and ambient temperature are displayed in centigrade C and the absolute humidity is displayed in percentage 96 Display Description FIX CENTER TEMP Fuser center temperature C FIX EDGE TEMP Fuser edge temperature C SURROUND TEMP Ambient temperature C HUMIDITY Absolute humidity 96 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Turning all LEDs on Description Turns all the LEDs on the operation panel on Purpose To check if all the LEDs on the operation panel light Method Press the start key All the LEDs on the operation panel light Press the stop key or wait
265. item to be set 2 Change the value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting CCD R Lowest density of the R regard as the dust 0 to 255 175 CCD G Lowest density of the G regard as the dust 0 to 255 170 CCD B Lowest density of the B regard as the dust 0 to 255 160 3 Press the start key The value is set Setting Initialization of original reading position 1 Select CLEAR 2 Press the start key The setting is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U089 Outputting a MIP PG pattern Description Selects and outputs the MIP PG pattern created in the machine Purpose To check copier status other than scanner when adjusting image printing using MIP PG pattern output with out scanning Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the MIP PG pattern to be output Display PG pattern to be output Purpose GRAYSCALE To check the laser scanner unit En engine output characteristics MONO LEVEL To check the drum quality 256 LEVEL To check resolution reproducibility in printing 1 dot LINE To check fine line reproducibility To adjust the position of the laser scanner unit lateral squareness To change the output conditions of MONO LEVEL and 1dot LINE use the or nume
266. iti M4 x 14TP F degli accessori di fissaggio C destro e sinistro 2 Ruotare la vite di regolazione 3 sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra per regolare la posizione del DP Per l esempio di copia d ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso antiorario e spostare il DP verso l interno Per l esempio di copia e ruotare la vite di regolazione in senso orario e spostare il DP in avanti Entit modifica per scala circa 1 mm 3 Eseguire una copia di prova Wa DP HEWES 1 RASA MAN Zc OS EME CO AP MA X 14TP I4 CR gt 2A BEE AY J SAS WRT 3 DAE DP ME XT REPE C0 DINE eB AA DP HEA fil MATER Ce MERTE Ie Pe UR RRA DP 725 EIE H o Ta EE PLI EKE 2 Imm 3 HEFT MIA EB DP Hosa 1 Zu BEAR C DER MA X 14TP F 24 EE 5 2 FEY ZI MECA 3 ZE LL DP Afer E MET AEP YW d OYE ud ean LDP AMARGAS ESFY DW e OYE WHEE Ae AICI UL ARE FRAT 1 ARO 7 0 OB bE 1mm 3 TARIF 11 a a a a 12 43mm 4mm y mm Amm Repeat the steps above until the gap of line 2 of copy example shows the following reference values Reference value For single copying The horizontal gap of line 2 should be within x3 mm For duplex copying The horizontal gap of line 2 should be within 4 mm After adjustmen
267. ition for originals from the DP Description Adjusts the position for scanning originals from the DP Performs the test copy at the five scanning positions after adjusting Purpose Used when the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used Run U071 to adjust the timing of DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed Setting 1 Press the start key Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA Starting position adjustment for 55 to 55 0 0 11 mm scanning originals TEST POSITION Scanning position for the test copy Oto 3 0 71 mm originals Select ADJUST DATA of the screen for selecting an item Change the setting using the or numeric keys When the setting value is increased the scanning position moves to the right and it moves to the left when the setting value is decreased Press the start key The value is set Select TEST POSITION of the screen for selecting an item Select the Scanning position using the or numeric keys Press the start key The value is set Set the original the one which density is known in the DP and press the system menu key The screen for the test copy mode is displayed Press the start key Test copy is executed 10 Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 4 and check that no black line appears and the image is normally scan
268. ition switch SHPSW Detects the optical system in the home position Original detection switch ODSW Operates the original size detection sensor Original size detection sensor OSDS Detects the size of the original Registration switch RSW Controls the secondary paper feed start timing Eject switch ESW sese Detects a paper misfeed in the fuser section Feedshift switch FSSW Detects a paper misfeed in the switchback section in a duplex copy Toner sensor TNS i Detects the toner density in the developing unit Toner container detection switch TODOS Wisin mt Detects the presence of the toner container Toner container sensor TCS Detects the quantity of toner in a toner container Waste toner box detection switch WIDS Winona Detects the presence of the waste toner box Overflow sensor OFS Detects when the waste toner box is full Humidity sensor HUMS eeeeeeeee Detects absolute humidity Fuser unit thermistor 1 FTH1 Detects the heat roller temperature Fuser unit thermistor 2 FTH2 Detects the heat roller temperature Front cover switch FRCSW Detects the opening and closing of the front cover Left cover 1 switch LC1SW Detects the opening and closing of the left cover 1
269. ive trailing edge registration motor Replace trailing edge registration motor The trailing edge registration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective trailing edge registration home position sen sor Replace the trailing edge registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 37 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Stapler moving motor 1 error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 1 5 s passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler moving motor 1 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler moving motor 1 Replace stapler moving motor 1 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Stapler problem optional document finisher When the stapler motor is driving the ON status of the stapler home position sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has
270. jection cover D with the screw 6 that has fixed the upper left cover in step 5 and the screw 7 each 17 Fixer le grand couvercle d jection D l aide de la vis 6 qui fixait auparavant le couvercle sup rieur gauche l tape 5 et la vis 7 respectivement 17 Encaje la cubierta de expulsi n grande D con el tornillo 6 que est fijado en la cubierta superior izquierda en el paso 5 y el tornillo 7 a cada una 17 Die gro amp e Auswurfabdeckung D jeweils mit der Schraube 6 die in Schritt 5 an der oberen linken Abdeckung angebracht wurde und der Schraube 7 befestigen 17 Montate il coperchio grande di espulsione carta D con la vite 6 che fissa il coperchio superiore sinistro nel passo 5 e con una vite 7 per ciascuno 17 FIG ES E e BY Z E EA ROAR META AE LHFA ECO 17 FIR 5 CE EX 3 AE LC v TE EA 6 BEOEY 7 FL ATC JOEBAA X D ZO RI 5 SEO ra LA 18 Fitthe staple cover C using the two screws 3 on the left side to secure and using the two screws 2 that have been removed in step 3 and a TP screw M3 x 05 L 18 Fixer le couvercle d agrafes C l aide des deux vis 3 sur le c t gauche pour le fixer et l aide des deux vis 2 qui ont t enlev es dans l tape 3 etune vis TP M3 x 05 L 18 Encaje la cubierta de grapas C utilizando los dos tornillos 3 en el lado izquierdo para asegurar y utilizando los dos tornillos
271. k procedures corrective measures C9000 DP communication problem Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC7 on optional DP connector termi the scanner PWB and the connector of the A communication error is detected nals DP and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for PWB correct operation C9040 DP lift motor going up error Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti optional DP of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable If none The pulse count raised to 10000 at lift connector remedy or replace the cable ing however the DE lift switeh COMANDI Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift motor and check for cor be turned on After one time retry the DP DP lift mot t ti lift limit switch could not be turned on IE MOLI rect operauon Malfunction of the Replace the DP lift upper limit switch and DP lift upper limit check for correct operation switch Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti of the DP lift upper nuity within the connector cable If none limit switch con remedy or replace the cable nector Defective DP main Replace the DP main PWB and check for PWB correct operation C9050 DP lift motor going down error Loose connection Reinsert the connector Also check for conti optional DP of the DP lift motor nuity within the connector cable If none
272. l and make test copies Attaching the language label 230 V specifications only According to need attach the correspond language label Completion of the machine installation 1 2 9 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Setting initial copy modes Factory settings are as follows Maintenance item No Contents Factory setting U253 U260 U285 U326 U328 U342 U343 1 2 10 Switching between double and single counts Selecting the timing for copy counting Setting service status page Setting the black line cleaning indication Side ejection setting Setting the ejection restriction Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Double count After ejection ON ON 1 2 3 Installing the key counter option Key counter installation requires the following parts Key counter P N 82142540 Key counter set P N 302A369705 Supplied parts of key counter set Key counter cover P N 24360010 Key counter retainer P N 66060030 Key counter cover retainer P N 66060022 Key counter mount P N 66060040 Key counter socket assembly P N 41529210 Two 2 M3 x 6 bronze flat head screws P N B2303060 One 1 M4 x 30 tap tight S screw P N B1B54300 Four 4 M4 x 6 bronze TP screws P N B4304060 Two 2 M4 x 10 bronze TP screws P N B4304100 One 1 M3 x 8 bronze binding screw P N B1303080 One 1 M4 x 6 chrome TP screw P N B4104060 One 1 M4 x 20 tap tight S screw P N 7BB10
273. l fitting To adjust DP open close angle 60 degrees 9 Install angle control fitting D at the rear side of the right hinge with two M4 x 14TP screws F Installer la fixation d angle Pour r gler l angle d ouverture de ferme ture du DP de 60 degr s 9 Placer la fixation d angle D l arri re de la charni re droite l aide des deux vis TP M4 x 14 F Instale el herraje de control de ngulo Para ajustar el DP abra o cierre el ngulo 60 grados 9 Instale el herraje de control de ngulo D en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha con dos tornillos TP M4 x 14 F Installieren der Winkeleinstellbefesti gung Einstellen des Offnungs SchlieRungswin kels des DP um 60 Grad 9 Winkeleinstellbefestigung D an der R ck Seite des rechten Scharniers mit zwei M4 x 14TP Schrauben F befestigen Montaggio dell accessorio di regola zione angolare Per regolare l angolo di chiusura apertura del DP a 60 gradi 9 Montare l accessorio di regolazione angolare D sul lato posteriore della cerniera destra con due viti M4 x 14TP F Sc ASH PEE TES DP HAFKAR WEA 60 I 9 FEAT EB BORE NY Je HEU PUMA X 14TP ERAT Cro Lf ESE DI BERHEAORY Hit DP HRABE 60 EI RET SHA 9 ht v SHANTER M4 X 14TP P 2 AG Feux E D EHO ITS To adjust DP open close angle 30 degrees 10 Remove four screws 11 and then remove rear cover 12 of DP A Pour r gler l angle d ouver
274. l for adjustment GREEN Setting the green patch for the original for adjustment BLUE Setting the blue patch for the original for adjustment 2 Selectthe item to be set 3 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range L Setting the L value 0 0 to 100 0 a Setting the a value 200 0 to 200 0 b Setting the b value 200 0 to 200 0 4 Press the start key The value is set 5 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the enterprise mode Description Sets whether or not the enterprise mode setting is enabled Purpose According to user request changes the setting Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Enterprise mode setting is enabled OFF Enterprise mode setting is disabled Initial setting ON Inch specifications OFF Metric specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 73 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U901 Checking clearing copy counts by paper feed locations Description Displays or clears copy counts by paper feed locations Purpose To check the time to replace consumable parts Also to clear the counts after repl
275. l originale a e la linea 2 delle posizioni dell esempio di copia Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura Valore di riferimento Per la copia singola lo scostamento orizzontale della linea 2 deve limitarsi a 3 mm Per la copia duplex lo scostamento orizzontale della linea 2 deve limitarsi a 4 mm 42 DP MEHLE 1 ARR Ca LAI SA ER C2 ZA ADAP TA BER BO RIAD BRE ERES ETS EEG gt OO RISEN amp 2 MICA AE 3mm PY XY FP AUS 2x 2 ACA RE 4mm Y DP 355 HE52 1 fia a Dik 1 LIE UP VOR 2 Odio TER 5 THBEEEADOG RO FI CHAE AT lt B gt HOB 2 DEATA 3mm DIP HORA 0 OFERTA 4mm DIP 10 Adjusting the DP oblique position 1 Loosen two M4 x 14TP screws F of right and left fixing fittings C 2 Turn adjusting screw 3 at the rear side of the right hinge to adjust the DP position For copy example d Turn the adjusting screw counterclockwise and move the DP to the inner side For copy example e Turn the adjusting screw clockwise and move the DP to the front side Amount of change per scale Approx 1 mm 3 Perform a test copy R glage de la position oblique du DP 1 Desserrer les deux vis TP M4 x 14 F des fixations C droite et gauche 2 Tourner la vis de r glage 3 l arri re de la charni re droite pour r gler la
276. laser light may damage eyes Escasa AOTT ela DX REDE diii G Handle the charger sections with care They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if handled improperly eene nnne nennen nens A e 4h CAUTION Wear safe clothing If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties make sure they are safely secured so they will not be caught in rotating sections i A Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine Keep away from chains and belts A Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot LN Check that the fixing unit thermistor heat and press rollers are clean Dirt on them can cause abnormally high temperatures nante cnn cnc Q Do not remove the ozone filter if any from the copier except for routine replacement O e Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high voltage components when removing them always hold the plug itself narco emm eem ennemis N Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped If necessary protect it with a cable cover or other appropriate item enne nnns ennen EnEn N Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks o e Remove toner completely from electronic components nn nnnnnnnnnn A Run
277. lecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking clearing the service call counts Description Displays or clears the service call code counts by types Purpose To check the service call code status by types Also to clear the service call code counts after replacing con sumable parts Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description COUNT Displays clears the service call counts TOTAL COUNT Displays the total service call counts Method Displays clears the service call counts 1 Select COUNT The count for service call detection by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys 3 Select the counts for all service call codes and press the clear key 4 Press the start key The count is cleared The individual counter cannot be cleared 5 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method Displays the total jam counts 1 Select TOTAL COUNT The total number of service call counts by type is displayed 2 Change the screen using the cursor up down keys The total number of service call count cannot be cleared 3 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 75 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U905 Checking clearing counts by optional devices Descript
278. lem with paper feeder paper convey ing clutch Check see service manual of 3000 sheet paper feeder 10 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in verti cal paper conveying section Jam code 18 Broken feed switch 1 2 3 actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn following switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Feed switch 1 2 3 registration switch Defective feed pulleys or feed rollers Check visually and replace 11 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying jam in optional paper feeder vertical paper con veying section Jam code 19 Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Broken paper feeder feed Switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed Switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch 12 A paper jam in t
279. ler 7 and upper fuser cover Us fa Refit the fuser unit fy Connector Figure 1 5 68 1 5 33 2GN 2GP 2GR 7 Adjusting front position of the fuser unit adjusting lateral squareness Follow the procedure below if the drum is not parallel to the fuser unit and therefore paper is not fed straight to the fuser section and the trailing edge of image on either the front or rear side becomes longer Procedure 1 5 34 Place the original on the contact glass Press the start key and make a test copy at 100 magnification Is the image correct End Original Copy example 1 Figure 1 5 69 Tighten the two screws Refit the front left cover and close the front cover Open the front cover and remove the front left cover see page 1 5 13 Loosen the screw holding each of the fuser unit and adjusting spacer For copy example 1 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the black arrow gt to raise the front position of the fuser unit For copy example 2 Move the adjusting spacer in the direction of the white arrow 4m to lower the front position of the fuser unit Fuser unit e ren Copy example 2 Screw Adjusting spacer Figure 1 5 70 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 8 Others 1 Detaching and refitting the ozone filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Remove the oz
280. letion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U067 Adjusting the scanner center line Description Adjusts the scanner center line of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original Adjustment 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step ADJUST DATA 1 Scanner center line 70 to 70 0 0 08 mm ADJUST DATA2 Scanner center line rotate copying 25 to 25 0 0 10 mm Press the system menu key Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Scanner center line nog Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 11 7 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U067 U403 U072 U404 P 1 3 65 P 1 3 30 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 25 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U068 Adjusting the scanning pos
281. lsione 12 7 0 P2 RZZQD lade FHRA AR OD 7 EX 01 2 EAE L HEHA 12 4H DAT 8 Remove the screw 13 located at the front of the static charge eliminator of the MFP fit the flat spring ejection I from the lower side and secure it with the removed screw 13 8 Retirer la vis 13 situ e l avant du dispositif d limination de charge statique du MFP mettre en place le dispositif d jection ressort plat I par le c t inf rieur puis le fixer l aide de la vis retir e 13 8 Quite el tornillo 13 ubicado en el frente del eliminador de carga est tica del MFP encaje la expulsi n por resorte plano 1 del lado inferior y aseg relo con el tornillo quitado 13 8 Die Schraube 13 an der Vorderseite des E ntst rers f r statische Aufladung des MFP entfernen dann den Blattfederauswurf 1 von der Unterseite einpassen und mit der entfernten Schraube 13 befestigen 8 Rimuovere la vite 13 situata nella parte frontale dell eliminatore di cariche statiche dell MFP montare la molla piatta a espulsione 1 nel lato inferiore e fissarla con la vite rimossa 13 8 HE FAST ERRE dE BU E 17 E eR 22 13 Ja IMF Tet ite AA HERE OO TEIDE BA 1 22 13 DUDA BRE 8 AK ORBEA OME A 13 1 Ke Hx DAL ARN HEM D EFD HVILER 13 1 4 CHO HITS 9 Remove the blue screw 14 from the tran
282. macorriente de la pared Vorbereitung Schalten Sie vor der Installation des Fixierers unbedingt den Hauptschalter des MFP aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker des MFP von der Netzsteckdose ab Preparazione Al momento dell installazione della finitrice assicuratevi innanzitutto di spegnere I MFP e scollegarne il cavo di alimentazione dalla presa di rete REGR ERRIA An AUCEII MP ELI Xen WORK HR F MERA EMIR Ri Ma y ur E ERE TA m VR AB IU AERE MFP AS KORA VAA y F OFF ICL BRT Y NUL CHEBEIT IIE 1 Pull the lever toward the front side to raise the operation section and secure it using the operation section securing pin M Note After the finisher is installed the operation section is secured and the angle cannot be adjusted 2 Open the left transfer cover and the front cover Tirer le levier vers l avant pour lever la section de commande et le fixer l aide de la broche de fixation de la section de commande M Note Une fois que le finisseur a t install la section de commande est fix e et il est impossible de r gler l angle N Ouvrir le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant Tire de la palanca hacia el lado delantero para que suba la secci n de funcionamiento y asegure utilizando el pasador de fijaci n de la secci n de funcionamiento M Nota Despu s
283. manually Replace the original switchback switch if indica tion of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not dis played in reverse Document finisher With 5 V DC present at CN14 1 and CN14 3 on the finisher main PWB check if CN14 2 and CN14 4 on the finisher main PWB remains low or high when the paper entry sensor is turned on and off If it does replace the paper entry sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Built in finisher Extremely curled paper Change the paper Defective paper conveying Switch With 5 V DC present at YC2 23 on the finisher control PWB check if YC2 21 on the finisher control PWB remains low or high when the paper conveying switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper conveying switch Check if the feedshift roller or feedshift pulley is deformed Check and remedy Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 33 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying fin isher stapler jam Jam code 82 3000 sheet document finishe r document finisher Defective staple home posi tion sensor Run maintenance item U241 and turn the staple home position sensor on and off manually Replace the sensor if indication of the corresponding sensor on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Built in finisher T
284. me paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 2044 ms 30 ppm 1582 ms 40 50 ppm 13 No paper feed from optional cassette 4 The paper feeder feed switch PFFSW does not turn on within the specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on the clutch is then succes sively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time paper feed from optional paper feeder 1562 ms 30 ppm 1209 ms 40 50 ppm 14 No paper feed from MP tray The MP feed switch MPFSW does not turn on within the specified time of the MP paper feed clutch MPPFCL turning on the clutch is then successively turned off for 1 s and turned back on but the switch again fails to turn on within the specified time 5056 ms 30 ppm 3913 ms 40 50 ppm 15 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section 1 Paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 does not turn on within specified time of paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 823 ms 30 ppm 637 ms 40 50 ppm 16 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con veying section 2 Paper path sensor 2 PPSENS2 does not turn on within specified time of the paper path sensor 3 PPSENS3 turning on paper feed from optional 3000 sheet paper feeder 879 ms 30 ppm 681 ms 40 50 ppm 17 Jam in paper feeder horizontal paper con vey
285. mple 1 example 2 Enter 993 using the numeric keys Figure 1 5 48 Press the start key Refit the laser scanner unit and turn the main power switch on Select PG2 Press the system menu key Press the start key and make h RE Any at 100 magnification Turn the main switch off and carry out steps 1 to 7 of 5 Detaching and refitting the laser scanner unit see page 1 5 21 For copy example 1 Loosen the screw in the direction of the white arrow o gt Reduce the height of the LSU spacer in the direction of the white arrow gt For copy example 2 Tighten the screw in the direction of the black arrow mp Press the stop key to Increase the height of the LSU spacer in exit maintenance mode the direction of the black arrow mp Is the image correct End LSU spacer Figure 1 5 49 1 5 23 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 5 4 Drum section 1 Detaching and refitting the drum unit Follow the procedure below to replace the drum unit Cautions Avoid direct sunlight or strong light when detaching and refitting the drum unit Never touch the drum surface when holding the drum unit Procedure 1 Remove the developing unit see page 1 5 26 E oe 2 Remove the main charger unit see page 1 Qh P 5 25 AQ ie oe 3 Remove the screw and the drum unit 4 Replace the drum unit and install the unit 5 Perform maintenance mode U110 to clear the count
286. ms are logged When the occurrence excessed 16 the oldest Occurrence is removed The total page count at the time of the paper jam Log code 2 digit hexa decimal 5 categories a Cause of a paper jam b Paper source c Paper size d Paper type e Paper eject Service Call Log Count Service Code Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of self diag nostics error If the occurrence of the previ ous diagnostics error is less than 8 all of the diagnostics errors are logged The total page count at the time of the self diagnostics error Self diagnostic error code See page 1 4 22 Maintenance Log Count Item Remembers 1 to 8 of occurrence of replace ment If the occurrence of the previous replace ment of toner container is less than 8 all of the occurrences of replace ment are logged The total page count at the time of the replace ment of the toner con tainer Code of maintenance replacing item 1 byte 2 categories First byte Replacing item 01 Toner container 02 Maintenance kit Second byte Type of replacing item 00 fixed Counter Log Comprised of three log counters includ ing paper jams self diagnostics errors and replacement of the toner container f Jam g Self diagnostic error h Maintenance item replacing Indicates the log counter of paper jams depending on location Refer to Paper Jam Log
287. n FSSOL On Off activate 24 V DC power output Connected to the main PWB 2 3 12 oO ANDO AF WY y ek e aR 0 N gt SCKN EGSI EGSO SBSY SDIR EGIRN OUTPEN PVSYNC 5VD SGND SGND LDON PRST PMD HLDENG 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC pulse 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC pulse 5V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC CLOCK signal Serial communication data signal Serial communication data signal SBSY signal SDIR signal EGIRN signal OUTPEN signal PVSYNC signal 5 V DC power output Ground Ground LDON signal PRST signal PMD signal HLDENG signal Maintenance parts list 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance part name Part No Alternative Fig Ref Name used in service manual Name used in parts list part No No No Upper lower paper feed pulley PULLEY PAPER FEED 2AR07220 4 2 Upper lower separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 2AR07230 4 3 Upper lower forwarding pulley PULLEY FEEDA 2BJ06010 4 5 MP paper feed pulley UPPER PULLEY BYPASS 61706770 11 49 MP separation pulley PULLEY SEPARATION 2AR07230 11 2 MP forwarding pulley PULLEY FEED A 2BJ06010 11 6 MP feed roller 1 ROLLER2 BYPASSFEED 302BL06541 2BL06541 12 13 MP feed roller 2 ROLLER4 BYPASSFEED 302BL06561 2BL06561 12 14 MP feed pulley RIGHT PULLEY FEED 33906660 12 22 Left registration roller ROLLER REGIST 2FG16021 7 35 Right registration roller RIGHT ROLL
288. n la plaque de montage de l agrafeuse risque d tre d form e ce qui causera des anomalies de fonctionnement Nota Cuando se coloca la unidad de transferencia A en el piso o similar aseg rese de colocarlo al rev s de lo contrario la placa de montaje del grapador puede deformarse provocando un mal funcionamiento Hinweis Wenn die Transfereinheit A auf den Boden oder dergleichen gestellt wird muss sie auf den Kopf gestellt werden Anderenfalls kann die Heftermontageplatte verformt werden was zu einer Funktionsst rung f hrt Nota Quando si posiziona l unit di trasferimento A sul pavimento o in luoghi simili occorre posizionarla rovesciata In caso contrario la piastra di montaggio della pinzatrice potrebbe venire deformata provocando malfunzionamenti DES SW VELE A BOTH EN SoHE HB MUERA ZIE G8 ACER Ji WB GERE finan h A ERES AAN LS TIR LIC LIEIREB CX TOLE LA F TF7RARABE UL TESOMA EES Preparation When installing a finisher be sure to turn the MFP main switch off and disconnectthe MFP power plug from the wall outlet Pr paration Lors de l installation d un finisseur veiller mettre l interrupteur principal du MFP hors tension et d brancher la fiche d alimentation du MFP de la prise murale Preparaci n Cuando se instala un finalizador aseg rese de desconectar el interruptor principal del MFP y desenchufar el cable el ctrico del to
289. n charger wire 5 A white line appears longitudinally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Check procedures corrective measures Foreign matter in the developing unit Check if the magnetic brush is formed uniformly Replace the developing unit if any foreign matter see page 1 5 26 1 4 46 Dirty shading plate Clean the shading plate 6 A black line appears longitudinally Causes Copy example 2GN 2GP 2GR Check procedures corrective measures Dirty contact glass Clean the contact glass Dirty or flawed drum Perform the drum refresh operation If the drum is flawed replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Deformed or worn cleaning blade Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty scanner mirror Clean the scanner mirror Dirty main charger wire 7 A black line appears laterally Copy example Causes Clean the wire or if it is extremely dirty replace it see page 1 5 25 Check procedures corrective measures Flawed drum Replace the drum unit see page 1 5 24 Dirty developing section Clean any part contaminated with toner in the developing section Leaking main charger housing Clean the main charger wire and grid Leaking separation electrode 8 One side of the copy image is darker than the ot
290. n de r glage automatique d original du DP vers le bas et placer l original en introduisant en premier dans le DP le c t sur lequel F et R sont indiqu s Ex cuter le mode d entretien U411 Appuyer sur les touches DP FACE DOWN DP FACE VERS LE BAS NORMAL TARGET CIBLE NORMALE START INPUT D MARRER ENTR E puis START D MARRER afin de r gler la surface arri re 6 Lorsque le message RESULT OK 00 r sultat OK 00 s affiche sur l cran le r glage est termin Si le message ERROR XX erreur XX s affiche le r glage a chou V rifier la position de r glage de l original et r p ter les tapes 4 et 5 jusqu ce que le message RESULT OK 00 r sultat OK 00 s affiche Pour plus de details se reporter au manuel d entretien a 4 Una vez hecho el ajuste del anverso dirija F y R del original de ajuste automatico del DP hacia abajo y coloque el original insertando en el DP en pri mer lugar el lado en el que estan marcados F y R 5 Active el modo de mantenimiento U411 Pulse las teclas DP FACE DOWN CARA ABAJO NORMAL TARGET DESTINO NORMAL START INPUT INICIAR ENTRADA y START INICIO para ajustar el reverso 6 Cuando aparece en la pantalla RESULT OK 00 resultado correcto 00 el ajuste ha finalizado Si aparece ERROR XX el ajuste ha fallado Com pruebe la posici n del original colocado y repita los pasos 4 a 5 hasta que aparezca RESULT OK 00 resultado correcto 00 Para mas detalles lea el manual de servicio
291. n for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 47 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U240 1 3 48 Checking the operation of the finisher Description Turns each motor and solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher ON Purpose To check the operation of each motor and solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be checked The screen for executing each item is displayed Display Description FINISHER MOTOR FINISHER SOL MAIL BOX BOOKLET Checking the motor of the 3000 sheet document finisher Checking the solenoid of the 3000 sheet document finisher Checking the motor and solenoid of the mail box Checking the motor of the centerfold unit Method Checking the motor of the 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Select the item to be operated The operation starts Display Motor FEED IN MOTOR M FEED IN MOTORL CONV MOTOR H CONV MOTOR M CONV MOTOR L EJECT MOTOR H EJECT MOTOR M EJECT MOTOR L SUB PATH MOTOR H SUB PATH MOTOR M BUNDLE UP MOTOR WIDTH TEST A3 WIDTH TEST LD STAPLE FR MOTOR STAPLE S MOTOR STAPLE MOTOR TRAY MOTOR PUNCH MOTOR PUDDLE MOTOR BUNDLE DOWN MTR Paper entry motor PEM is turned on counterwise Paper entry motor PEM is turned on clockwise Paper conveying motor is turned on at high speed Paper conveying motor is turned on at middle speed Paper conveying motor is
292. n of connector YC4 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the scanner home position switch and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Defective scanner home position switch Replace the scanner home position switch Defective scanner motor Replace the scanner motor The mirror frame exposure lamp or scanner wire is defective Check if the mirror flames and exposure lamp are on the rail And check the scanner wire winds correctly Exposure lamp problem After the reading starting when input value at the time of exposure lamp illumi nation does not exceed the threshold value between 5 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the scanner PWB and the connector on the inverter PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Defective CCD PWB Replace the CCD PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective exposure lamp or inverter PWB Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB Incorrect shading position Adjust the position of the contact glass shading plate If the problem still occurs replace the scanner home position switch 1 4 29 2GN 2GP 2GR Con
293. n the drum surface Figure 2 1 9 Laser scanner unit 1 1 Laser diode PWB LDPWB 2 Collimator lens 3 Cylindrical lens 4 Polygon motor PM 5 Polygon mirror 6 f0 lens 7 Mirror 8 Mirror 9 BD sensor mirror 10 Cylindrical correcting lens 11 BD sensor 2GN 2GP 2GR Na I 10 2 1 8 Figure 2 1 10 Laser scanner unit 2 Laser diode Generates the laser beam which forms a latent image on the drum Collimator lens Collimates the diffused laser beam emitted from the laser diode to convert it into a cylindrical beam Cylindrical lens Shapes the collimated laser beam to suit the printing resolution Polygon mirror Nine facet mirror that rotates with each face reflecting the laser beam toward the drum for one main direction scan f lens Corrects for non linearity of the laser beam scanning speed on the drum surface keeps the beam diame ter constant and corrects for the vertical alignment of the polygon mirror to ensure that the focal plane of the laser beam is on the drum surface Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction Mirror Reflects the laser beam and changes the irradiation direction BD sensor mirror Reflects the laser beam to the BD sensor to generate the main direction horizontal sync sig nal Cylindrical correcting lens Corrects for the deviation of the laser beam reflected by the BD sensor mirror to the BD sensor BD sensor Detects the beam
294. n when paper jam occurs due to an inferior fitting of the centerfold adjuster guides to paper Adjustment of booklet stapling position Adjusts the booklet stapling position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Adjustment of center folding position Adjusts the center folding position in the stitching mode if the position is not proper Start 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set The screen for setting each item is displayed Display Description FINISHER 3000 Adjustment of the 3000 sheet document finisher BOOKLET FOLDER Adjustment of the centerfold unit FINISHER B IN Adjustment of the built in finisher Setting 3000 sheet document finisher 1 Selectthe item to be set Display Description PUNCH REG ADJ Adjustment of registration stop timing in punch mode PUNCH POS ADJ Adjustment of the paper stop timing in punch mode WIDTH F HP ADJ Adjustment of front side registration home position WIDTH R HP ADJ Adjustment of rear side registration home position STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of front and back stapling home position T STAPLE HP ADJ Adjustment of slanted stapling home position Setting adjustment of registration stop timing 1 Select PUNCH REG ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step Adjustment of registration stop timing 20 to 20 0 1 ms Description If skewed paper conv
295. nal a and line 2 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value adjust the gap according to the following procedure lt Reference value gt Vertical gap of line 2 within 2 5 mm V rification de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP 1 V rifier l cart entre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie Si l cart exc de la valeur de r f rence le r gler selon la proc dure suivante Valeur de r f rence cart vertical de la ligne 2 2 5 mm Verificaci n de la sincronizaci n de extremo gu a del DP 1 Compruebe la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 del ejemplo de copia Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia aj stela siguiendo este procedimiento Valor de referencia Separaci n vertical de la l nea 2 dentro de 2 5 mm Pr fen des Vorderkantentaktes des DP 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Ori ginals a und der Linie 2 des Kopierbei spiels pr fen Wenn der Abstand gr er als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem fol genden Verfahren einstellen lt Bezugswert gt Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 2 5 mm Verifica della fasatura del bordo di entrata 1 Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea 1 sull originale a e la linea 2 dell esempio di copia Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferimento regolare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura lt Valore di riferiment
296. nal position and close the transfer left cover and the front cover 13 Remettre le support d agrafes retir auparavant lors de l tape 3 sa position d origine et refermer le couvercle de transfert gauche et le couvercle avant 13 Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posici n original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera 13 Den in Schritt 3 entfernten Heftklammerhalter wieder an seiner urspr nglichen Stelle anbringen und dann die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung schlieBen 13 Montate nuovamente il vassoio graffette che stato rimosso nel passo 3 nella sua posizione originale e chiudete il coperchio di trasferimento sinistro e quindi il coperchio frontale 13 EME SR AA AM 4 325 A AAA i 13 FII 3 COM UL 7E AP VV de TER V BY NO MERA 23 38 E Ott SAA D 5 Operation check 1 Insert the power plug of the MFP into an outlet and turn the main switch on 2 Press Org P aper F inishing and Output Tray on the touch panel in this order to select J ob separator Tray V rification du fonctionnement 1 Ins rer la fiche d alimentation du MFP dans une prise murale et mettre l interrupteur principal sous tension 2 Presser Org Papier Finition et Bac de sortie sur l cran tactile dans cet ordre pour s lectionner Plateau du s par trav Verificaci n del funcionamiento 1 Enchufe el cable el ctr
297. nce item No is displayed Checking the drum number Description Displays the drum number Purpose To check the drum number Method Press the start key The drum number is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the drum history Description Displays the past record of machine number and the drum counter Purpose To check the count value of machine number and the drum counter Method Press the start key Past record of 5 cases is displayed Display Description MACHINE No 1 to 5 Past record of machine number COUNT 1 to 5 Past record of drum counter Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 40 Initial setting for the developing unit Description Replenishes toner to the developing unit to a certain level from the toner container that has been installed Purpose To operate when installing the machine or replacing the developing unit Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 Press the start key Toner installation is started and the output value of the sensor and execution time are displayed Display Description TONER SENSOR Output value of the sensor TIME SEC Execution time Completion Press the stop key after initial setting is complete The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is dis played
298. ned Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 26 Adjusting the DP magnification Description Adjusts the DP original scanning speed Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification is incorrect in the main scanning direction or auxiliary scanning direction when the optional DP is used Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step CIS MAIN ADJ Magnification in the main scanning 25 to 25 0 0 1 96 direction of CIS CONVEY SPEED Magnification in the auxiliary scan 25 to 25 0 1 96 ning direction of CCD CIS SUB ADJ Magnification in the auxiliary scan 15 to 10 0 05 96 ning direction of CIS Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U070 Adjustment main scanning direction of CIS 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value 111 Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 12 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U070 U071 U404 P
299. ng de la rainure Ne pas toucher la borne de la carte circuits FAX Tenir les parties inf rieure et sup rieure de la carte circuits FAX ou la saillie de la carte pour ins rer la carte circuits FAX Ne pas ins rer la carte circuits FAX dans l OPT2 Instale la tarjeta de circuitos de fax 2 Inserte la tarjeta de circuitos de fax A a lo largo de la ranura de OPT1 y asegu rela con los dos tornillos 1 que ha quitado en el paso 1 Oriente la etiqueta 3 de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax hacia la derecha e inserte la tarjeta a lo largo de la ranura No toque el terminal de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax Sujete las partes supe rior e inferior de la tarjeta de circuitos de fax o la saliente de la tarjeta para insertar la tarjeta de circuitos de fax Einbauen der FAX Leiterplatte 2 FAX Leiterplatte A in die Nut des Einbauschachts OPT1 einsetzen und Leiter platte mit den in Schritt 1 ausgebauten Schrauben 1 befestigen Die FAX Leiterplatte so in die Nut einsetzen dass der Aufkleber 3 nach rechts zeigt Die Kontakte der FAX Leiterplatte nicht ber hren Die FAX Leiterplatte bein Einsetzen oben und unten oder an dem Vorsprung festhalten FAX Leiterplatte nicht in Schacht OPT2 einsetzen Montaggio della scheda a circuiti FAX GUIDA ALL INSTALLAZIONE del sistema fax M FAX System M 222 Aft ES E zh z FAX System M axi FIRE A FAX Leiterplatt
300. ng edge registration second 45to45 O 0 09 mm page ADJUST DATAS Leading edge registration rotate 20to20 0 0 17 mm copying Adjustment leading edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 14 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U071 U404 P 1 3 66 1 3 28 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U071 Adjustment trailing edge registration 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original on the DP and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 3 decrease the value 1111 Copy Copy Copy example 1 example 2 example 3 Figure 1 3 15 5 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U071 U404 P 1 3 66 Completion Press the stop key
301. ning direction magnification error Carriage error Service call error DP status error DP open error Original is not detected N950 patch for the original error N850 patch for the original error N770 patch for the original error N650 patch for the original error N500 patch for the original error N300 patch for the original error N300 patch for the original error N950 patch for the original error Cyan patch for the original error Magenta patch for the original error Yellow patch for the original error Red patch for the original error Green patch for the original error Blue patch for the original error Other error Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item is displayed If the stop key is pressed during auto adjustment adjustment stops and no settings are changed 1 3 71 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U425 Setting the target Description The value that is indicated on the back of the chart to be used for adjustment should be entered Purpose Performs data input in order to correct for differences in originals during automatic adjustment Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N CCD CIS Entering the target values for scanner automatic adjustment Entering the target values for DP automatic adjustment
302. o gt Scostamento verticale della linea 2 com preso fra 2 5 mm LHE DP RAER 1 Fre Ef Ca Ie OO AVAL EV REAR E054 C2 ZIE URM Bate EEL EH FUA RUPEE FR t o Mt RO MER 2 5mm Y cia BAR DP 31 gt THER 1 JAR a OH 1 EAL v7 vo 2 Ord XV MESS Do Tv EAR Gr KOFI Cad 2e 1T lt AER gt 2 OEP Pa 2 5mm LAN Salone the DP leading edge timing 1 Set the maintenance mode U071 and adjust the copy example for each of single duplex and 180 degree rotation copying respectively For the single copying adjusts the ADJUST DATA1 leading edge For the duplex copying adjusts the ADJUST DATAG rear side main scan direction For the 180 degree rotation copying adjusts the ADJUST DATAS 180 degree rotation R glage de la synchronisation du bord avant du DP 1 Ex cuter le mode d entretien UO71 et r gler l exemple de copie pour la copie recto la copie recto verso et la copie avec rotation de 180 degr s respectivement Pour la copie recto r gler ADJUST DATA r gler donn es1 bord avant Pour la copie recto verso r gler ADJUST DATAS r gler donn es3 direction du balayage princi pal arri re Pour la copie avec rotation de 180 degr s r gler ADJUST DATAS r gler donn es5 rotation de 180 degr s Ajuste de la sincronizaci n de extremo gu a del DP 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento U071 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado p
303. o variations between machines is initial ized based on the destination setting 4 Turn the main power switch off and on If initialization error occurs an error code is displayed See Error Codes on P 1 3 14 If ERROR 09 occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk And then and run maintenance item U021 for initialization again If other error occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item UO21 for initialization Initializing backup memory Description Initializes only the backup data for image processing Purpose To be executed as required Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to initialize Display Description MAIN ENGINE Initialize the backup data of main PWB and engine PWB SCANNER Initialize the backup data of scanner PWB DP Initialize the backup data of DP main PWB Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 4 Press the start key All data in the backup RAM is initialized 5 Turn the main power switch off and on If initialization error occurs an error code is displayed See Error Codes on P 1 3 14 If ERROR 09 occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk And then and run maintenance item U022 fo
304. obtained A C 2 B 2 2 Enter the values solved using the or numeric keys in MAIN ADJ 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 Toreturn to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Setting ADJUST ORIGINAL SUB 1 Measure distance from the leading edge of the original for adjustment to the black band in three points Measurement procedure 1 Measure the distances D 30 mm E 148 5 mm and C 267 mm along the main scanning direction 2 Apply the following formula for the values obtained D F 2 E 2 2 Enter the values solved using the or numeric keys in SUB ADJ 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 1 3 72 Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U425 Setting CIS 1 Selectthe item to be set Display Description N950 Setting the N950 patch for the original for adjustment N850 Setting the N850 patch for the original for adjustment N770 Setting the N770 patch for the original for adjustment N650 Setting the N650 patch for the original for adjustment N500 Setting the N500 patch for the original for adjustment N300 Setting the N300 patch for the original for adjustment CYAN Setting the cyan patch for the original for adjustment MAGENTA Setting the magenta patch for the original for adjustment YELLOW Setting the yellow patch for the original for adjustment RED Setting the red patch for the origina
305. of optional cassette 4 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken paper feeder feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective paper feeder feed switch With 5 V DC present at CN2 8 on the paper feeder main PWB check if CN2 7 on the paper feeder main PWB remains low when the paper feeder feed switch is turned on and off If it does replace the paper feeder feed switch Check if paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 malfunctions Run maintenance item U247 and select paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the sta tus and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 Check see service manual of paper feeder Problem Causes check procedures 2GN 2GP 2GR Corrective measures 6 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from MP tray Jam code 14 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the MP paper feed pulley MP forwarding pulley and MP separation pulley are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken MP feed switch actuator Check visually and replace switch Defective MP feed switch Run maintenance item U031 and turn MP feed switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse
306. og 4 Service Call Log Count Event Count Service Code 9876543 666554 02 11 42 02 02 4988 02 11 43 01 09 4988 02 11 44 02 11 4988 498 02 11 41 01 01 1103 a b c d e 1103 i 1103 02 11 41 01 01 1103 02 11 42 02 02 1027 02 11 43 01 09 1027 02 11 44 02 11 1027 02 11 45 03 91 1027 02 01 F0 01 01 550 01 01 01 01 01 28 01 09 01 01 01 7881214 F0 0030 578944 01 0100 5296 F0 4000 5295 F0 3010 2099 01 2100 1054 01 2100 809 01 2120 30 01 2100 MN OQ 4 O1 O Co 5 Maintenance Log Count 9045571 704511 7045 3454 3454 3454 417 35 M OQ 4 O O Oo Oo MN OQ 4 O1 O Co 6 Counter Log f J01 000 J19 000 J37 000 J61 002 g C0101 001 C2223 001 C3502 001 h M01 01 J02 000 J20 000 J38 000 J62 000 C0102 001 C2225 001 C3503 001 M02 01 J03 000 J21 000 J39 000 J63 000 C0107 001 C2228 001 C3552 001 J04 000 J22 000 J40 000 J64 000 C0108 001 C2259 001 C3553 001 nR J23 002 J41 002 gt J42 002 C3003 001 151 000 22002 001 C3411 001 J16 000 i C2030 001 C3412 001 J17 000 J53 000 C2031 001 C3421 001 J18 000 J36 000 J54 000 C2222 001 C3431 001 Figure 1 3 1 Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U000 Detail of event log System version Description System date Paper Jam Log Count Event Remembers 1 to 16 of occurrence If the occurrence of the previ ous paper jam is less than 16 all of the paper ja
307. olare lo scostamento stesso seguendo questa procedura lt Valore di riferimento gt Per l orientamento della scansione ausiliare lo scostamento verticale della linea 2 deve essere compreso fra 1 5 Per l orientamento della scansione principale lo scostamento orizzon tale della linea 3 deve essere compreso fra 1 5 A Ung DP original size 1 Set the maintenance mode U070 and adjust the copy example for each of single and duplex copying respectively For the single copying adjusts the CONVEY SPEED sub scan direc tion For the duplex copying adjusts the CIS MAIN ADJ rear side main scan direction and the CIS SUB ADJ rear side sub scan direction UE du format d original du DP Ex cuter le mode d entretien U070 et r gler l exemple de copie pour la copie recto et la copie recto verso respectivement Pour la copie recto r gler CONVEY SPEED vitesse d acheminement direction du balayage secondaire Pour la copie recto verso r gler CIS MAIN ADJ r glage principal du d tecteur d image contact direction du balayage principal arri re et CIS SUB ADJ r glage secondaire du d tecteur d image contact direction du balayage secondaire arri re a del tama o de original del DP 1 Active el modo de mantenimiento U070 y ajuste el ejemplo de copia para el copiado por una cara y para el copiado duplex respectivamente Para el copiado por una cara ajuste CONVEY SPEED velocidad de transporte
308. oller and fuser heater see page 1 5 30 and 31 Remove the fuser gear Fuser gear Figure 1 5 65 Remove the heat roller from the fuser unit Remove the C ring gear bearing and bush ing on the rear side of the heat roller and remove the C ring ground plate bearing and bushing on the front side Replace the heat roller and install the roller to fuser unit Heat roller Bearing Ground plate Bushing C ring Figure 1 5 66 Refit the fuser gear Refit the fuser heater press roller and upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit 1 5 32 Gear Bearing 2GN 2GP 2GR 6 Detaching and refitting the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 Procedure 1 2 3 10 11 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 Release the stopper of the fuser unit ther mistor 1 Remove the connector and remove the fuser unit thermistor 1 Replace the fuser unit thermistor 1 and install the thermistor to fuser unit Connector Fuser unit thermistor 1 Figure 1 5 67 Remove the press roller and fuser heater see page 1 5 30 and 31 Remove the heat roller see page 1 5 32 Remove the screw and the connector and then remove the fuser unit thermistor 2 Replace the fuser unit thermistor 2 and install the thermistor to fuser unit Refit the heat roller fuser heater press rol
309. on detection sensor MTMPDS Paper holder home position sensor PHHPS Main tray load detection sensor MTLDS Paper entry sensor PES Eject switch 1 ESW1 Eject switch 2 ESW2 Eject switch 3 ESW3 Staple home position switch 1 STHPSW1 Staple home position switch 2 STHPSW2 Internal tray paper entry sensor 1 ITPES1 Internal tray paper entry sensor 2 ITPES2 Paper detection sensor 1 PDS1 Paper detection sensor 2 PDS2 Paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 PCBHPS1 Paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 PCBHPS2 Side registration home position sensor 1 SRHPS1 Side registration home position sensor 2 SRHPS2 Paper conveying belt position detection sensor PCBDS Centerfold paper conveying sensor CPCS Maintenance item No Description 2GN 2GP 2GR U241 Method Checking the switch of the mail box 1 Turn the respective switches on and off manually to check the status When a switch is detected to be in the ON position the display for that switch will be highlighted Display Switches FEED IN SW EJECT SW COVER SW OVER FLOW SW 1 OVER FLOW SW 2 OVER FLOW SW 3 OVER FLOW SW 4 OVER FLOW SW 5 OVER FLOW SW 6 OVER FLOW SW 7 Mail paper entry switch MPESW Tray eject sensor TEJS Mail box cover open close switch MBCOSW Tray overflow switch 1 TOFSW1 Tray overflow switch 2 TOFSW2 Tray overflow switch 3 TOFSW3 Tray overflow switch 4 TOFSWA Tray
310. onal DP Reading cannot be performed correctly of CIS nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective CIS Replace CIS and check for correct opera tion Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Operation panel PNB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective opera tion panel PWB Replace the operation panel PWB and check for correct operation Main PWB checksum error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Memory checksum error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective expan sion memory Replace the expansion memory and check for correct operation Main PWB system error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Engine PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Scanner PWB communication error Defective main PWB Replace the main PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Engine ROM checksum error Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and c
311. one filter 1 from the machine left side Ozone filter 1 Figure 1 5 71 2 Open the filter cover of the machine rear Ozone filter 2 side and remove the ozone filter 2 a IS 3 Replace the ozone filter 1 and 2 and install D the filter SS ay Filter cover Figure 1 5 72 1 5 35 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Detaching and refitting the dust filter 1 and 2 Follow the procedure below to replace the dust filter 1 and 2 Procedure 1 Open the MP tray 2 Remove the dust filter 1 and 2 from the machine 3 Replace the dust filter 1 and 2 and install the filter 1 5 36 insi perm Dust filter 1 Dust filter 2 Figure 1 5 73 1 6 1 Upgrading the firmware 2GN 2GP 2GR Follow the procedure below to upgrade the firmware of main PWB engine PWB scanner PWB and MMI Firmware upgrading requires the following tools Compact Flash Products manufactured by SANDISK are recommended or USB memory NOTE When writing data to a new Compact Flash from a computer be sure to format it in advance Procedure 1 Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Insert Compact Flash or USB memory in a notch hole of the machine The Compact Flash must be inserted into the machine with its rear side facing up Insert the po
312. onectador blanco 27 de la bandeja intermediaria B en la unidad de transferencia Conecte los conectores grises 28 en los conectores del MFP tal como aparece en las figuras Conecte el conector gris 28 con m s patillas en el conector superior y el conector gris 28 con menos patillas en el conector inferior Die Zwischenablage B einf hren und den Steckverbinder wei 27 der Zwischenablage B an die Transfereinheit anschlieBen Die Steckverbinder grau 28 an die Steckverbinder des MFP anschlie en wie in der Abbildung gezeigt Schlie amp en Sie den Steckverbinder grau 28 mit mehr Stiften an den oberen Steckverbinder und den Steckverbinder grau 28 mit weniger Stiften an den unteren Steckverbinder an Inserite il vassoio intermedio B e collegatene il connettore bianco 27 all unit di trasferimento Quindi collegate i connettori grigio 28 ai connettori dell MFP come illustrato in figura Collegate il connettore grigio 28 con pi contatti al connettore superiore e il connettore grigio 28 con meno contatti connettore inferiore jfi APATICO HF EREDE Bei S ED 27 Ye Be Fe S AF A E BERE D Wu Biz FE Bet OK Q8 Xe Ber A E Bei RE E FERMARE 28 YL BF MU E ERAU A UBA F ETT XE BE I c URZAQB QD Am y ROAD IAE A ARTZ 71 28 ARO ENAMORAR AR
313. optional coin vender Also sets the details for coin vender operation such as mode and unit price This is an optional device which is currently supported only by Japanese specification machines so no setting is necessary Checking the operation panel keys Description Checks operation of the operation panel keys Purpose To check operation of all the keys and LEDs on the operation panel Method 1 Press the start key The screen for executing is displayed 2 COUNTO is displayed and the leftmost LED on the operation panel lights 3 Asthe keys lined up in the same line as the lit indicator are pressed in the order from the top to the bot tom the figure shown on the touch panel increases in increments of 1 When all the keys in that line are pressed and if there are any LEDs corresponding to the keys in the line on the immediate right the top LED in that line will light 4 When all the keys on the operation panel have been pressed all the LEDs light for up to 10 seconds Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting the paper size for the paper feeder Description Sets the size of paper used in optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Purpose To change the setting when the size of paper used in the paper feeder is changed Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the paper size A4 B5 or Letter
314. opyl alcohol Check if the upper lower forwarding pulleys upper lower paper feed pulleys or upper lower separation pulleys is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 2 Check if the MP forwarding pulley MP paper feed pulley or MP separation pulley is deformed Replace the pulley if it is deformed see page 1 5 4 Electrical problem with the following clutches upper lower paper feed clutches feed clutches 1 2 3 MP paper feed clutch and MP feed clutch See page 1 4 51 2 No secondary paper feed Check if the surfaces of the right and left reg istration rollers are dirty with paper powder Clean with isopropyl alcohol Electrical problem with the registration clutch See page 1 4 51 3 Skewed paper feed Width guide in a cassette installed incorrectly Check the width guide visually and correct or replace if necessary Deformed width guide in a cassette Check visually and replace any deformed guide Check if a pressure spring along the paper conveying path is deformed or out of place Repair or replace 4 The scanner does not travel Check if the scanner wire is loose Reinstall the scanner wire see page 1 5 13 The scanner motor malfunctions See page 1 4 51 S Multiple sheets of paper are fed at one time Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the upper or lower separation pulley is wo
315. or 2 does not turn off within 1 5 s Paper conveying belt home position sen Sor 2 does not turn on within 2 5 s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 2 and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper conveying belt home position sen Sor 2 Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 2 Defective paper conveying belt motor 2 Replace paper conveying belt motor 2 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 34 Internal tray communication error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher Communication with the internal tray is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC6 on the finisher main PWB and the connector YC1 on the internal tray PWB and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Code Contents Causes Check procedures corrective measures C8140 Main tray problem optional 3000 Poor contact in the Check the connection of connector YC6 on sheet document finisher The main tray is no
316. or absence of the optional DP Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional paper feeder Cassette paper feeder LCF 3000 sheet paper feeder Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional document finisher Inner Finisher built in finisher 3000 Finisher 3000 sheet document finisher 1000 Finisher document finisher Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional job separator Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the Compact Flash Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional PDF upgrade kit Installed The formal version is installed Not Installed The PDF upgrade kit is not installed Trial Version xx Xx xx A trial version is installed Presence or absence of the optional data backup kit Installed Not Installed Presence or absence of the optional security kit Installed Not Installed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U000 Description Supplement Identification name for the security kit Security kit version Printed page counts Total Copy Printer Fax Scanned page counts Total Copy Other Counts by paper sizes Fax kit information This item is printed only when the optional fax kit is installed Destination information Area informa tion Printable area setting Offset for each bin MP tray top MP tray left Cassette 2 top Cassette 2 left
317. or una cara para el copiado d plex y para el copiado con giro de 180 grados respectivamente Para el copiado por una cara ajuste ADJUST DATA ajustar datos 1 extremo gu a Para el copiado d plex ajuste ADJUST DATAS ajustar datos 3 direcci n de exploraci n principal del reverso Para el copiado con giro de 180 grados ajuste ADJUST DATAS ajustar datos 5 giro de 180 gra dos Einstellen des Vorderkantentaktes des DP 1 Den Wartungsmodus U071 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel f r jede Einzelkopie Duplexkopie und um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie einstellen F r die Einzelkopie ADJUST DATA1 EINSTELLDATEN1 Vorderkante F r die Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA3 EINSTELLDATEN3 Hauptscanrichtung hinten F r die um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie ADJUST DATAS EINSTELLDATENS Drehung um 180 Grad einstellen Regolazione della fasatura del bordo di entrata 1 Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U071 e regolare l esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola duplex e in rotazione di 180 gradi Per la copia singola regola ADJUST DATA1 REGOLAZIONE DATI1 bordo di entrata Per la copia duplex regola ADJUST DATA3 REGOLAZIONE DATI3 orientamento scansione principale lato posteriore Per la copia in rotazione di 180 gradi regola ADJUST DATA5 REGOLAZIONE DATI5 rotazione 180 gradi ME DP BIZ ER 1 ERE BR U071 FRAP BI EE ALTAN 180 EXE E E EDS ERE AS PAE A
318. paper feeder lift switch 2 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift Switch 2 Defective paper feeder lift motor 1 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 1 The paper feeder left lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary Paper feeder right lift position prob lem optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper feeder switch 1 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 2 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper feeder lift switch 1 Check if YC5 4 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when paper feeder lift switch 1 is turned off If not replace paper feeder lift Switch 1 Defective paper feeder lift motor 2 Check for continuity across the coil If none replace paper feeder lift motor 2 The paper feeder right lift does not rise properly Check the gears and belts and remedy if necessary Paper feeder unit communication problem optional paper feeder 3000 sheet paper feeder No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a communica tion error parity or checksum error is detected five times in succession Poor contact in the connector
319. place front side registration motor The front side reg istration home position sensor connector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective front side registration home position sensor Replace the front side registration home position sensor Defective finisher control PWB Replace the finisher control PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Side registration motor 2 problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 s passed Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the internal tray PWB and the connector of side registration motor 2 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective side reg istration motor 2 Replace side registration motor 2 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Finisher rear side registration motor problem optional built in finisher When the rear side registration home position sensor is turned on during initial ization the sensor did not turn on while it h
320. place if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective drive motor Replace the drive motor Main charger cleaning motor error A locking error has been detected three times in a row during a reciprocating cleaning motion Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC9 on the engine PWB and the connector on the main charger cleaning motor and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmission sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective main charger cleaning motor Replace the main charger cleaning motor 1 4 28 Paper feed motor error Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after paper feed motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feed motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective drive transmis
321. position du DP Pour l exemple de copie d tourner la vis de r glage dans le sens inverse des aiguilles d une montre et d placer le DP vers l int rieur Pour l exemple de copie e tourner la vis de r glage dans le sens des aiguilles d une montre et d placer le DP vers l avant Changement par graduation d chelle environ 1 mm 3 Effectuer une copie de test Ajuste de la posici n oblicua del DP 1 Afloje dos tornillos TP M4 x 14 F de los herrajes de fijaci n C derecho e izquierdo 2 Gire el tornillo de ajuste 3 en el lado trasero de la bisagra derecha para ajustar la posici n del DP Para el ejemplo de copia d gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido antihorario y mueva el DP al lado interno Para el ejemplo de copia e gire el tornillo de ajuste en sentido horario y mueva el DP al lado frontal Magnitud del cambio por escala aprox 1 mm 3 Haga una copia de prueba Einstellen der Schr glage des DP 1 Die zwei M4 x 14TP Schrauben F an der rechten und linken Befestigungshalterung C l sen 2 Die Einstellschraube 3 an der R ckseite des rechten Scharniers einstellen um die DP Position einzustellen Kopierbeispiel d Die Einstellschraube nach links drehen und den DP nach innen schieben Kopierbeispiel e Die Einstellschraube nach rechts drehen und den DP nach vorne schieben nderung pro Ma stab Ungef hr 1 mm 3 Eine Testkopie erstellen Regolazione della posizione obliqua del DP 1 Allentare le due v
322. power off and disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet M thode d installation Lors de l installation du DP veiller mettre l interrupteur du MFP hors tension et d bran cher la fiche d alimentation de la prise murale Procedimiento de instalaci n Cuando instale el DP aseg rese de apagar el interruptor principal del MFP y desench felo del tomacorriente de la pared Installationsverfahren Schalten Sie vor Installation des DP unbedingt den MFP Hauptschalter aus und ziehen Sie den Netzstecker aus der Steckdose Istruzioni per il montaggio Spegnere l interruttore principale e sfilare la spina dell MFP dalla presa prima di installare il DP TCR DP HT WAKE MEP HRK HIF AVE MEAT 2282 VE NV Bt FIA DP KRERET SL KIL Gy MFP KEO A AVAL yd OFFIC L BIRT FF ERT DPOPF TD Llc Remove the film and cushioning mate rial 1 Remove the fixing tape from the original feed unit cover of DP A 2 Open original feed unit cover 3 and carrier unit 4 3 Remove film 5 and cushioning material 6 Retirer le film et la garniture d embal lage 1 Retirer la bande adh sive de fixation du cou vercle de l unit d alimentation d original du DP A 2 Ouvrir le couvercle de l unit d alimentation d original 3 et sortir l unit de support 4 3 Retirer le film 5 et la garniture d emballage 6 Retire la pel cula y el material amorti
323. ppm 2 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 58 Checking clearing the maintenance count Description Displays clears and changes the maintenance count Purpose To check the maintenance count Also to clear the count during maintenance service Method Press the start key The maintenance count is displayed Clearing 1 Press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Setting 1 Enter a count using the numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U252 Setting the destination Description Switches the operations and screens of the machine according to the destination Purpose To be executed after initializing the backup RAM by running maintenance item U020 in order to return the set ting to the value before replacement or initialization Method Press the start key The screen for selecting an item is displayed Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the destination Display Description INCH Inch North America specifications EUROPE METRIC Metric Europe specifications ASIA PACIFIC Metric Asia Pacific specifications 3 Press the start key The setting is set 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Supplement
324. ptional fax The backup data is not retained for file system abnormality of flash memory of the fax control PWB Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Upper lift motor error When cassette 1 is inserted upper lift limit switch does not turn on within 12 s of upper lift motor turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of upper lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of upper lift motor Replace upper lift motor Defective upper lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace upper lift motor Defective upper lift limit switch Check if YC13 B9 on the engine PWB goes low when upper lift limit switch is turned off If not replace upper lift limit switch Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of upper lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Lower lift motor error When cassette 2 is inserted lower lift limit switch does not turn on
325. r Lower duplex feed roller PZ Copying onto reverse side Switchback operation Copying onto front side normal rotation of eject motor reverse rotation of eject motor normal rotation of eject motor Paper path Figure 2 1 27 2 1 18 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 2 1 Electrical parts layout 1 PWBs Machine front 777 Machine inside i Machine rear Figure 2 2 1 PWBs 1 Engine PWB EPWB n Controls the other PWBs electrical components and optional devices 2 Main PWB MPWB Controls the image processing and operation panel 3 Power source PWB PSPWB Generates 24 V DC 12 V DC and 5V DC controls the fuser heater 4 High voltage PWB HVTPWB Main charging Generates developing bias and high voltages for transfer 5 Scanner PWB SPWB Controls t
326. r Refit the upper fuser cover 6 Refit the fuser unit e Heat roller separation claws Figure 1 5 60 1 5 29 2GN 2GP 2GR 3 Detaching and refitting the press roller Follow the procedure below to replace the press roller Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 3 Remove the front and rear press springs 4 Remove the press roller from the fuser unit 5 Replace the press roller and install the roller to fuser unit Refit the upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit ALD 1 5 30 Press spring Press spring Figure 1 5 61 Press roller Figure 1 5 62 2GN 2GP 2GR 4 Detaching and refitting the fuser heater Follow the procedure below to replace the fuser heater Procedure 1 Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 2 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 3 Remove two screws and two connectors Connector Figure 1 5 63 4 Pull out the fuser heater from the fuser unit Fuser heater Figure 1 5 64 5 Replace the fuser heater and install the heater to fuser unit Refit the upper fuser cover Refit the fuser unit Sa 1 5 31 2GN 2GP 2GR 5 Detaching and refitting the heat roller Follow the procedure below to replace the heat roller Procedure 1 25 3 N Remove the fuser unit see page 1 5 28 Remove the upper fuser cover see page 1 5 29 Remove the press r
327. r 1680ms In the straight mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Document finisher 5375ms 1 4 8 In the offset or staple mode the exit sensor EXS is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is ejected to the finisher tray from the intermediate tray Paper length 1123 ms 30 ppm Paper length 869 ms 40 50 ppm 84 Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not turned off even if a specified 1562 ms 30 ppm Jam in eject section of time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was 1209 ms 40 50 ppm right sub tray 3000 received o EE fin Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not tumed on even if a specified 1562 ms 30 ppm y time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was 1209 ms 40 50 ppm received Eject switch 2 ESW2 is not turned off within specified 2989 ms 30 ppm time of its turning on 2313 ms 40 50 ppm 85 Eject switch 3 ESW3 does not turn off within specified 1843 ms 30 ppm Jam in eject section of time of paper entry sensor PES turning on 1426 ms 40 50 ppm left sub tray 3000 Eject switch 3 ESW3 does not turn on within specified 1843 ms 30 ppm sheet document fin isher only time of paper entry sensor PES turning on 1426 ms 40 50 ppm Eject switch 3 ESW3 is not turned off within specified
328. r 2 of the job separator A into the 2 pin connector 1 of the LED PCB B by arranging the wire into the three grooves 3 of the job separator A Ins rer le LED PCB B dans le s parateur 2 Ouvrir le couvercle de transfert gauche et le de travaux A Brancher le connecteur a deux broches 2 du s parateur de travaux A dans le connecteur a deux broches 1 du LED PCB B en placant le fil dans les trois rainures 3 du s parateur de travaux A Inserte el PCB en LED B en el separador 2 Abra la cubierta de transferencia izquierda y de trabajos A Conecte el conector de 2 patillas 2 del separador de trabajos A en el conector de 2 patillas 1 del PCB en LED B colocando el cable en las tres ranuras 3 del separador de trabajos A Die LED Leiterplatte B in den J obtrenner 4 Den Haken 7 auf der rechten Seite ffnen A einf hren Den 2 poligen Steckverbinder 2 des J obtrenners A mit dem 2 poligen Steckverbinder 1 der LE D Leiterplatte B verbinden indem das Kabel in den drei Nuten 3 des J obtrenners A angeordnet wird Inserite la scheda LED B nel separatore 4 Aprite il gancio 7 che si trova sul lato destro A Collegate il connettore a 2 pin 2 del Separatore A nel connettore a 2 pin 1 della scheda LED B disponendo il cavo all interno delle tre scanalature 3 del separatore A ENEMA A ESA LEDEN EA B VELA ES S A AZAR 2 XexETE MEA F
329. r correct operation Communication error between scan ner and SHD An error code is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC3 on the scanner PWB and the connector YC4 on the SHD PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the scanner PWB or SHD PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory read write problem scanner PWB Read and write data does not match Defective backup RAM or scanner PWB Replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem scan ner PWB Data in the specified area of the backup memory does not match the specified values Problem with the backup memory data Run maintenance item U022 to initialize the backup memory data Defective scanner PWB If the C3910 is displayed after initializing the backup memory replace the scanner PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 30 Polygon motor synchronization prob lem The polygon motor does not reach the stable speed within 20 s of the START signal turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC8 on the engine PWB and laser scanner unit and the continuity across the connector termi nals Repair or replace if necessary Defective polygon motor Replace the laser scanner unit Defective engine P
330. r up down keys or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited and press the start key End 1 3 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Maintenance modes item list Section Content of maintenance item Initial setting General Outputting an own status report Exiting the maintenance mode Setting the factory default data Setting the service telephone number KAk KKK kkk kk KKK Displaying the machine number Copying without paper Displaying the ROM version Initialization Initializing all data Initializing counters and mode settings Initializing backup memory HDD formatting Drive paper Checking motor operation feed paper Checking switches for paper conveying conveying Checking clutch operation and cooling system Checking solenoid operation Adjusting the print start timing Adjusting the leading edge registration Adjusting the center line 245 0 30 30 490 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting the printing area for folio paper Length Width 330 210 Adjusting the amount of slack in the paper 0 0 0 0 Setting the adjustment of the motor speed Drive motor Eject motor Polygon motor 2 0 5 Optical Turning the exposure lamp on Adjusting the shading position 0 Adjusting the scanner magnification Main scanning direction auxiliary scanning direction 0 0 Adjusting the scanner leading edge registration 0 0
331. r 2 error optional 3000 sheet document fin isher When operation returned to a home position is performed at the time of initial operation and a home position is not detected even if 3 5 s passed Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler moving motor 2 and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler moving motor 2 Replace stapler moving motor 2 Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 38 Stapler motor problem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Jam 82 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC10 on the finisher main PWB and the connector of stapler motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective stapler motor Replace the stapler motor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Centerfold unit communication error optional centerfold unit of 3000 sheet document finisher Communication with the centerfold unit is not possible although the connection is detected Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the
332. r duplex copying select printing adjustment TRAIL DUP TRAIL DUP TRAIL MP To make an adjustment for MP tray select TRAIL MP Adjusting the left and right margins LSU illumination start end timing U402 A U402 test pattern P 1 3 64 printing adjustment C o dn Adjusting magnification of the Data processing U065 MAIN SCAN ADJ Test chart P 1 3 23 scanner in the main scanning direc U070 CIS MAIN ADJ P 1 3 26 tion scanning adjustment 2 4 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Adjusting na Hascd pdos Maintenance mode Original Pag Remarks order Item No Mode Adjusting magnification of the Original scanning speed U065 SUB SCAN ADJ Test chart P 1 3 23 U065 For copying an original placed on scanner in the auxiliary scanning the platen ay direction Scanning adjustment U070 CONVEY SPEED P 1 3 26 U070 For copying originals from the DP CIS SUB ADJ Adjusting the center line scanning Adjusting the original scan data U067 ADJUST DATA1 2 Test chart P 1 3 25 U067 For copying an original placed on adjustment image adjustment the platen 42 H U072 ADJUST DATA1 2 3 P 1 3 30 U072 For copying originals from the DP Adjusting the leading edge registra Original scan start timing U066 ADJUST DATA1 2 Test
333. r initialization again If other error occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U022 for initialization 1 3 15 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U024 HDD formatting Description Formats the HDD backup data areas for the document management network scanner and department administration Purpose To initialize the HDD when replacing the HDD after shipping Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key to initialize the hard disk 4 Turn the main power switch off and on Checking motor operation Description Drives each motor Purpose To check the operation of each motor Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the motor to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts Display Operation FEED MAIN EJECT FW EJECT REV Paper feed motor operates Drive motor operates Eject motor rotates forward Eject motor rotates in reverse 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 16 Checking switches for paper conveying Description Displays the on off status of each paper detection switch on the paper path Purpose To check if the switches for paper conveying operate correctly Method 1 Press the start key 2 Turn each switch on and off manually to check the status
334. r output 8 24VLO I 24VDC 24 V DC power input 9 PWSW LO I 0 5V DC PWSW L On Off 10 PWSW L1 I 0 5V DC PWSW L On Off 11 PWSW L2 I 0 5V DC PWSW L On Off 12 GND Ground 2 3 9 2GN 2GP 2GR Connector Signal Voltage Description YC13 Connected to the feed switch 2 3 feed clutch 2 3 left cover 2 switch upper lower lift motors lower lift motor upper lower paper size length switches upper lower lift limit switches and upper lower paper switches 2 3 10 GND FSW3 5VD R24VDR FCL3 GND FSW2 5VD GND LC2SW 24VDR FCL2 LM U SW2 GND LM U SW1 GND LM U REM GND PLSW L GND PLSW U LM L SW2 GND LM L SW1 GND LM L REM GND LICSW U 5VD GND PSW U 5VD GND LICSW L 5VD GND PSW L 5VD 0 5 V DC 5VDC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 24 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 5 V DC 0 24 V DC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5VDC 0 5 V DC 5VDC Ground FSW3 On Off 5 V DC power output 24 V DC power output FCL3 On Off Ground FSW2 On Off 5 V DC power output Ground LC2SW On Off 24 V DC power output FCL2 On Off LM U SW2 On Off Ground LM U SW1 On Off Ground LM U On Off Ground PLSW L On Off Ground PLSW U On Off LM L SW2 On Off Ground LM L SW1 On Off Ground LM L On Off Ground LICSW U On Off 5 V DC power output Ground PSW U On Off 5
335. r section 302FZ56990 DP FACE UP Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 2AC68241 section first page DP FACE DOWN Automatic adjustment in the DP scanning 2AC68241 303JX57010 section second page 303JX57020 Remarks Cut the trailing edge of the original as shown when the specified original P N 2AC68241 is used 128t1mm 60 1mm Cut with the edge of black belt Figure 1 3 28 Method SCANNER 1 Enter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 302FZ56990 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 302FZ56990 on the platen 3 Select the item Display Description ALL Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix INPUT Automatic adjustment using the platen for original size magnification leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment using the platen for input gamma C A Automatic adjustment using the platen for chromatic aberration filter MTF Automatic adjustment using the platen for MTF filter MATRIX Automatic adjustment using the platen for matrix Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Sho
336. ra sl Bandeja de copias wl Cartucho de grapas xl Expulsi n por resorte plano zl Placa a tierra mi Etiqueta de tiro all Tornillo TP M3 X 05 7 Pasador de fijaci n de la secci n de funcionamiento ss 1 Vordere Auswurfabdeckung 1 Hintere Auswurfabdeckung val Kopienablage Pu Heftklammerpatrone sl Blattfederauswurf ar Grundplatte al Abziehaufkleber al TP Schraube M3 x05 sak Bedienteil S icherungsstift 1 Coperchio frontale di espulsione carta 1 Coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta 1 Vassoio copie 1 Cartuccia della graffatrice 1 Molla piatta a espulsione sl Piastra di terra wl Etichetta staccabile 1 Vite TP M3 Xx 05 1 Perno di fissaggio della sezione di comando 1 ECU Tet WL HU iii alia Ce gian HAFAN en 1 LINE A Sere tes han deat 1 HRA ieri eme e RUE HET 1 AC ER Dieta 1 AROS ABE is A E E AEA Ed emm 1 Loco EET 1 PULL FSI acari 1 E25 M3 X 0bTP c cia 7 M BAER Note When placing the transfer unit A on the floor or the like be sure to place it upside down If not the stapler mounting plate may be deformed resulting in a malfunction Remarque Lorsqu on place l unit de transfert A sur le sol ou sur une surface quivalente veiller la placer sens dessus dessous Sino
337. ra z 2 5 e e 9 oasaa t Ta Sje el e vt E 5 S 19saa 9 5 BD lulo oiv orv i 7 Aquaa i auo ENERO onda TE i o Z 1 anoa TT 5 sa viv riv 4 gt anod Te 5 3 ervlerv T v z o an z s ui ul 2 as i TIOSSI ale me d 2 T Hossa pal gt oh SIA LSL4 ae aan ofe y B 4 pisos ele Wi ano pot Lu E 1 SV PETE ass af WHJ sis ssa ale Z v v 2 0 EN St 9 S rers ses S H4 iv uv o 2 5 O ato Besos o ev ev sls u gt TI sos Q SELON ui sls ones gt orv orv DIS 13S A re nv nv elslelelalelala ele e e e Jef f lelolo olo e e mans Fe tet av zr RIRIS IRRIS RILES jejejeje Sz e e e e lio 7 yo 18 9 s or sa ea Udare 9 6 6a 6a w 3 e oig PAIR ra e 2 sz 4 LT z SER o MEE E EET alal amp la e ala ssa ze al al q Lele sa sa HEGEREEBEREEEBEEBEEEREKEBEEE q ps sss NEL CCC RE BEE EEE ES GB 3 S 3 3 SE Zu Elz lt 5 j Ee E amp amp l eui 4 fete alal H gt jala ala gt gt ae lt o 2 noomos j 9 ana oJo o Jo Z a 2 o a 31dAvs fi e va va gt Aafol lt Jolo rTo o el e ef loJl olalel lt TaleT lt Lolol e 2 Lt eens BERND qe leelo EE A S EDS gt a BEBSESEEaE ao FE Selle o za pzs SOAVE e ele ola x Sle ST Te sr 3 xc a i c ea lt n c A S n z a i z 9le e r e o o os Elo lt fe I Im fes O 8 5 8 xL EEEE IBI gt gt gt e e af 1 El 2 pv w Po i 8 9 a lt m ol EvEv Lose celosa oca oca 2
338. ransfer separation section Section Transfer roller unit Maintenance part location Replace Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Clean when user call occurs Points and cautions Page Developing section Developing unit Replace 400K 30 500K 40 50 Replace Check and replace when user call occurs P 1 5 26 2 4 4 Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle 2GN 2GP 2GR Points and cautions Page Main charg ing drum section Section Drum unit Main charger unit Drum separation claw Maintenance part location Replace Clean Check or replace Method 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call User call Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Clean with a wet cloth and then a dry cloth Replace if the leading edge of the claws are damaged Points and cautions P 1 5 24 P 1 5 25 Page Fuser section Section Fuser unit Heat roller Heat roller separation claw Press roller Press roller separation claw Maintenance part location Replace Check or replace Clean Check or replace Clean 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call 400K 30 500K 40 50 User call 400K 30 500K 40 50 Maintenance cycle Replace Check and replace when user call occurs Check an
339. reflected by the BD sensor mirror outputting a signal to the main PWB MPWB to provide timing for the main direction sync signal 2GN 2GP 2GR The dimensions of the laser beam are as shown in Figure 2 1 11 Less than 100 um Less than 85 um Figure 2 1 11 Scanning in the main direction is provided by the rotating polygon mirror while scanning in the auxiliary direction is pro vided by the rotating drum forming a static latent image on the drum The static latent image of the letter A for example is formed on the drum surface as shown in Figure 2 1 12 Electrical charge is dissipated on the area of the drum surface irradiated by the laser The focal point of the laser beam is moved line by line and adjacent lines slightly overlap each other Main scanning direction Auxilary scanning gt direction laser beam is on Figure 2 1 12 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 4 Developing section The developing section consists of the developing unit and the toner container The develop
340. rfen wird Effettuate una copia di prova per verificare che essa venga espulsa sul vassoio del separatore C BAT MINER AT HETETE MET ES HE d E TARDE TO EDS a TENE SHE Hv C CHEM AMES 6 EH 725 Adding procedure to the job separator installation metric specifications only The following step is added after step 9 on page 4 Supplied parts F Eject stopper A3 acicate After using alcohol to clean the portion of the job separator tray C shown in the figure adhere the eject stopper A3 F along the reference lines Ajout d une proc dure l installation du s parateur de travaux pour sp cifications m triques seulement L tape suivante est ajout e apr s l tape 9 de la page 4 Pi ces fournies F B t e d jectioni Adi Apr s avoir utilis de l alcool pour nettoyer le plateau du s parateur de travaux C montr dans la figure faire adh rer la but e d jection A3 F le long des lignes de r f rence Agregando un procedimiento a la instalaci n del separador de trabajos s lo para las especificaciones m tricas Se agrega el siguiente paso despu s del paso 9 en la p gina 4 Partes suministradas F Tope de expulsi n de AZ Despu s de utilizar alcohol para limpiar la parte de la bandeja del separador de trabajos C que aparece en la figura pegue el tope de expulsi n de A3 F por las l neas de referencia Hinzuf
341. rhalb x4 mm O Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Originalgr e des DP siehe Seite 13 Bezugswert Innerhalb 1 5 Einzelheiten zur Einstellung des Vorderkantentaktes des DP siehe Seite 15 Bezugswert Innerhalb 2 5 mm O Einzelheiten zur Einstellung der Originalmittellinie des DP siehe Seite 17 lt Bezugswert gt Einzelkopie 2 mm Duplexkopie innerhalb 3 mm Bei der Verwendung der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP k nnen automatische Einstellungen auBer der Einstellung der Schr glage des DP ausgef hrt werden Finzelheiten zu den Einstellungen mit der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP siehe Seite 20 Accertarsi di eseguire le regolazioni in questa sequenza in caso contrario la regolazione non pu essere effettuata correttamente Perla regolazione della posizione obliqua del DP vedere pagina 10 Valore di riferimento Copia singola tolleranza 3 mm Copia duplex tolleranza 4 mm Per la regolazione delle dimensioni dell originale DP vedere pagina 13 Valore di riferimento tolleranza 1 5 Per la regolazione della fasatura del bordo di entrata del DP vedere pagina 15 Valore di riferimento tolleranza 2 5 mm Per la regolazione della linea centrale del DP vedere pagina 17 Valore di riferimento Copia singola 2 mm Copia duplex tolleranza 3 mm Se si utilizza l autoregolazione originale DP possibile eseguire regolazioni automatiche eccetto la regolazione della posiz
342. ric keys to change the preset values and press the start key to register the setting Description Setting Initial range setting Output density of MONO LEVEL 0 to 255 0 1dot LINE 0 to 21 0 4 Press the system menu key 5 Press the start key A MIP PG pattern is output 6 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the system menu key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 34 Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U093 Setting the exposure density gradient Description Changes the exposure density gradient in the manual density mode depending on respective image quality modes Purpose To set how the image density is altered by a change of one step in the manual density adjustment for respec tive image quality modes Also used to make copy images darker or lighter Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the image quality mode The setting screen for the selected item is displayed Display Description MIXED Density in text and photo mode TEXT Density in text mode PHOTO Density in photo mode Setting Density in text and photo mode 1 Selectthe item to be set 2 Adjust the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting Initial range setting MIXED DARKER Change in density when manual density is set dark 0 to 3 0 MIXED LIGHTER Change in density when manual density
343. rn Replace the upper or lower separation pul ley if itis worn see page 1 5 2 Check if the MP separation pulley is worn Replace the MP separation pulley if it is worn see page 1 5 4 1 4 55 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 6 Paper jams Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Deformed guides along the paper conveying path Check visually and replace any deformed guides Check if the contact between the right and left registration rollers is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the contact between the feed roller and feed pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary Check if the press roller is extremely dirty or deformed Clean or replace the press roller Check if the contact between the heat roller and its separation claws is correct Repair if any springs are off the separation claws Check if the contact between the eject roller and pulley is correct Check visually and remedy if necessary The feedshift solenoid malfunctions See page 1 4 51 Check if the duplex feed pulley upper duplex feed roller or lower duplex feed roller is deformed Check visually and replace the pulley or roller if deformed 7 Toner drops on the paper conveying path Check if the developing unit is extremely dirty Clean the developing unit 8 Abnormal noise
344. rom cassette 2 Jam code 11 Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley separation pulley or for warding pulley of the cassette 2 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 2 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 2 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 2 on and off manually Replace feed switch 2 if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Check if the lower paper feed clutch malfunctions Run maintenance item U032 and select the lower paper feed clutch on the touch panel to be turned on and off Check the status and remedy if necessary Electrical problem with the lower paper feed clutch Check see page 1 4 51 1 4 11 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 4 A paper jam in the paper feed section is indicated during copying no paper feed from optional cassette 3 Jam code 12 Optional paper feeder Paper is extremely curled Change the paper Check if the paper feed pul ley forwarding pulley and separation pulley of optional cassette 3 are deformed Check visually and replace any deformed pulleys Broken feed switch 3 actua tor Check visually and replace switch Defective feed switch 3 Run maintenance item U031 and turn feed switch 3 on an
345. rrect Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial range setting MAIN MOTOR Drive motor speed adjustment 40 to 40 2 EJECT MOTOR Eject motor speed adjustment 7 to 15 0 POLYGON MOTR Polygon motor speed adjustment 20 to 20 5 Adjustment 1 Press the system menu key 2 Press the start key to output an A3 Ledger VTC pattern Correct values for an A3 Ledger output are A 300 0 75mm B 270 1 35 mm Figure 1 3 7 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys A Drive motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image longer in the auxiliary scanning direction and decreasing it makes the image shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction B Polygon motor speed adjustment Increasing the setting makes the image shorter in the main scanning direction and longer in the auxiliary scanning direction decreasing the setting makes the image longer in the main scanning direction and shorter in the auxiliary scanning direction 5 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The indication for selecting a maintenance item No appears 1 3 21 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U061 Turning the exposure lamp on Description Turns the exposure lamp on Purpose To check the exposure lamp Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item
346. rs puis sous tension Lorsque l cran d accueil s ouvre v rifier qu une ic ne du disque dur 3 s affiche dans l angle inf rieur droit de l cran voir illustration B N e Laisser la cl USB utilis e dans l emplacement correspondant situ au dos du couvercle central gauche l arri re de l appareil voir illustration C Suivre les instructions l cran pour retirer la cl USB et mettre l interrupteur English Supplied Parts Precautions before Activating Activating the Data Security Kit will delete all data stored in the hard disk by the customer Before activating check with the customer if the data can be deleted Be sure that the Main Power Switch of the machine is turned off Activating Procedure 1 Insert the USB Key into the USB Memory Slot of the machine and turn the Main Power Switch on See Illustration A 2 After the opening screen is displayed the Activating security function message is displayed Press OK e Follow the onscreen instructions to remove the USB Key and turn the Main Power Switch off 4 Turn the Main Power Switch on The encryption code entry screen is displayed Ask the customer to change the encryption code Using the default value of the encryption code 000000 will not affect the data security reliability If the customer desires to change the code lead the customer to follow the steps below Press Encryption Code Press Back Space to delete 00
347. run maintenance item U024 to format the hard disk And then and run maintenance item U020 for initialization again If other error occurs turn the main powe switch off then on and run maintenance item U020 for initialization Error codes Codes Description ERROR 01 Configuration initialization error ERROR 02 Counter initialization error ERROR 03 One touch initialization error ERROR 04 Panel program initialization error ERROR 05 Event log initialization error ERROR 06 Account initialization error ERROR 07 Address book initialization error ERROR 08 Department initialization error ERROR 09 Document box initialization error ERROR 0a Permission initialization error ERROR 0b Job log initialization error ERROR 20 Engine PWB initialization error ERROR 40 Scanner PWB initialization error Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U021 Initializing counters and mode settings Description Initializes all settings except those pertinent to the type of copier namely each counter service call history and mode setting Also initializes backup RAM according to region specification selected in maintenance item U252 Setting the destination Refer to 2 of the maintenance mode item list about the item initialized Purpose To return the machine settings to their factory default Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXECUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key All data other than that for adjustments due t
348. s 1 anverso Para el reverso en el copiado d plex ajuste ADJUST DATA2 ajustar datos 2 reverso Para el copiado con giro de 180 grados ajuste ADJUST DATA3 ajustar datos 3 giro de 180 grados Einstellen der Originalmittellinie des DP 1 Den Wartungsmodus U072 einstellen und das Kopierbeispiel f r jede Einzelkopie Duplexkopie und um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie einstellen F r die Einzelkopie oder die Oberfl che der Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA1 EINSTELLDATEN1 Oberfl che einstellen F r die R ckseite der Duplexkopie ADJUST DATA2 EINSTELLDATEN2 R ckseite einstellen F r die um 180 Grad gedrehte Kopie ADJUST DATAS EINSTELLDATEN3 Drehung um 180 Grad einstellen Regolazione della linea centrale del DP 1 Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U072 e regolare l esempio di copia rispettivamente per ogni esecuzione di copia singola duplex e in rotazione di 180 gradi Per la copia singola o per la superficie della copia duplex regola ADJUST DATA1 REGOLAZIONE DATI1 superficie Per il lato posteriore della copia duplex regola ADJUST DATA2 REGOLAZIONE DATI2 lato posteriore Per la copia in rotazione di 180 gradi regola ADJUST DATA3 REGOLAZIONE DATI3 rotazione 180 gradi 11 DP RP bik 1 BE EIE REN U072 DFAE A IATA 180 BE Je P 82 ER I 2 ETRAS o XY FAA 812 EU BAM TAT EN TAT wid ADJUST DATA CRAS D GE WFR EAR 134 ADJUST DATA2 142248 2 VAR
349. s not turn off with YC1 3 on the inverter PWB high replace the inverter PWB Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp even if checking or correcting other measures 7 Main charging is not performed Broken main charger wire Leaking main charger housing The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 8 No developing bias is output The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 9 Transfer charging is not performed The connector terminals of the high voltage PWB make poor contact Defective engine PWB Defective high voltage PWB See page 1 4 45 10 The original size is not detected cor rectly 1 4 52 Original is not placed cor rectly Check the original and correct if necessary Poor contact in the origi nal detection switch or original size detection sensor connector termi nals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective original detec tion switch If the level of YC4 5 on the scanner PWB does not go low when the original detection switch is turned on and off replace the origi nal d
350. s not turn off within specified time of its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm Document finisher The paper entry sensor PES is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 2627 ms Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW is not turned on even if a specified time has elapsed after the machine eject signal was received 1573 ms 30 ppm 1217 ms 40 50 ppm Built in finisher The paper conveying switch PCSW does not turn off within specified time of its turning on when paper is con veyed to the intermediate tray from the paper conveying unit Paper length 1123 ms 30 ppm Paper length 869 ms 40 50 ppm 82 Jam in stapler 3000 sheet document finisher The home position is not detected within the specified time when driving the staple motor 600 ms Document finisher The staple home position sensor STSPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM 1000 ms Built in finisher The staple home position sensor STHPS is not turned on within the specified time when driving the staple motor STM 1 4 7 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Optional 83 3000 sheet document finisher 1182 ms finisher Exit sensor stay jam Eject switch 1 ESW1 is not turned off within specified time of its turning on Document finishe
351. s teclas num ricas en el lado derecho del panel de trabajo y pegue aqui las etiquetas de alfa beto E 8 En Asia y Oceania utilice la etiqueta PORS TUV WXYZ y no use las PRS TUV WXY ni las OPER Anbringen der Alphabetaufkleber 7 Den Bereich ber den Zifferntasten auf der rechten Seite des Bedienfeldes abwischen und die Alphabetaufkleber E hier anbrin gen 8 In Asien und Ozeanien den Aufkleber PORS TUV WXYZ verwenden nicht die Aufkleber PRS TUV WXY und OPER verwenden Applicazione delle etichette alfabeti che T Pulire l area sopra i tasti numerici sul lato destro del pannello operativo e attaccare qui le etichette alfabetiche E 8 In Asia ed Oceania utilizzare l etichetta PQRS TUV WXYZ e non utilizzare le eti chette PRS TUV WXY e OPER RRRNUF RMS TEHERAN FE LARE AR MF BARS E HELA 8 EDINA if FA PORS TUV WXYZ E MATER PRS TUV WXY 0 OPER mE FWIPFRY KINILOREY fit 7 Bi E EVI T 3x EMM a IAE UL TIA 7 y y AFAN E FAO fI 5 8 7ZY EYIYCCURIPRS TUV WXYIBE OT OPER O F EA 83 PARS TUV WXYZIDARVeEHBATS E Operation check 1 Plug the MFP into a power outlet and turn on the main power 2 Perform the maintenance mode U600 to ini tialize the fax control assembly For details see the service manual V rification du fonctionnement 1 Brancher le MFP sur une prise d alimenta tion et le mettre sous tension 2 Ex cuter le mode de m
352. s the start key 2 Select the paper feed location for the printer Two or more cassette can be selected 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U342 Setting the ejection restriction Description Sets or cancels the restriction on the number of sheets to be ejected continuously when the internal eject tray is selected as the eject location Purpose According to user request sets or cancels restriction on the number of sheets Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Sets restriction on the number of sheets OFF Cancels restriction on the number of sheets Initial setting ON Details of restriction number of sheets to be ejected continuously after the start key is pressed Condition Number of sheets When no optional ejection device is installed 250 When the job separator is installed 150 When the finisher is installed 100 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Switching between duplex simplex copy mode Description Switches the initial setting between duplex and simplex copy Purpose To be set according to frequency of use set to the more frequently used mode Setting 1 Press the start key 2
353. scription Turns on motors and clutches of optional 3000 sheet paper feeder or paper feeder Purpose To check the operation of motors and clutches of paper feed device Method 1 Press the start key The value varies depending to the option furnished 3000 sheet paper feeder Display Motor and clutches LCF FEED Paper feeder conveying motor PFCM CLUTCH B Paper feeder conveying clutch PFCCL CLUTCH P1 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 CLUTCH P2 Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 Paper feeder Display Motor and clutches DESK FEED Paper feeder drive motor PFDM CLUTCH FEED Paper feeder feed clutch PFFCL CLUTCH U Paper feeder paper feed clutch 1 PFPFCL1 CLUTCHL Paper feeder paper feed clutch 2 PFPFCL2 2 Select the item to be operated 3 Press the start key The operation starts 4 To stop operation press the stop key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 57 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U250 Setting the maintenance cycle Description Displays and changes the maintenance cycle Purpose To check and change the maintenance cycle Method Press the start key The currently set maintenance cycle is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Maintenance cycle 0 to 9999999 400000 30 ppm 500000 40 50
354. ser Dry reverse developing single component system Developer 1 component magnetism toner Toner replenishing automatic from a toner container Transfer roller Separation electrode Heat roller Heat source halogen heaters Abnormally high temperature protection devices thermostats Exposure by cleaning lamp Cleaning blade and roller Flat bed scanning by CCD image sensor Standard 512 MB Maximum 1024 MB 40 GB 600 x 600 dpi Inert gas lamp 599 W x 646 D x 745 H mm 23 9 16 W x 25 7 16 D x 29 5 16 H Approx 85 kg 187 lbs 1497 W x 646 D mm 58 15 16 W x 25 7 16 D Original size Paper selection Mixed sized originals Original orientation Collate Off set mode Staple Punch mode Output destination Zoom mode Combine mode Mar gin Centering mode Border erase Booklet from sheets Duplex Cover mode Form overlay Page numbering Memo mode Density adjustment Selection of image qual ity EcoPrint mode Batch scanning Auto image rotation Inverted copying Mirror image Job finish notice File name Priority override Multi page forms Repeat copy Programmed copying Registering shortcuts 120 V AC 60 Hz 12 A or less 220 D 240 V AC 50 60 Hz 6 5 A or less Document processor paper feeder 3000 sheet paper feeder 3000 sheet document finisher document finisher built in finisher job separator key counter fax kit security kit data backup kit and PDF upgrade kit Same as copying speed Sam
355. serite la sezione di montaggio 18 situata sul lato destro del vassoio del separatore C nella posizione rientrante 19 dell MFP Mettete il gancio 20 situato sul lato destro sul perno 21 che si trova all interno dell MFP THEMA SBTC AE C PU DUE I A PED Ed CA SR 7 E ETE MEAT AREA O YA MEER 18 d ACA DIS RS Ur B 19 EA hid s 20 te MFPEM AMARA QD E Va eny A DLA 17 lA Pe SU FHER HF v4 0 SAM KD A AR SETHY HIA Va TERNLABEH ALA 0 AMORA 18 Awo 19 CHATS AMMO 7 20 MFP ARADO LY 21 DECRETI 11 11 11 11 11 1 FIE 4 CHRO I LEERY 8 OY X 23 3 7 MEERUT ARRA Release the three tabs 23 of the left front cover 8 that has been removed in step 4 to remove the white right side section 22 and fit the left front cover S D Lib rer les trois languettes 23 du couvercle avant gauche 8 retir auparavant lors de l tape 4 pour retirer la section blanche du c t droit 22 et placer le couvercle avant gauche J S D Suelte las tres leng etas 23 de la cubierta delantera izquierda 8 que fue desmontada en el paso 4 para desmontar la secci n del lado derecho blanca 22 y encaje la cubierta delantera izquierda JS D Die drei Laschen 23 der in Schritt 4 entfernten linken F rontabdeckung 8 l sen um den wei en rechten Seitenteil 22 abzunehmen und die linke Frontabdeckung J S D anbringen Rilasciate le tre linguette
356. sfer unit A and then remove the securing plate 15 10 Remove the securing tape 17 from the 13 pin connector 16 pass the wire under the stapler motor and connect the wire with the 13 pin connector 16 9 Retirer la vis bleue 14 de l unit de transfert A puis enlever la plaque de fixation 15 10 Retirer la bande de fixation 17 du connecteur treize broches 16 passer le fil au dessous du moteur de l agrafeuse et connecter le fil l aide du connecteur treize broches 16 9 Quite el tornillo azul 14 de la unidad de transferencia A y desmonte la placa de fijaci n 15 10 Despegue la cinta de fijaci n 17 del conector de 13 pasadores 16 pase el cable por debajo del motor del grapador y conecte el cable con el conector de 13 pasadores 16 9 Die blaue Schraube 14 von der Transfereinheit A entfernen und dann die Halteplatte 15 abnehmen 10 Das Sicherungsband 17 vom 13 poligen Steckverbinder 16 entfernen dann das Kabel unter dem Heftermotor hindurchf hren und an den 13 poligen Steckverbinder 16 anschlie en 9 Rimuovete la vite blu 14 dall unit di trasferimento A e poi rimuovete la piastra di fissaggio 15 10 Rimuovere il nastri di sicurezza 17 dal connettore a 13 pin 16 far passare il filo sotto il motore della pinzatrice e collegare il filo con il connettore a 13 pin 16 9 jt FHSAA CARS LT E R22 14 Ja MERA 10 35 MISMA 16 R5 12 Id EBRO Je FERRE EPISC T n HA P TREE
357. sheets min A4 Letter 50 sheets min A4R Letter R 31 sheets min B5 50 sheets min B5R 24 sheets min ASR Statement 18 sheets min AGR 18 sheets min First copy time i 3 9 s or less 30 ppm model 3 5 s or less 40 50 ppm model Warm up time sees 30 s room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 6096 RH Recovery from sleep mode 15 s room temperature 22 C 71 6 F 60 RH Paper feed system Automatic feed Capacity Cassette 500 sheets 80 g m Manual feed Capacity MP tray 200 sheets 80 g m Paper eject system Output tray 250 sheets 80 g m 1 1 1 2GN 2GP 2GR Multiple copying Photoconductor Charging sySstem Recording system Developing system Transfer system Separation system Fusing system eene Light source ee Dimensions i Power SOUrce OPlIONS x tees Printer functions Printing speed First print time Resolution Applicable OS InterfaC e 1 1 2 1 999 sheets a Si drum diameter 40 mm Single positive corona charging Semiconductor la
358. sion sys tem Check if the rollers and gears rotate smoothly If not grease the bushings and gears Check for broken gears and replace if any Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feed motor Replace the paper feed motor Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder paper conveying motor error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 450 ms Paper feeder drive motor error optional paper feeder The lock signal of the motor is detected avobe 500 ms Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paperfeeder paper conveying motor paper feeder drive motor does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Defective PWB Replace the paper feeder main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct opera tion Defective motor Replace the paper feeder paper conveying motor paper feeder drive motor Scanner carriage problem The home position is not correct when the power is turned on or at the start of copying using the table Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connectio
359. sor push paper sensor surface view sensor con nector makes poor contact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective tray upper limit sensor push paper sensor surface view sen Sor Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation 1 4 33 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper conveying belt motor 1 prob lem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Paper conveying belt home position sen Sor 1 does not turn off within 1 5 s Paper conveying belt home position sen Sor 1 does not turn on within 2 5 s Jam 88 is indicated Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the internal tray PWB and the connector on paper conveying belt motor 1 and the conti nuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper conveying belt home position sen Sor 1 Replace paper conveying belt home position sensor 1 Defective paper conveying belt motor 1 Replace paper conveying belt motor 1 Defective PWB Replace the internal tray PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Paper conveying belt motor 2 prob lem optional 3000 sheet document finisher Paper conveying belt home position sen S
360. specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on 2051 ms 30 ppm 1587 ms 40 50 ppm The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing off 2051 ms 30 ppm 1587 ms 40 50 ppm The job separator eject switch JBESW does not turn off within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turn ing on 2051 ms 30 ppm 1587 ms 40 50 ppm 1 4 5 2GN 2GP 2GR Section Description Conditions Specified time Feedshift section 52 Misfeed in feedshift section The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn on within specified time of the start of eject motor EM reverse rotation 1545 ms 30 ppmy 1196 ms 40 50 ppm During paper switchback operation the feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the its turning on 2989 ms 30 ppm 2313 ms 40 50 ppm The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration switch RSW turning off 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm The feedshift switch FSSW does not turn off within specified time of the registration clutch RCL turning on 2899 ms 30 ppm 2243 ms 40 50 ppm Duplex section 60 Duplex paper convey ing section 1 The duplex paper conveying switch DUPPCSW does not turn on within specified time of the feedshift switch FSSW turning on 2837 ms 30 ppm 2196 ms 4
361. start key The value is set 4 Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 5 Enter maintenance mode U240 and select FINISHER MOTOR then WIDTH TEST A3 The width guides of the internal tray will move to A3 size position 6 Pull the internal tray insert paper between the guides and check that paper is abut the guides 7 Repeat the above adjustment until paper is properly in position Setting adjustment of front and back stapling home position 1 Select STAPLE HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of front and back stapling home position 10 to 10 0 0 32 mm When staple positions are off toward the front side of the machine sample 1 increase the preset value When staple positions are off toward the rear side of the machine sample 2 decrease the preset value Sample 1 Sample 2 Figure 1 3 20 3 Press the start key The value is set 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance Description item No P U246 Setting adjustment of slanted stapling home position 1 Select T STAPLE HP ADJ 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Setting Initial Change in Description range setting value per step Adjustment of slanted stapling home position 10 to 10 0 0 99
362. stellung mit der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP 1 F und R der automatischen Einstellung des Originals des DP nach oben zeigen und das Original an die mit F und R markierte Stelle setzen 2 Den Wartungsmodus U411 einstellen Die Tasten DP FACE UP DP SCHRIFTSEITE NACH OBEN INPUT EINGABE und START der Reihe nach dr cken um die Oberfl che einzustellen 3 Bei richtigem Ergebnis wird RESULT OK 00 ERGEBNIS OK 00 auf der Anzeige angezeigt und die Einstellung ist abgeschlossen Wenn ERROR XX FEHLER XX angezeigt wird ist die Einstellung fehlgeschlagen Die eingestellte Originalposition pr fen und die Schritte 1 und 2 wiederholen bis RESULT OK 00 ERGEBNIS OK 00 angezeigt wird Weitere Einzelheiten siehe Wartungsanleitung Regolazione con l autoregolazione originale DP 1 Orientare F e R dell autoregolazione originale DP verso l alto e disporre l originale rispetto ai punti in cui sono contrassegnati F e R 2 Impostare la modalit di manutenzione U411 Premere il tasto DP FACE UP FACCIATA SU il tasto INPUT IMMETTI e il tasto START AVVIA per regolare la superficie 3 Quando sul display appare RESULT OK 00 RISULTATO OK 00 la regolazione completata Se compare ERROR XX ERRORE XX la regolazione non riuscita Verificare la posizione di impostazione dell originale e ripetere le operazioni da 1 a 3 fino a quando non viene visualizzato RESULT OK 00 RISULTATO OK 00 Per ulteriori dettagli leggere il manuale
363. stment of reference value 0 to 500 1 0 mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 250 to 250 1 0 mm CASSETTE Paper feed from cassette 250 to 250 1 0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode second 250 to 250 1 0 mm Setting the difference value from reference value Press the system menu key Press the start key to output a test pattern Press the system menu key Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For output example 1 decrease the value For output example 2 increase the value Leading edge registration Correct image Output Output example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 4 6 Press the start key The value is set Caution Check the copy image after the adjustment If the image is still incorrect perform the following adjustments in maintenance mode U066 U071 P 1 3 24 P 1 3 28 1 3 18 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U034 Adjustment center line adjustment 1 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step LEFT Adjustment of reference value 0 to 1000 490 1 0 mm MP TRAY Paper feed from MP tray 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 1 Paper feed from cassette 1 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 2 Paper feed from cassette 2 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 3 Paper feed from optional cassette 3 500 to 500 1 0 mm CASSETTE 4 Paper feed from optional cassette 4 500 to 500 1 0 mm DUPLEX Duplex mode s
364. t detected by the main tray top limit detection sensor or the main tray capacity detection sensor within 20s since the tray has started ascending The main tray upper limit detection sen sor or the main tray load detection sen sor is not detected to be turned off in 20 seconds after the main tray has descended The main tray low limit detection sensor is not detected to be turned on in 20 sec onds after the main tray has descended During main tray ascent the main tray upper limit detection sensor or the main tray load detection sensor stays on for more than 2 s connector termi nals the finisher main PWB and the connector on the main tray motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective main tray motor Replace the main tray motor Defective main tray upper limit detec tion sensor main tray load detection sensor main tray lower limit detec tion sensor Replace the sensor Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Tray elevation motor problem optional document finisher When the tray elevation motor is driving the ON status of the tray lower limit sen Sor or surface view sensor cannot be detected even if a specified time has elapsed The tray elevation motor connector makes poor con tact Reinsert the connector Also check for conti nuity within the connector cable If none
365. t is completed retighten two M4 x 14TP screws F that have been loosened in step 1 R p ter les tapes ci dessus jusqu ce que l cart de la ligne 2 de l exemple de copie indique les valeurs de r f rence suivantes Valeur de r f rence Pour la copie recto l cart horizontal de la ligne 2 doit tre de 3 mm Pour la copie recto verso l cart horizontal de la ligne 2 doit tre de 4 mm Une fois le r glage effectu resserrer les deux vis TP M4 x 14 F desserr es l tape 1 Repita los pasos anteriores hasta que la separaci n de la l nea 2 del ejemplo de copia presente los siguientes valores de referencia Valor de referencia Para el copiado por una cara la separaci n horizontal de la linea 2 debe estar dentro de 3 mm Para el copiado duplex la separaci n horizontal de la l nea 2 debe estar dentro de 4 mm Una vez hecho el ajuste vuelva a apretar los dos tornillos TP M4 x 14 F que ha aflojado en el paso 1 Die obigen Schritte wiederholen bis der Abstand der Linie 2 des Kopierbeispiels die folgenden Bezugswerte aufweist lt Bezugswert gt Einzelkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 3 mm liegen Duplexkopie Der horizontale Abstand der Linie 2 sollte innerhalb von 4 mm liegen Nach der Einstellung die zwei M4 x 14TP Schrauben F die in Schritt 1 gel st wurden wieder festziehen Ripetere le operazioni sopra descritte fino a quando lo scos
366. t partial operation control The maintenance mode is exited and the machine returns to the same status as when the main power Switch is turned on 1 3 76 Checking the total counter value Description Displays the total counter value Purpose To check the total counter value Method Press the start key The screen for total count value is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance Description item No U910 Clearing the black ratio data Description Clears the accumulated black ratio data for A4 sheet Purpose To clear data as required at times such as during maintenance service Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press EXCUTE on the touch panel 3 Press the start key The accumulated black ratio data is cleared Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U911 Checking clearing copy counts by paper sizes Description Displays and clears the paper feed counts by paper sizes Purpose To check or clear the counts after replacing consumable parts Method Press the start key The screen for the paper feed counts by paper size is displayed Clearing 1 Select the paper size To clear all counts press the clear key 2 Press the start key The count is cleared Completion Press the stop clear key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed U920 Che
367. tamento della linea 2 dell esempio di copia riporter i valori di riferimento seguenti Valore di riferimento Per la copia singola lo scostamento orizzontale della linea 2 deve limitarsi a 3 mm Per la copia duplex lo scostamento orizzontale della linea 2 deve limitarsi a 4 mm Una volta conclusa la regolazione serrare nuovamente le viti M4 x 14TP F che erano state allentate al Punto 1 Freni Ej TA DEPRESE ERA ERR 2 PO TR Bt as Ps EEL lt bree gt FAMEEN 2 25 HKEE 3mm Y o x TR AED k 2 MAPA BRE 4mm Yo x ESTA EFTAS LARA ATA M4 X 14TP IRE CR A EG TIMOR 2 INACIO METRI ET A E gt FOGA A 2 DEATR 3mm Up MIDA 2 OATH 4mm LAP META PII 1 CREME A M4 X 14TP F 244 ANTA h X 100 lt 1 5 Checking DP original size 1 Check the gap between line 1 of original a and line 2 3 of copy example If the gap exceeds the reference value adjust the gap according to the following procedure Reference value For the sub scan direction vertical gap of line 2 within 1 596 For the main scan direction horizontal gap of line 3 within 1 596 V rification du format d original du DP 1 V rifier l cart en
368. tch 2 YC13 A12 on the engine PWB Feed clutch 3 YC13 A5 on the engine PWB MP paper feed clutch YC6 A9 on the engine PWB MP feed clutch YC6 A11 on the engine PWB Registration clutch YC14 B6 on the engine PWB Duplex feed clutch YC10 B2 on the engine PWB 5 The feedshift sole noid or toner feed solenoid does not operate Broken solenoid coil Check for continuity across the coil If none replace the solenoid Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective engine PWB Run maintenance item U033 and check if the solenoid operates If not replace the engine PWB 1 4 51 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes Check procedures corrective measures 6 The exposure lamp does not turn on or off Poor contact in the con nector terminals Reinsert the connector Also check for continuity within the con nector cable If none remedy or replace the cable Defective scanner PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if YC6 3 on the scanner PWB goes low If not replace the scanner PWB If YC6 3 on the scanner PWB is always low replace the scanner PWB Defective inverter PWB Run maintenance item U061 and check if the exposure lamp turns on with YC1 3 on the inverter PWB go low If not replace the inverter PWB If the exposure lamp doe
369. tem error Normal service call processing 1800 Paper feeder unit communication problem System error service call partial operation 4200 BD steady state problem System error Normal service call processing 8800 Document finisher communication problem System error service call partial operation 9000 DP communication problem System error gt service call partial operation Table 1 4 1 Partial operation control If any of the following calls for service is detected partial operation control will be activated After taking measures against the cause of trouble run maintenance item U906 to reset partial operation control Contents Copy counts problem Machine number mismatch error 1 4 22 2 Self diagnostic codes Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Fax control PWB system problem optional fax Processing with the fax software was disabled due to a hardware or software problem Defective fax con trol PWB Replace the fax control PWB and verify the operation Main PWB type mismatch error Defective PWB Contact the Service Administrative Division Fax control PWB incompatibility detection problem optional fax Fax software is not compatible with main software FAX and the machine are not compatible Use the FAX control PWB that is designed for use with the machine Backup memory EEPROM d
370. tents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures CIS lamp problem After the reading starting when input value at the time of CIS illumination does not exceed the threshold value between 5s Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the main PWB and the connector on the DP main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation Defective DP inverter PWB Replace the DP inverter PWB and check for correct operation Defective CIS Replace the CIS and check for correct oper ation CCD AGC problem After AGC correct input is not obtained at CCD Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the SHD PWB and the connector on the CCD PWB and the continuity across the connec tor terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective exposure lamp Replace the exposure lamp or inverter PWB Defective PWB Replace the SHD PWB or CCD PWB and check for correct operation CIS AGC problem After AGC correct input is not obtained at CIS Defective DP main PWB Replace the DP main PWB and check for correct operation CIS output prob lem Replace the CIS and check for correct oper ation Defective DP inverter PWB Replace the DP inverter PWB and check fo
371. ter the target values which are shown on the specified original P N 303JX57020 executing mainte nance item U425 2 Seta specified original P N 303JX57020 in the DP 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts 1 3 69 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance Describtion item No P U411 When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem 1 3 70 occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and opera tion stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items Method ORIGINAL TARGET 1 Place the specified original for acquiring gamma target data P N 303JX57010 on the platen and press the start key 2 Place the specified original for acquiring matrix target data P N 303JX57010 on the platen and press the start key 3 Select the item Display Description Original to be used for adjustment P N ALL Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 303JX57010 for original size magnification leading edge timing 303JX57020 center line input gamma chromatic aberration filter MTF filter and matrix INPUT Automatic adjustment of second page using the DP 2AC68241 for original size magnification leading edge timing center line GAMMA Automatic adjustment
372. termi nals Check the connection of connector YC2 on the mail box main PWB and the connector of the mail box drive motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective mail box drive motor Replace the mail box drive motor Defective PWB Replace the mail box main PWB or finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Document finisher communication problem optional 3000 sheet docu ment finisher No communication there is no reply after 5 retries Abnormal communication a communica tion error parity or checksum error is detected five times in succession Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective PWB Replace the finisher main PWB or engine PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional 3000 sheet document fin isher Read and write data does not match Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the finisher main PWB and the connector on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective finisher main PWB Replace the finisher main PWB and check for correct operation Backup memory data problem optional punc
373. termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feeder main PWB Replace the paper feeder main PWB and check for correct operation Paper feeder EEPROM error optional paper feeder When writing the data the write data and the read data is not continuously in agreement three times Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation Defective paper feeder Replace the paper feeder with another unit and check the operation If the operation is normal replace or repair optional paper feeder 1 4 27 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Drive motor problem Stable OFF is detected for 1 s continu ously after drive motor stability Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector YC11 on the engine PWB and the connector on the drive motor and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or re
374. the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paper feeder lift motor 1 does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Paper feeder lift motor 2 error optional 3000 sheet paper feeder A motor over current signal is detected continuously for 1 s or longer Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Paper feeder lift motor 2 does not rotate correctly the motor is over loaded Check the gears and remedy if necessary Contents 2GN 2GP 2GR Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder left lift position problem optional 3000 sheet paper feeder Paper feeder switch 2 does not turn on within 30 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective paper feeder lift switch 2 Check if YC5 7 on the paper feeder main PWB goes low when
375. the setting Method 1 Press the start key 2 Press COVERAGE Highlighted ON Non highlighted OFF Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U326 Setting the black line cleaning indication Description Sets whether to display the cleaning guidance when detecting the black line Purpose Displays the cleaning guidance in order to make the call for service with the black line decrease by the rubbish on the platen when scanning from the DP Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select ON or OFF Display Description ON Displays the cleaning guidance OFF Not to display the cleaning guidance COUNT Setting counts of the cleaning guidance indication Initial setting ON 3 Press the start key The setting is set Setting the count value 1 Select COUNT 2 Enter a count using the or numeric keys Setting range 0 to 999 Initial setting 8 When setting is 0 the black line cleaning indication is displayed only if the black line is detected 3 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Side ejection setting Description Sets whether to eject to the side of the machine when an optional curl eliminator is installed Purpose Set according to the prefer
376. the transfer process it passes between the press roller and heat roller which is heated by fuser heaters M or S FH M or FH S Pres sure is applied by the fuser unit pressure springs so that the toner on the paper is melted fused and fixed onto the paper The heat roller is heated by fuser heaters M or S FH M or FH S inside it its surface temperature is detected by the fuser unit thermistor 1 and 2 FTH1 2 and is regulated by the fuser heaters turning on and off If the fuser section becomes abnormally hot fuser unit thermostat 1 and 2 FTS1 2 operates shutting the power to the fuser heaters off When the fusing process is completed the paper is separated from the heat roller by its separation claws and is conveyed from the machine to eject and switchback section Upper fuser unit cover Fuser housing Heat roller Heat roller separation claw Fuser heater M FH M Fuser heater S FH S Fuser unit thermostat 1 FTS1 Fuser unit thermostat 2 FTS2 Fuser unit thermistor 1 FTH1 Fuser unit thermistor 2 FTH2 Press roller Press roller separation claw a lt e O gt YC10 A10 Figure 2 1 22 Fuser section block diagram 2 1 15 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 8 Eject and switchback sections The eject and switchback sections eject paper on which fixing has ended with the eject roller that is rotated by forward rotation of the eject motor
377. tion Document Box 7 9 lt gt ee ee E ooo J 8 7 6 19 20 21 22 23 Figure 1 1 2 1 System menu key indicator 13 Memory indicator 2 Status Job cancel key indicator 14 Error indicator 3 Program key indicator 15 Help key indicator 4 Application key 16 Log out key indicator 5 Counter key indicator 17 Power key 6 Copy key indicator 18 Main power indicator 7 Send key indicator 19 Numeric keys 8 Document box key indicator 20 Clear key 9 Accessibility key indicator 21 Start key indicator 10 Print indicator 22 Stop key 11 Transmission indicator 23 Reset key 12 Reception indicator 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 1 3 Machine cross section Light path
378. tion of the original scanning Purpose Make the adjustment if the magnification in the main scanning direction is incorrect Make the adjustment if the magnification in the auxiliary scanning direction is incorrect Caution Adjust the magnification of the scanner in the following order U053 _ U065 U065 P 1 3 21 main scanning auxiliary scanning P 1 3 21 direction direction Method 1 Pressthe start key 2 Select the item to be adjusted Display Description Setting Initial Change in range setting value per step MAIN SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the main 15 to 15 0 0 1 96 scanning direction SUB SCAN ADJ Scanner magnification in the auxil 25 to 25 0 1 96 iary scanning direction Adjustment main scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value Original Copy Copy example 1 example 2 Figure 1 3 8 5 Press the start key The value is set Adjustment auxiliary scanning direction 1 Press the system menu key 2 Place an original and press the start key to make a test copy 3 Press the system menu key 4 Change the setting value using the or numeric keys For copy example 1 increase the value For copy example 2 decrease the value
379. top key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Setting toner refresh operation Description Sets the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying Purpose To change the toner refresh operation time and the developing bias on time at power on and after copying if image flow level is low Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Select the item to be set 3 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Display Description Setting range Initial setting ON TIME SEC Toner refresh operation time 50 to 150 sec 120 BIAS TIME MSEC Developing bias on time 500 to 1000 msec 700 30 ppm 540 40 50 ppm 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 39 2GN 2GP 2GR Maintenance item No Description U114 Setting separation charger mode Description Sets the separation charger mode Purpose To change the setting if the fuser offset or carrier leaking occurs Method 1 Press the start key 2 Select the mode Display Description MODEO Complete separation mode MODE1 Edging separation mode MODE2 Switches complete and edging separation mode with environmental temperature Initial setting MODE1 3 Press the start key The setting is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintena
380. tre la ligne 1 de l original a et la ligne 2 3 de l exemple de copie Si l cart exc de la valeur de r f rence le r gler selon la proc dure suivante Valeur de r f rence Pour la direction du balayage secondaire l cart vertical de la ligne 2 est de 1 5 Pour la direction du balayage principal l cart horizontal de la ligne 3 est de 1 5 Verificaci n del tamafio de original del DP 1 Compruebe la separaci n entre la l nea 1 del original a y la l nea 2 3 del ejemplo de copia Si la separaci n supera el valor de referencia aj stela siguiendo este procedimiento Valor de referencia Para la direcci n de exploraci n secundaria separaci n vertical de la l nea 2 dentro de 1 5 Para la direcci n de exploraci n principal separaci n horizontal de la linea 3 dentro de 1 5 Pr fen der Originalgr e des DP 1 Den Abstand zwischen der Linie 1 des Originals a und der Linie 2 3 des Kopierbeispiels pr fen Wenn der Abstand gr er als der Bezugswert ist den Abstand mit dem folgenden Verfahren einstellen lt Bezugswert gt Subscanrichtung Vertikaler Abstand der Linie 2 Innerhalb 1 5 Hauptscanrichtung Horizontaler Abstand der Linie 3 Innerhalb 11 5 Verifica delle dimensioni dell originale DP 1 Verificare lo scostamento fra la linea 1 dell originale a e la linea 2 3 dell esempio di copia Se lo scostamento supera il valore di riferi mento reg
381. ture de ferme ture du DP de 30 degr s 10 Retirer les quatre vis 11 puis le couvercle arri re 12 du DP A Para ajustar el DP abra o cierre el ngulo 30 grados 10 Saque cuatro tornillos 11 y retire la cubierta trasera 12 del DP A Einstellen des Offnungs SchlieRungswin kels des DP um 30 Grad 10 Vier Schrauben 11 abnehmen und dann die R ckabdeckung 12 des DP A abnehmen Per regolare l angolo di chiusura apertura del DP a 30 gradi 10 Rimuovere quattro viti 11 quindi rimuovere il coperchio posteriore 12 del DP A zi ES DP HHAMEWEA 30 E 10 9 F 4 PURE C11 Jade F DP CAO BUE ii 12 o DP ARAA E 30 EREET SRA 10 EX 11 4 ASS LDP ASK A DIA 12 ZEV 3 11 Remove stop ring 13 of angle control fitting D that has been installed in step 12 to remove shaft 14 12 Insert shaft 14 into the rear side of the right hinge 13 Attach stop ring 13 to the notch of shaft 14 and secure shaft 14 14 Reinstall rear cover 12 that has been removed in step 10 with four screws 11 11 Retirer l anneau de but e 13 de la fixation d angle D install e l tape 12 pour enlever la tige 14 12 Ins rer la tige 14 l arri re de la charni re droite 13 Fixer l anneau de but e 13 sur l encoche de la tige 14 et mettre en place la tige 14 14 Remettre en place le couvercle arri re 12 retir l tape 10 l aide des quatre vis 11
382. u ndern Die Verwendung des Standardwertes f r den Verschl sselungscode 000000 hat keinen Einfluss auf die Zuverlassigkeit der Datensicherheit Falls der Kunde den Code ndern m chte weisen Sie ihn an die folgenden Schritte auszuf hren Dr cken Sie Verschl ssel code Dr cken Sie R cktaste um 000000 zu l schen Geben Sie den Verschl sselungscode 6 stellige alphanumerische Zeichenfolge ein und dr cken Sie OK Erinnern Sie den Kunden daran dass er den eingegebenen Verschl sselungscode nicht vergessen darf Dr cken Sie OK Die Festplatte wird formatiert Nach der Formatierung werden Sie auf dem Bildschirm aufgefordert den Netzschalter aus und wieder einzuschalten Wenn der Er ffnungsbildschirm angezeigt wird stellen Sie sicher dass ein Festplattensymbol 3 unten rechts auf dem Bildschirm angezeigt wird Siehe Abbildung B Bewahren Sie den USB Schl ssel in der USB Schl sselpackung hinten in der linken mittleren Abdeckung auf die sich hinten am Ger t befindet Siehe Abbildung C AA ESRB ma FAMO EPAL OLT SAFIR 1 TIRA ZU TAR Y AANT E BARI F7AAI ARTE LIE FT 2 LEC HUPR SVS BBC AUR UC RR Ze V T EMERBLTAD EATER PERO EAE V C V LLAME TA AMAT MERO USB A EV A y pZ USB RAFAL EAS y E ANI 172 PAS ATI IMD Sieh amp UTA REE LE F IPRA ENO SC OK ZH MHOR LEM C USB RARA ERAT v EUIS ERAT FRANSES READ Aii
383. u c t sup rieur et du c t avant et desserrer les deux vis 3 du c t gauche 3 Desmonte el soporte de grapas 1 saque los dos tornillos 2 del lado superior y el lado delantero y afloje los dos tornillos 3 en el lado izquierdo 3 Den Heftklammerhalter 1 entfernen die zwei Schrauben 2 an der Ober und Vorderseite herausdrehen und die zwei Schrauben 3 auf der linken Seite l sen Rimuovete il vassoio graffette 1 rimuovete le due viti 2 dal lato superiore e dal lato frontale e allentate le due viti 3 sul lato sinistro 3 je FERITA AP EDURIBIURM24 3222 Q REMENAR 3 AT JZ vx 0 ABDAL Eft AMID EA 2 2 KEI LT ENDER 3 2 4 wb 50D 4 Open the hook 4 on the right side and remove the left front cover 5 4 Ouvrir le crochet 4 se trouvant sur le c t droit et retirer le couvercle avant gauche 5 4 Abra el gancho 4 en el lado derecho y desmonte la cubierta delantera izquierda 5 4 Den Haken 4 auf der rechten Seite ffnen und die linke Frontabdeckung 5 abnehmen 4 Aprite il gancio 4 che si trova sul lato destro e rimuovete il coperchio frontale sinistro 5 4 FTF USE BUT Ac BU LO 4 EMOS o ANTE 4 E Bv C ZB 78 5 amp W 3 5 Remove the screw 6 and the pin 7 to remove the upper left cover 8 5 Retirer la vis 6 etla broche 7 pour enlever le couvercle sup rieur g
384. u couvercle de l unit d alimentation d original avec de l alcool 20 Coller l tiquette relative la proc dure d utili sation G dans la langue correspondant la destination du MFP sur l tiquette d j appo s e sur le couvercle de l unit d alimentation d original Figure a Pegue la etiqueta Procedimiento opera tivo excepto para los modelos de 100 V 19 Limpie con alcohol la superficie de etiquetas de la cubierta de la unidad de alimentaci n de originales 20 Pegue la etiqueta Procedimiento operativo G del idioma correspondiente al destino del MFP Sobre la etiqueta existente de la cubierta de la unidad de alimentaci n de originales Figura a Anbringen des Schildes Funktions anweisung auBer 100 V Modelle 19 Die Schildoberfl che an der Abdeckung der Originalzufuhreinheit mit Alkohol reinigen 20 Das Schild Funktionsanweisung G in der Sprache des Bestimmungsortes des MFP auf das bestehende Schild an der Abde ckung der Originalzufuhreinheit aufkleben Abbildung a Applicazione dell etichetta Procedura di funzionamento eccetto modelli 100 V 19 Pulire con alcool la superficie dell etichetta sul coperchio dell unit di alimentazione originali 20 Applicare l etichetta Procedura di funziona mento G nella lingua corrispondente alla destinazione dell MFP sopra l etichetta del coperchio dell unit di alimentazione origi nali Figura a MNAE GREDIR ER 100V 215 19 HA
385. u key Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed 1 3 81 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 3 82 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 4 1 Paper misfeed detection 1 Paper misfeed indication When a paper misfeed occurs the machine immediately stops copying and displays the jam location on the operation panel Paper misfeed counts sorted by the detection condition can be checked in maintenance item U903 To remove paper jammed in the machine open the front cover left cover or pull the cassette out To remove original jammed in the optional DP open the document processor top cover or document processor reverse unit To remove the jammed paper in optional document finisher detach the finisher from the machine Paper misfeed detection can be reset by opening and closing the respective covers to turn safety switch off and on 1 4 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 Paper misfeed detection conditions __ Document processor Built in finisher osi Va FPFGLI VA Q I SENS2 PPSENS3 Sfroos Paper feeder 3000 sheet paper feeder 1 Figure 1 4 1 4 2 Section Description Conditions 2GN 2GP 2GR Specified time System 04 Cover open Cover is open during copying 05 Secondary paper feed does not start Secondary paper feed does not start within specified time of arrival of paper at the registration section 09 3000 sheet
386. ubierta de expulsi n trasera F utilizando un tornillo TP M3 x 05 L cada uno 19 Den in Schritt 3 entfernten Heftklammerhalter wieder an seiner urspr nglichen Stelle anbringen und dann die linke Transferabdeckung und die Frontabdeckung schlie en 20 Die vordere Auswurfabdeckung E und die hintere Auswurfabdeckung F mit je einer TP Schraube M3 x 05 L befestigen 19 Vuelva a colocar el soporte de grapas que fue desmontado en el paso 3 a su posici n original y cierre la cubierta izquierda de transferencia y la cubierta delantera 20 Utilizzando una vite TP M3 x 05 L ciascuno montate il coperchio frontale di espulsione carta E ed il coperchio posteriore di espulsione carta F 19 FRE BME EAE RI ERBE KAI Ze ARI 20 2H SIBI RZZM3 x OSTRAS EHER a AAD EDA EN ate D Ur CF 19 FIE 3 CIO JE LEAF VV TERV HO HI MEEA 23 38 EUG SAA gH 25 20 BEH 3 Bi E 38 E OBEH Z2 73 4 F CA M3 X O5TP L FLA CIBO REO S 21 Attach the copy tray G 21 Fixer le plateau copies G 21 Instale la bandeja de copias G 21 Die Kopienablage G anbringen 21 Montate il vassoio delle copie G 21 LHATER O 21 BEM bh Vt 0 EY MS 10 22 Open the staple cover C and insert the staple cartridge H into the stapler 23 Close the staple cover C 22 Ouvrir le couvercle d agrafes C et ins rer la cartouche d agrafes H dans l agrafeuse 23
387. uld this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U411 Method DP FACE UP 1 Seta specified original P N 2AC68241 in the DP 2 Select INPUT Display Description INPUT Automatic adjustment of first page using the DP for original size magnifica tion leading edge timing center line 3 Press the start key Auto adjustment starts When automatic adjustment has normally completed RESULT OK 00 is displayed If a problem occurs during auto adjustment ERROR XX XX is replaced by an error code is displayed and operation stops Should this happen determine the details of the problem and either repeat the procedure from the beginning or adjust the remaining items manually by running the corresponding maintenance items 4 To return to the screen for selecting an item press the stop key Method DP FACE DOWN 1 Select the item The screen for executing is displayed Display Description NORMAL TARGET Uses the value determined using maintenance item U425 as the tar get data ORIGINAL TARGET Uses the specified original for acquiring data as the target data Method NORMAL TREGET 1 Select the item Display Description
388. ument finisher is indicated during copying inter nal tray paper entry sensor 2 jam Jam code 87 Defective internal tray paper entry sensor 2 Run maintenance item U241 and turn internal tray paper entry sensor 2 on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 39 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying main tray eject jam Jam code 88 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Eject switch 1 side registration home position sensor 1 2 paper conveying belt position detection sensor 40 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying cen terfold unit jam Jam code 89 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn the following switch on and off manually Replace the original switchback switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Centerfold paper entry sensor centerfold eject switch centerfold paper detection switch 41 A paper jam in optional document finisher is indicated during copying mail box jam Jam code 90 Defective sensor switch Run maintenance item U241 and turn th
389. un maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 2 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 26 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original feed conveying sec tion Jam code 72 Defective switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse Original feed switch original registration switch 27 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original conveying section Jam code 73 Defective DP timing switch 1 Run maintenance item U244 and turn the DP timing switch 1 on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corre sponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 1 4 17 2GN 2GP 2GR Problem Causes check procedures Corrective measures 28 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated during copying a jam in the original registration section Jam code 74 Defective original registra tion switch Run maintenance item U244 and turn the original registration switch on and off manually Replace the switch if indication of the corresponding switch on the touch panel is not displayed in reverse 29 An original jams in optional DP is indi cated durin
390. unit 1 Remove four screws and remove the right lower cover 2 Remove two screws and two MP holder plates 3 Remove two pins two screws and two con nectors and then remove the MP unit Removing the MP separation pulley 4 Reverse the MP unit and remove the spring and stop ring from the MP separation pulley shaft and move the bushing inside MP holder plate mW IN A E d Pin plate Figure 1 5 8 Bushing Stop ring MP separation pully shaft Figure 1 5 9 5 Raise the MP separation shaft as shown in the figure remove the holder plate and the bushing and then remove the MP separa tion pulley Take care not to remove the spring pin of the gear at the rear of the MP separation pulley shaft If it is removed refit it to its original position Removing the MP paper feed pulley 6 Remove the connector of the MP paper switch and remove the wire from the three clamps 7 Remove the screw and remove the MP unit cover 8 Remove the stop ring and bushing on the front of the MP paper feed pulley shaft 2GN 2GP 2GR Holder plate Bushing Connector Figure 1 5 11 BI b Bushing Figure 1 5 12 1 5 5 2GN 2GP 2GR 9 Raise the MP paper feed pulley shaft as shown in the figure remove the stop ring and then remove the MP paper feed pulley Removing the MP forwarding pulley 10 Remove the sponge 11 Remove the stop ring and MP paper feed clutch Wh
391. unit FK 715 E 302GR93060 2GR93060 15 A01 Heat roller PARTS ROLLER HEAT SP 302GR94270 2GR94270 15 32 Heat roller separation claw CLAW HEAT ROLLER 2BL20080 15 1 Press roller PARTS ROLLER PRESS SP 302GR94280 2GR94280 15 A02 Press roller separation claw CLAW PRESS ROLLER 2BL20350 6 34 2 4 1 Maintenance part name Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part No Alternative part No 2GN 2GP 2GR zm ewe Upper duplex feed roller Lower duplex feed roller Duplex feed pulley ROLLER DU FEED UP ROLLER DU FEED LOW PULLEY DU 2BL07020 2BL07030 2BL07040 N Eject roller Switchback roller Eject pulley Eject pulley Switchback pulley ROLLER EXIT ROLLER FEED SHIFT PULLEY EXIT C PULLEY EXIT PULLEY FEED SHIFT 302BL21021 302BL21031 2BL21520 302GR28060 2BL21330 2BL21021 2BL21031 2GR28060 O 0 00 00 N Dust filter 1 Dust filter 1 PARTS FILTER DUST F1 ASSY PARTS FILTER DUST F2 ASSY 302GR94430 302GR94440 2GR94430 2GR94440 M EE Oo C2 2 4 2 Periodic maintenance procedures Section Maintenance part location Method Maintenance cycle Points and cautions 2GN 2GP 2GR Test copy and test print Section Perform at the maxi mum copy size Maintenance part location Test copy Method Every service Maintenance cycle Points and cautions Paper feed section Upper lower paper
392. ware version 2GN 2000 XLG 368 2006 04 17 Engine Information Counter 10 Engine ROM Version 2GW_1000 003 001 31 Printed 11 Front Panel ROM Version 2GW_A000 001 019 Total Printed Pages 631 12 NVRAM Version Bb04B29 Bb04B29 Copier 11 13 Scanner Version 2GW 1200 001 088 Printer 620 14 FAX Slot FAX 0 FAX BOOT Version 3KH 5000 001 001 32 Scanned FAX APL Version 3KH 5100 001 001 Total Scanned Pages 1 FAX IPL Version 3KH_5200 001 001 Copier 0 15 Serial No AFZ3123456 Other 1 16 MAC Address 00 C0 EE D0 01 0D 33 jc Size gt A gl eo Toner Coverage 17 Period 07 11 05 07 12 05 09 05 P E 18 Usage Page A4 Letter Conversion 3043 50 B4 19 Average B5 Total 2 90 o Hi te Ledger 7 Printer 2 87 T B E dien Legal 0 Letter 0 20 9 20 Last Page 2 80 Statement 0 Other 0 Installed Options 21 Document Processor Installed 34 FAX Infomation 22 Paper Feeder Cassette Rings Normal 3 23 Finisher 3000 Finisher Rings FAX TEL 3 Mail Box Not Installed Rings TAD 3 24 Job Separator Installed TX SPEED V 29 9600bps 25 Memory Card Not Installed RX SPEED 9600bps 26 PDF Expansion Kit Installed ECM TX ON 27 Fax Backup Kit Not Installed ECM RX OFF 28 Security Kit Installed V 34 TX 29 Data Security Kit C Software REG G3 TX EQR 4db 30 Security Library Version 0 50 REG G3 RX EQR Odb RX MODEM LEVEL 43dBm SGL LVL MODEM 9dBm 35 1 1 36 500 530 37 0 0 0 0 38
393. wer 4 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Maintenance item No 2GN 2GP 2GR Description U102 Setting the cleaning interval for the main charger Description Changes the intervals at which the main charger is cleaned Purpose To change the setting when the background is visible Setting 1 Press the start key 2 Change the setting using the or numeric keys Description Setting range Initial setting Main charger cleaning operation intervals 0 to 20 unit 1000 sheets 5 When set to 0 the cleaning for the main charger is not operated 3 Press the start key The value is set Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Displaying the drum type Description Displays the drum surface potential set as EEPROM of the drum unit Purpose To check the drum surface potential Method Press the start key Drum surface potential V is displayed Completion Press the stop key The screen for selecting a maintenance item No is displayed Checking the drum count Description Displays the drum counts for checking Purpose To check the drum status Method Press the start key The drum counter count is displayed Setting 1 Change the setting using the or numeric keys 2 Press the start key The count is set Completion Press the s
394. wer plug and turn the main power switch on Upgrading firmware starts for 9 minutes Caution Never turn the main power switch off during upgrading Completed is displayed on the touch panel when upgrading is complete Press the Power key on the operation panel to off Make sure that the Power indicator and the Memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch And then unplug the power cable from the wall outlet Remove Compact Flash or USB memory from the machine Insert the power plug and turn the main power switch on Figure 1 6 1 1 6 1 2GN 2GP 2GR 1 6 2 Adjustment free variable resistors VR The variable resistors listed below are set at the factory prior to shipping and cannot be adjusted in the field High voltage PWB VR2 VR42 VR201 VR204 1 6 3 Remarks on main PWB replacement When replacing the main PWB remove EEPROM from the main PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new main PWB EEPROM Main PWB Figure 1 6 2 1 6 4 Remarks on scanner PWB replacement When replacing the scanner PWB remove the EEPROM from the scanner PWB that has been removed and then reattach it to the new scanner PWB EEPROM Scanner PWB Figure 1 6 3 2GN 2GP 2GR 2 1 1 Paper feed section The paper feed section consists of the primary feed and secondary feed subsections Primary feed conveys paper from the cass
395. wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged O e After maintenance always check that all the parts screws connectors and wires that were removed have been refitted correctly Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector trapped wire and missing screws i Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction handbook are clean and not peeling Replace with new ones if necessary Q Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below o Use only a small amount of solvent at a time being careful not to spill Wipe spills off completely Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power Switch on Always wash hands afterwards Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire insa furmace iii EE pi e eR en etel eR e tete dE TQ CU nes N Should smoke be seen coming from the copier remove the power plug from the wall outlet imme e METE o E a A A a A an E O NRE A 3 Miscellaneous WARNING Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol other than the specified refiner it may generate toxic gas ooonoocccicnnnncccccnonononcccnonanoncccnn nano nr emm
396. within 12 s of lower lift motor turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lower lift motor and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Broken gears or couplings of lower lift motor Replace lower lift motor Defective lower lift motor Check for continuity across the coil If none replace lower lift motor Defective lower lift limit switch Check if YC13 B15 on the engine PWB goes low when lower lift limit switch is turned off If not replace lower lift limit switch Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector of lower lift limit switch and the connector YC13 on the engine PWB and the continuity across the connector terminals Repair or replace if necessary Defective engine PWB Replace the engine PWB and check for cor rect operation 1 4 25 2GN 2GP 2GR Contents Remarks Causes Check procedures corrective measures Paper feeder lift motor 1 error optional paper feeder When optional cassette 3 is inserted paper feeder lift switch 1 does not turn on within 12 s of paper feeder lift motor 1 turning on Poor contact in the connector termi nals Check the connection of connector on the engine PWB and the connector on the paper feeder main PWB and the continuity across the connector termin
397. y el lado delantero utilizando un tornillo TP M3 x 05 E 8 Den J obtrenner A von der Vorderseite in den MFP einf hren und nach links schieben Die R ckseite mit einem Stift 14 und die Vorderseite mit einer TP Schraube M3 x 05 E sichern 8 Inserite il separatore A nell MFP dal lato frontale e fatelo scorrere a sinistra Assicuratene il lato posteriore usando un pernetto 14 e il lato frontale usando una vite TP M3 x 05 E 8 JMFPd E PLAT RIME AE MEA E de CA Je TRI AE DUET n WEZ M3 8 Vater 14 14K CHE LC 2 o ATE EA M3 X 05TP E 1 KTH x OSTP E 5 x Bii nl A JARE 04 ERW A a A MFP ARO BERET E V HAL ARMADA FTA np ECL EFD 9 Connect the connector 15 of the job separator to the lower connector 16 of the MFP 9 Connecter le connecteur 15 du s parateur de travaux au connecteur inf rieur 16 du MFP 9 Conecte el conector 15 del separador de trabajos en el conector inferior 16 del MFP 9 Den Steckverbinder 15 des J obtrenners an den unteren Steckverbinder 16 des MFP anschlieBen 9 Collegate il connettore 15 del separatore al connettore inferiore 16 dell MFP 9 FE MEAT AEREA 15 BALA TERA mM 16 E 9 Zu v 0u5x272 15 FAM OD amZCB HD 16 Bee 5 10 10 10 10 10 10

Service Manual / ENGLISH CD 1230-40-50 // DC 2230-40-50

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents